Adjunting The Illumination - 00192546-01

Table of contents
s Introduction and
technical data
Operational safety
Introduction and
basic concepts
Placement functions
SIPLACE
80S-20 / F4 Single functions
Software Version 407.xx
Vision functions
User Manual
What schould you do ...
Error information
and diagnostics
Online help system
Component handling
Station extensions / hardware
Station extensions / software
Software installation
Index
01/2001 US Edition
UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T
X WINDOWS is a trademark
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents We have checked the contents of the printed documentation to ensure
is not permitted without express written authority. that it is in agreement with the hardware and software described
therein. However, since discrepancies cannot be ruled out, we cannot
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights creat-
assume responsibility for complete agreement. The information given
ed by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are re-
in this printed documentation is however regularly reviewed and nec-
served.
essary corrections included in subsequent editions. We would appre-
ciate any suggestions for improvements
Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Subject to change without prior notice
Order No.: 00192546-01 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

To be ordered from
Siemens PLS AG
PL EA 1 V GC DOK
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual Contents
01/2001 US Edition
Contents 0
Page
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.1.1 SIPLACE on the World Wide Web (WWW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2 Structure of the user manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3 User classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4 Revision index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1.4.1 Survey of the revisions in the 03/96 edition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.4 Overview of the revisions in the 07/97 edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.4.8 Overview of the revisions in the 01/2001 US edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5 Description of the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.5.1 SIPLACE 80S-20 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.5.2 Technical data overview of the SIPLACE 80S-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.5.3 Functional description of the SIPLACE 80F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.5.4 General view of the SIPLACE 80F4 with wafflepack changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.5.5 Technical data overview of the SIPLACE 80F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.6 The line concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

1.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.6.2 Technical data line concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.7 Electrical and pneumatic connection points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.8 Technical data ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1.8.1 Technical data electrical ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.8.2 Technical data compressed air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.8.3 Technical data compressed air specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.8.4 Technical data noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.8.5 Technical data permissible ambient factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.9 Dimensions and weight of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

1.9.1 Dimensions of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.9.2 Technical data dimensions, weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.9.3 Center of gravity of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3
Contents SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
01/2001 US Edition
1.10 Setting up the placement machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

1.10.1 Transport dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.10.2 Transport configuration and transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.10.3 Quality of the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.10.4 Compressed air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.10.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.10.6 Setting up the placement machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.11 Overview of the modules - controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

1.11.1 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.11.2 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1.11.3 Ergonomic arrangement of the controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.11.3.1 Controls on the input and output conveyor sides of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.11.3.2 Controls on the machine console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.11.4 Technical data component barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1.12 Overview of the modules - gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

1.12.1 Position of the gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.12.2 Structure of the X axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.12.3 Technical data of the X axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.12.4 Structure of the Y axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.12.5 Technical data of the Y axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.13 Overview of the modules - placement heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

1.13.1 Structure of the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.13.2 Description of the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.13.3 Technical data of the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.13.4 Structure of the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.13.5 Description of the Pick&Place head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.13.6 Technical data - Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.14 Overview of the modules - vision systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

1.14.1 Technical data of the component vision module on the 12-segment
Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.14.2 Technical data - fine pitch vision module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.14.3 Technical data PCB vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.15 Overview of the modules - PCB conveyor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

1.15.1 Structure of the PCB conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.15.2 Technical data single conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.15.3 Technical data dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2 Operational Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.1 Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.1.1 Conventions for the use of hazard symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.1.2 Qualified personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.1.3 Use as prescribed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.1.4 Important notes on operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4
01/2001 US Edition
2.1.5 Warning signs on the placement system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

2.1.6 Additional warning signs for the NAFTA region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.1.7 Safety instructions for the component vision modules (80F4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.1.8 Safety instructions for the coplanarity laser module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.1.9 Safety instructions for the PCB barcode reader (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.1.10 Safety instructions for coupling and uncoupling the mobile changeover table . . . . 87
2.1.11 Safety instructions for changing the height of component tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.1.12 Safety instructions for the changeable component feeder table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.1.13 Safety instructions for opening the protective covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2.1.14 Securing the placement machine to prevent it slipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.1.15 Safety instructions for processing capacitors based on powdered metal . . . . . . . . 95
2.2 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

2.2.1 Protective covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.2.1.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.2.2 Guard on the input / output conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.2.3 EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-buttons, protective cover switches ... . 99
2.2.3.1 Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2.2.3.2 Status messages and the action required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.2.4 Safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.2.5 Guard on the component table locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2.3 Residual voltages in the servo unit and discharge times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2.3.1 Operating voltages, residual voltages and discharge times after pressing
the emergency stop mushroom-head push-button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.3.2 Residual voltages and discharge times after switching off at the main switch . . . . 106
2.4 Disabling the compr. air supply and discharging the pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2.5 Energy state of the machine after switching off at the main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.5.1 Placement system switched off at the main switch, but still connected .... . . . . . . . 109
2.5.2 Placement system switched off at the main switch and disconnected ... . . . . . . . . 109
2.5.3 Compressed air conditions in the machine after switching off at the main switch. . 109
2.6 Lock out and tag out procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

2.6.1 Purpose and scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.6.2 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.6.3 Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.6.4 Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.6.5 Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.6.6 Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.7 Emissions and energy efficiency of the MCM 1405 ND monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2.7.1 X-ray radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2.7.2 Efficiency and electromagnetic emissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2.8 ESD guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

2.8.1 What does ESD mean? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.8.2 Important measures to protect against static charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.8.3 Handling ESD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.8.4 Measurements and modifications to ESD modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.8.5 Dispatching ESD modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5
01/2001 US Edition
3 Introduction and basic concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.1 Machine displays and controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

3.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.1.2 Machine switches and buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.1.3 Main fault indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.1.3.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.1.4 Barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.1.5 Station computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.1.6 Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.1.7 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.2 Principles of the graphic user interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

3.2.1 Inputs and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.2.2 Components of the user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.2.2.1 Icons in the working or display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.2.2.2 Toolbar in main view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.3 User interface - views and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

3.3.1 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.3.2 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.3.2.1 "Mode" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.3.2.2 "View" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.3.2.3 "Options" menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.3.2.4 "Language" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.3.2.5 "Help" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4 Placement functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.1 Setup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

4.1.1 "Setup location x" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.1.1.1 Meaning of the entries in the setup table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.1.2 Component verification with barcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.1.2.1 Acceptable barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.1.2.2 Manual input of the component barcodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.1.2.3 Refilling an empty track with "Refill track". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.2 Error display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

4.2.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.2.2 "Track errors" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.2.2.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "Track errors" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.2.3 "Machine errors" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.2.3.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "Machine errors" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.2.4 "Transport errors" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.2.4.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "Transport errors" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.2.5 "General errors" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.2.5.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "General errors" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6
01/2001 US Edition
4.3 Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

4.3.1 "Empty tracks" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.3.1.1 Meaning of the entries in the table "Empty tracks" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.3.1.2 Functions in the "Empty tracks" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.3.1.3 "Refilling" empty tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.3.1.4 Refilling all empty tracks of a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.3.1.5 Refilling empty track when the "Component verification with barcode" option
is active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.3.2 "Omit components" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.3.2.1 Meaning of the entries in the tables of the "Omit components" view . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.3.2.2 Omit component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.3.3 "Trays" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.3.3.1 Updating inventory levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.3.3.2 Entering new inventory levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.3.4 "Linear feeder" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.3.4.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for the linear feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.3.4.2 Vibrate track with linear feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.3.5 "Wafflepack Changer" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.3.5.1 Go to refill position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.3.5.2 Quit refill position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.3.5.3 WPC refilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.3.5.4 WPC reference run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.3.5.5 Transport position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.3.5.6 Feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5 Single functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.1 General comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.2 Single functions, gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

5.2.1 "Revolver head functions" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.2.1.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.2.2 "IC-head functions" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.2.2.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.2.3 "Gantry functions" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.2.3.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
5.2.4 "Vacuum test" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.2.4.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.2.5 "Nozzle offset" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5.2.5.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.2.6 "Nozzle configuration revolver head" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.2.6.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.2.7 "Nozzle changer configuration revolver head" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5.2.7.1 General comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.2.7.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5.2.8 "Nozzle changer configuration IC-head" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.2.8.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.2.9 "Fluxing" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7
01/2001 US Edition
5.3 Single functions, transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

5.3.1 "Transport functions" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.3.1.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.3.2 "PCB conveyor width" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
5.3.2.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
6 Vision functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
6.1 The vision systems on the placement machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

6.1.1 Component vision module on the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
6.1.2 Component camera system on the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
6.1.3 PCB camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
6.1.4 Vision analysis unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
6.2 PCB vision system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

6.2.1 System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6.2.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6.2.3 Description of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6.2.4 Sequence of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6.2.5 Criteria for Creating Fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6.3 Component vision systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

6.3.1 Component vision system on the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.3.1.1 System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.3.1.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.3.1.3 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
6.3.2 Component camera module for the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
6.3.2.1 System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
6.3.2.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.3.2.3 Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.3.3 Criteria for Recognition of Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.4 Access to the Teach Fiducial and Test Component Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.5 Teach Fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

6.5.1 Teach Fiducial Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.5.2 Information on the Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.5.2.1 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.5.2.2 Input Boxes, Option Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.5.2.3 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.5.2.4 Video Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.5.2.5 Warning and Message Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.5.3 Select Fiducial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
6.5.3.1 Select Gantry Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.5.3.2 Load Fiducial Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.5.3.3 Change Fiducial Name Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6.5.3.4 Define New Fiducial Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
6.5.3.5 Save Fiducial Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
6.5.4 Teach Fiducial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
8
01/2001 US Edition
6.5.4.1 Standard Values Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

6.5.4.2 High, Middle and Low Resolution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.5.4.3 Search Area Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.5.5 Contrast Sensitivity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6.5.5.1 Transforms 1 to 5 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
6.5.5.2 Program Transform 5 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
6.5.6 Test Fiducial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.5.6.1 Center Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
6.5.6.2 Test Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6.5.6.3 Move X/ Y Axes Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6.5.6.4 PCB to Processing Conveyor Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.5.6.5 PCB to Output Conveyor Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.6 Test Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

6.6.1 Test Component Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6.6.2 Information on the Test Component Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6.6.2.1 Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6.6.2.2 Input Boxes, Option Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6.6.2.3 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6.6.2.4 Video Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
6.6.2.5 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
6.6.3 Select Package Form Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
6.6.3.1 Camera Type Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
6.6.3.2 Load GF data Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6.6.3.3 Save GF data Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.6.4 Test Component Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
6.6.4.1 Pick Up Component Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
6.6.4.2 Display Component Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
6.6.4.3 Test Component Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
6.6.4.4 Measure Component Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
6.6.4.5 Store image Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
6.6.4.6 Evaluat. time Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
6.6.4.7 Information on the Group of Edit GF Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
6.6.4.8 Illumination Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
6.6.4.9 Package Dimension Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
6.6.4.10 Pin Dimension Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
6.6.4.11 Ball Image Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6.6.4.12 Transform ... Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
6.6.4.13 Measure Mode Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
6.6.4.14 Information on Measurement Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
6.6.4.15 Recommendations regarding the Optimum Sequence of Measurement Methods 324
6.6.4.16 Size measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
6.6.4.17 'Row' measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
6.6.4.18 Corner measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
6.6.4.19 Lead measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
6.6.4.20 Grid measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6.6.4.21 Ball measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
6.6.4.22 Set component type option (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
6.7 Guidelines for Describing Package Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

6.7.1 Transfer of Package Form Data and the Package Form Interpreter . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6.7.2 Flow Charts for Programming and Testing a Package Form (GF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
9
01/2001 US Edition
6.7.3 Shapes and possible measuring methods for rough (G) and fine centering (F) . . . 343
6.7.4 Test Package Form - Visual Representation /
Programming Measurement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
6.7.5 Parameters for the Measuring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
6.7.6 Setting the Components Illumination at the 12-Segment Collect&Place
Head Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
6.7.6.1 General Information on Illumination Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
6.7.6.2 Pseudo color representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
6.7.6.3 Settings for Illuminating Standard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
6.7.6.4 Settings for Illuminating Other Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
6.7.6.5 Testing Illumination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
6.7.6.6 General Information on Setting Illumination Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
6.7.7 Setting the Component Illumination on the Fine Pitch Vision Module . . . . . . . . . . . 354
6.7.7.1 General Information on Illumination Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
6.7.7.2 Pseudo color representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
6.7.7.3 Settings for Illuminating Standard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
6.7.7.4 Settings for Illuminating Other Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
6.7.7.5 Testing Illumination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
6.7.7.6 General Information on Setting Illumination Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
6.8 Recommendation for visually centering components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

6.8.1 Visually centering flip-chips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
6.8.1.1 Entering the data on the line computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
6.8.1.2 Setting the parameters on the station computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
6.8.1.3 Recommended sequence of measurements for visually centering flip-chips . . . . 360
6.8.2 General recommendations for centering flip-chips, BGAs and screening plates. . . 361
6.8.2.1 Setting the ball contrast parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6.8.2.2 Setting the ball radius parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6.8.2.3 Setting the case shape dimension parameters on the station computer . . . . . . . 361
6.8.3 Visually centering flip-chips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6.8.3.1 Setting the parameters on the station computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6.8.3.2 Recommended sequence of measurements for optically centering bare dies . . . 362
6.8.4 Centering shielding plates using the vision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6.8.4.1 Data input on the line computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6.8.4.2 Setting parameters on the station computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6.8.4.3 Recommended sequence of measurements for > 32 mm x 32 mm
shielding plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
6.8.4.4 Optimizing the multiple measurement for shielding plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7 What should you do ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
7.1 Switching on the SIPLACE line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

7.1.1 Switching on the line computer / starting the user interface of the line
computer program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
7.1.2 What you should check before switching on the stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
7.1.3 Switching on the station/starting the user interface of the station computer
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
7.1.4 "Switching on the SIPLACE line" flow chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
10
01/2001 US Edition
7.2 Switching off the SIPLACE line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

7.2.1 Switching off the line computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
7.2.2 Switching off the stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
7.2.3 Starting stations that remain switched on after the line computer has been
shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
7.3 Changing jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
7.4 When you change shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.5 When you, as an operator, carry out a walk-through inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.6 Preliminary set-up of the placement station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
7.7 Changing the set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

7.7.1 What you should note when changing the feeder modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
7.8 Component table, mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

7.8.1 Safety instructions for docking and undocking the mobile component table . . . . . . 382
7.8.2 Undocking the component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
7.8.3 Docking the component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
7.9 How to avoid track errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

7.9.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
7.9.2 ... on the 8 mm S tape feeder module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
7.9.3 ... on the tape container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
7.9.4 Component coordinate system and pick-up angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
7.10 What to note when refilling components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
7.11 Tools for the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
7.12 Operator profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
7.13 Line engineer profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
8 Error information and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
8.2 Calling error information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

8.2.1 Displaying information on the current error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
8.2.2 Displaying information on a selected error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
8.2.2.1 Meaning of the colors in the error information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
8.2.2.2 Inserting or editing comments on errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
8.3 Clearing errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
8.4 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

8.4.1 General comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
8.4.2 Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
11
01/2001 US Edition
8.4.2.1 Information button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

8.4.2.2 Diagnostics buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
8.4.3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
9 Online help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

9.1.1 Functions in the "Help" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
9.1.1.1 Displaying the contents of the help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
9.1.1.2 Displaying help on a topic area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
9.1.1.3 Displaying help on the current view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
9.1.1.4 Calling help on use of the Windows help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
9.1.1.5 Calling general station computer information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
9.1.1.6 Calling help on an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
9.1.2 Functions in the main help system window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
9.1.2.1 Copying a help file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
9.1.2.2 Printing a help topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
9.1.2.3 Searching for a help topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
10 Component handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

10.1.1 Safety instructions for processing capacitors based on powdered metal . . . . . . . 426
10.2 Technical data for the feeder modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

10.2.1 8 mm S II module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
10.2.2 3 x 8 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
10.2.3 12/16 mm S module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
10.2.4 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model C/D . . . . . . . . 430
10.2.5 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model E . . . . . . . . . . 431
10.2.6 24/32 mm S module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
10.2.7 Linear vibratory feeder, type 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
10.2.8 Bulk case feeder (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
10.2.9 44 mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
10.2.10 56 mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
10.2.11 72mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
10.2.12 88mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
10.2.13 Component disposal module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
10.3 Setting up the feeder modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

10.3.1 Preparing the component table and module for set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
10.3.2 Inserting the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
10.4 Tape container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

10.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
10.5 Used tape cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

10.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
12
01/2001 US Edition
10.5.2 Inserting the tape into the tape cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
10.6 Component table, mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

10.6.1 Safety instructions for docking and undocking the mobile component table . . . . . 447
10.6.2 Undocking the component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
10.6.3 Docking the component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
10.7 Wafflepack Changer (80F4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

10.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10.7.2 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
10.7.3 Principle of the Wafflepack Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
10.7.3.1 Functional Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
10.7.4 Inserting the Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
10.7.5 Display and Operating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
10.7.6 Safety Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
10.7.7 Refilling the Wafflepack Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10.7.8 System Behavior in Fault Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10.7.9 Fitting the Wafflepack Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
10.7.10 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
10.8 Support for Flatpack Magazine 80F4 (Manual Tray Rest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
10.8.1 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
10.8.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
10.8.3 Changing the Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
10.8.4 Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
10.9 Placing of Components With a Height Clearance of up to 21 mm (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

10.9.1 Defining the Height Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
10.9.2 How to Verify a Height Clearance of 21 mm with the Pick&Place Head . . . . . . . . 463
11 Station extensions /Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
11.1 Nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

11.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
11.1.2 Technical data - Nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . 465
11.1.3 Basic principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
11.1.4 Notes on operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
11.1.5 Position recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
11.2 Component barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

11.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
11.2.2 Notes on operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
11.2.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
11.2.4 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
11.3 Dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

11.3.1 Structure of the dual conveyor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
11.3.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
11.3.3 Definition of the transport tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
13
01/2001 US Edition
11.3.4 Changing the transport type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

11.3.5 Asynchronous transport type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
11.3.6 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
11.3.7 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
11.3.8 Synchronous transport type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
11.3.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
11.3.8.2 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
11.3.9 Controlling the dual conveyor using the Single Functions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
11.3.9.1 Automatic width adjustment on the dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
11.3.10 Technical data for the dual conveyor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
11.3.11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
11.4 PCB barcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

11.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
11.4.2 Laser safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
11.4.3 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
11.4.3.1 PCB barcode reader for the single conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
11.4.3.2 PCB barcode reader for the dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
11.4.4 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
11.4.5 Assembly options for the PCB barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
11.4.6 Configuring the PCB barcode reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
11.4.7 Displaying the PCB barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
11.5 Ceramic substrate centering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

11.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
11.5.2 Possible centering types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
11.5.3 Mechanical centering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
11.5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
11.5.3.2 Changing the ceramic substrate on the PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
11.5.3.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
11.5.4 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
11.5.5 Optical centering with oblique lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
11.5.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
11.5.5.2 Fiducial mark recommendation for ceramic substrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
11.6 Nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

11.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
11.6.2 Technical data -Nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
11.6.4 Notes on operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
11.7 Flip-chip vision module for the Pick & Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
11.7.2 Safety instructions for the component vision modules on Fx machines . . . . . . . . 495
11.7.3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
11.8 Coplanarity laser module (80F4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

11.8.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
11.8.3 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
11.8.4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
11.8.4.1 Vision evaluation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
14
01/2001 US Edition
11.8.4.2 Laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

11.8.5 Data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
11.9 Flux dispenser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

11.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
11.9.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
11.9.4 Refilling the flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
11.9.5 Changing the syringe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
11.9.6 Replacing the complete dispensing needle and centering nozzle. . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
11.9.6.1 Setting the distance between the dispensing needle and the PCB . . . . . . . . . . 511
11.9.7 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
11.9.7.1 Package form list and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
11.9.7.2 Editing the package form list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
11.9.7.3 Editing the flux parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
11.9.7.4 Single functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
11.10 PCB data transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

11.10.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
11.10.2 Activating the PCB data transfer option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
11.11 Feeder position recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

11.11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
11.11.1.1 Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
11.12 Fine calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

11.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
11.12.2 System requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
11.12.3 Measuring equipment and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
11.12.4 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
11.13 Vacuum tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

11.13.1 Description of the functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
12 Station extensions / software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
12.1 Remote support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

12.1.1 General comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
12.1.2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
12.1.2.1 Data security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
12.1.3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
12.1.3.1 Specifications of the ISDN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
12.1.4 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
12.1.5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
12.1.5.1 Connecting the ISDN router to the local SIPLACE-LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
12.1.5.2 Connecting the ISDN router to the customers site LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
12.1.6 Procedure and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
15
01/2001 US Edition
12.2 GEM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

12.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
12.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
12.2.2.1 Setting the control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
12.2.2.2 Defining the GEM default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
12.2.2.3 Setting the GEM/SECS parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
12.2.2.4 GEM connection statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
12.2.2.5 GEM state view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
12.2.2.6 Loading placement programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
12.2.2.7 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
13 Software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
13.1 General definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

13.1.1 Initial installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
13.1.2 Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
13.1.3 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
13.2 Installation of the 407.xx station software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
13.3 Installation of the software for "Remote Service" (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
16
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual Index of figures
01/2001 US Edition
Index of figures
Page
Fig. 1.1 - 1 The SIPLACE home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Fig. 1.5 - 1 General view of the 80S-20 placement system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 1.5 - 2 General view of the F4 placement machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 1.5 - 3 General view of the 80F4 with wafflepack changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 1.7 - 1 Electrical and pneumatic connection points on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 1.9 - 1 Dimensions of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 1.9 - 2 Center of gravity of the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 1.10 - 1 Dimensions of the placement machine during transportation and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 1.11 - 1 Overview of the modules - controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 1.11 - 2 Component barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 1.12 - 1 Position of the gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 1.12 - 2 Structure of the X axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 1.13 - 1 Structure of the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 1.13 - 2 Structure of the Pick&Place head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 1.15 - 1 PCB conveyor - single conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 2.1 - 1 Warning signs on the basic machine - part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 2.1 - 4 Warning signs on the basic machine - NAFTA region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 2.1 - 5 Identification of laser class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fig. 2.1 - 6 Fine-pitch and flip chip vision module, coplanarity laser module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fig. 2.1 - 7 Identification label for Laser class 3B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fig. 2.1 - 8 Identification label for Laser class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fig. 2.1 - 9 Safety instructions on the 80F4 SIPLACE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fig. 2.1 - 10 PCB barcode reader (bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 2.1 - 11 Laser radiation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 2.1 - 12 Caution label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 2.1 - 13 Safety instructions for coupling and uncoupling the mobile changeover table . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 2.1 - 14 Securing the changeable component feeder table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 2.1 - 15 Protective covers on the SIPLACE automatic placement machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 2.1 - 16 Two-handed operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 2.1 - 17 Securing the placement machine to prevent it slipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 2.2 - 1 SIPLACE safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 2.2 - 2 Stop and emergency stop mushroom-head push-buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 2.2 - 3 Guard on SIPLACE machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 2.2 - 4 Location of the buttons and protective contactor combinations K1, K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 2.2 - 5 SIPLACE safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 2.2 - 6 Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fig. 2.3 - 1 Test sockets on the voltmeter unit in the servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 2.4 - 1 Compressed air unit on the automatic placement system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 2.5 - 1 Position of the control unit, servo unit, main switch, service socket and compr. air unit . . 108
Fig. 3.1 - 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 3.1 - 2 Position of switches and buttons on the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fig. 3.1 - 3 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 3.2 - 1 Components of the user interface (example of main view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 3.2 - 2 Toolbar in main view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 4.1 - 1 Setup location 1 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 4.1 - 2 "Component verification with barcode" window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fig. 4.1 - 3 "Component verification with barcode" window, matching barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
17
Index of figures User Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4
01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 4.2 - 1 "Track errors" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Fig. 4.2 - 2 "Machine errors" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 4.2 - 3 "Transport errors" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 4.2 - 4 "General errors" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 4.3 - 1 "Empty tracks" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 4.3 - 2 "Empty tracks" view when the "Component verification with barcode" option is active . . . 165
Fig. 4.3 - 3 "Omit components" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 4.3 - 4 "Trays" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fig. 4.3 - 5 "Linear feeder" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 4.3 - 6 "Wafflepack Changer" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 5.2 - 1 "Revolver head functions" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fig. 5.2 - 2 "IC-head functions" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fig. 5.2 - 3 "Gantry functions" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fig. 5.2 - 4 "Vacuum test" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fig. 5.2 - 5 "Nozzle offset" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fig. 5.2 - 6 "Nozzle configuration revolver head" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head) . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fig. 5.2 - 7 "Nozzle changer configuration revolver head" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head) . . . . 195
Fig. 5.2 - 8 "Nozzle changer configuration IC-head" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 5.2 - 9 "Fluxing" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fig. 5.3 - 1 "Transport functions" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fig. 5.3 - 2 "PCB conveyor width" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fig. 6.1 - 1 Position of the placement heads on the 80S-20 machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fig. 6.1 - 2 Position of the placement heads on the F4 machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fig. 6.1 - 3 Component camera system on the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fig. 6.1 - 4 Component camera system on the Pick&Place head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 6.1 - 5 PCB camera system, basic gantry bottom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fig. 6.1 - 6 Vision analysis unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 6.2 - 1 Explanation of camera field of view, search area and template window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 6.2 - 2 Row and column profile of a double cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fig. 6.2 - 3 Simple and double crosses with ideal dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fig. 6.3 - 1 Regular component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fig. 6.3 - 2 Example of irregular components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fig. 6.4 - 1 Access to the options Teach fiducial and Test component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fig. 6.4 - 2 Teach fiducial option: menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fig. 6.4 - 3 Test component option: menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 6.5 - 1 Teach fiducial flow chart - menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fig. 6.5 - 2 Teach fiducial flow chart, Select fiducial menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fig. 6.5 - 3 Teach fiducial flow chart - Teach fiducial menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fig. 6.5 - 4 Teach fiducial flow chart - Contrast graduation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 6.5 - 5 Teach fiducial flow chart - Test fiducial menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fig. 6.5 - 6 Select fiducial menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fig. 6.5 - 7 Select fiducial menu, Save fiducial data option box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 6.5 - 8 Select fiducial menu, Select gantry option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fig. 6.5 - 9 Select fiducial menu, Load fiducial option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fig. 6.5 - 10 Change fiducial name option, input box for new fiducial name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fig. 6.5 - 11 Select fiducial menu, Define new fiducial option, input box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fig. 6.5 - 12 Select fiducial menu, Save fiducial option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fig. 6.5 - 13 Teach fiducial menu, options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 6.5 - 14 Teach fiducial menu, Teach with standard values video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fig. 6.5 - 15 Teach fiducial menu, Change search area video image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fig. 6.5 - 16 Teach fiducial menu, Teach search area video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fig. 6.5 - 17 Contrast sensitivity menu, options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fig. 6.5 - 18 Contrast sensitivity menu, Transforms 1-5 video image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
18
01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 6.5 - 19 Contrast sensitivity menu, Contrast sensitivity transform 5 option box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Fig. 6.5 - 20 Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Fig. 6.5 - 21 Setting the contrast sensitivity to intensify low-contrast fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Fig. 6.5 - 22 Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures and
to intensify the contrast at the same time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fig. 6.5 - 23 Test fiducial menu, options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fig. 6.5 - 24 Test fiducial menu, Center video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Fig. 6.5 - 25 Test fiducial menu, Test video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Fig. 6.5 - 26 Test fiducial menu, Move X/Y axes video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fig. 6.6 - 1 Test component flow chart - Test component menu option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Fig. 6.6 - 2 Test component flow chart - Select package form menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Fig. 6.6 - 3 Test component flow chart, Test component menu, Component menu item . . . . . . . . 279
Fig. 6.6 - 4 Test component flow chart - Edit GF data menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fig. 6.6 - 5 Test component flow chart, Test component menu option - Measure mode menu. . . . 281
Fig. 6.6 - 6 Test component flow chart, SIZE measure mode menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fig. 6.6 - 7 Test component flow chart, ROW and CORNER measure mode menus . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fig. 6.6 - 8 Test component flow chart, LEAD, GRID, and BALL meas. modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fig. 6.6 - 9 Select package form menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 6.6 - 10 Save GF data option box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fig. 6.6 - 11 Select package form menu, Camera type option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fig. 6.6 - 12 Select package form menu, Load GF data package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fig. 6.6 - 13 Select package form menu, Save GF data option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fig. 6.6 - 14 Test component menu, options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fig. 6.6 - 15 Test component menu, Pick up component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 6.6 - 16 Test component menu, Display component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Fig. 6.6 - 17 Test component menu, Display component video image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fig. 6.6 - 18 Test component menu, Test component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Fig. 6.6 - 19 Test component menu, Test component video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fig. 6.6 - 20 Test component menu, Measure component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Fig. 6.6 - 21 Test component menu, Measure component video image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Fig. 6.6 - 22 Test component menu, Store image option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Fig. 6.6 - 23 Test component menu, Evaluat. time option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fig. 6.6 - 24 Test component menu, Evaluat. time video image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fig. 6.6 - 25 Test component menu, options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Fig. 6.6 - 26 Test component menu, Illumination video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fig. 6.6 - 27 Test component menu, Package dimension video image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fig. 6.6 - 28 Test component menu, Pin dimension option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fig. 6.6 - 29 Test component menu, Ball image video image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fig. 6.6 - 30 Test component menu, Select contrast sensitivity option box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fig. 6.6 - 31 Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fig. 6.6 - 32 Setting the contrast sensitivity to intensify the contrast for low-contrast components . . . . 319
to intensify the contrast at the same time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Fig. 6.6 - 34 Test component menu, Meas. mode option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Fig. 6.6 - 35 Measuring mode option, Size measuring mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Fig. 6.6 - 36 Measuring mode option, Integration settings of Size measuring mode menu . . . . . . . . . . 326
Fig. 6.6 - 37 Measuring mode option, Row measuring mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Fig. 6.6 - 38 Measuring mode option, Row measuring mode integration settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Fig. 6.6 - 39 Measuring mode option, Corner measuring mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fig. 6.6 - 40 Measuring mode option, Lead measuring mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fig. 6.6 - 41 Measuring mode option, Grid measuring mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Fig. 6.6 - 42 Measuring mode option, Ball meas. mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Fig. 6.7 - 1 Transfer of package form data without package form manipulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
19
01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 6.7 - 2 Transfer of package form data with package form manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Fig. 6.7 - 3 Flow chart Programming and testing a package form (GF), part - line computer . . . . . . . 341
Fig. 6.7 - 4 Flow chart: Programming and testing a package form (GF), part 2 - station computer . . 342
Fig. 6.7 - 5 Order in which package forms are programmed at the station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fig. 6.7 - 6 Typical measuring modes with standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Fig. 6.7 - 7 Illumination parameters for standard components
at the 12-segment Collect&Place head camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fig. 6.7 - 8 Illumination parameters for other components at the 12-segment
Collect&Place head camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Fig. 6.7 - 9 Illumination parameters for standard components on the fine pitch vision module . . . . . . 356
Fig. 6.7 - 10 Illumination parameters for other components on the fine pitch vision module . . . . . . . . . 357
Fig. 7.1 - 1 Main view after loading the station computer software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fig. 7.1 - 2 "Switching on the SIPLACE line flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Fig. 7.3 - 1 Example of a nozzle box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Fig. 7.5 - 1 Placing the tape in the springs of the 8 mm S feeder module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fig. 7.5 - 2 Dividing plates in the tape container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fig. 7.6 - 1 Emptying the tape waste container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Fig. 7.8 - 1 Safety instructions for the mobile component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fig. 7.8 - 2 Undocking the mobile component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fig. 7.9 - 1 Position of the component and its pick-up angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Fig. 8.2 - 1 Main view with error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fig. 8.2 - 2 Example: Error type "transport error" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Fig. 8.2 - 3 Example: Error information on the current error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Fig. 8.2 - 4 Example: Additional information on the current error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Fig. 8.4 - 1 Diagnostics for error message no. 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Fig. 8.4 - 2 Diagnostics main screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Fig. 8.4 - 3 Example of information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fig. 8.4 - 4 Diagnostics with manual input of the error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fig. 8.4 - 5 Diagnosis of an error without error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Fig. 8.4 - 6 Obtaining information on an error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Fig. 8.4 - 7 Display window in the diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fig. 8.4 - 8 Example of a question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Fig. 8.4 - 11 Example of cause and remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Fig. 8.4 - 12 Example of additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Fig. 9.1 - 1 Contents of the help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Fig. 9.1 - 2 Example: Topic area "Help About Help" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Fig. 9.1 - 3 Example: Help on the current view "Empty Tracks" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Fig. 9.1 - 4 Example: Help on the topic "Refilling Empty Tracks - Manually" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Fig. 9.1 - 5 Information on the station computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Fig. 9.1 - 6 Example: Help on the "Display errors" icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Fig. 9.1 - 7 "Help Topics" window (Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Fig. 9.1 - 8 "Help Topics" window (Find). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Fig. 10.2 - 1 8 mm S II module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Fig. 10.2 - 2 3 x 8 mm S module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Fig. 10.2 - 3 12/16 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fig. 10.2 - 4 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model C/D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fig. 10.2 - 5 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Fig. 10.2 - 6 24/32 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Fig. 10.2 - 7 Linear vibratory feeder, type 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Fig. 10.2 - 8 Bulk case feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Fig. 10.2 - 9 44 mm S module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
20
01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 10.2 - 10 56 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Fig. 10.2 - 11 72 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Fig. 10.2 - 12 88 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Fig. 10.2 - 13 Component disposal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Fig. 10.3 - 1 Inserting 30 or 45 mm wide feeder modules on the component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Fig. 10.4 - 1 Component table and tape container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fig. 10.5 - 1 Used tape cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Fig. 10.5 - 2 Inserting the tape into the tape cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Fig. 10.5 - 3 Used tape container in the component changeover table, withdrawable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Fig. 10.6 - 1 Safety instructions for the mobile component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Fig. 10.6 - 2 Undocking the mobile component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Fig. 10.7 - 1 Wafflepack changer on SIPLACE F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fig. 10.7 - 3 Functional sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Fig. 10.7 - 5 Aligning the wafflepack changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Fig. 10.8 - 1 Installation/Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Fig. 11.1 - 1 Overview of the nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head. . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Fig. 11.1 - 2 Magazine and nozzle holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Fig. 11.1 - 3 Nozzle changer - position recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Fig. 11.2 - 1 Component barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Fig. 11.2 - 2 Set-up check with barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Fig. 11.3 - 1 Structure of the dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Fig. 11.4 - 1 Position of the modules on the input side of the placement machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Fig. 11.4 - 2 Laser safety instructions for the PCB barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Fig. 11.4 - 3 Assembly options for the PCB barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Fig. 11.4 - 4 Displaying the PCB barcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Fig. 11.5 - 1 General overview (plan view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Fig. 11.5 - 2 Ceramic substrate centering (side view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Fig. 11.5 - 3 Oblique lighting unit for the sub-gantry camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Fig. 11.5 - 4 Recommended fiducial shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Fig. 11.6 - 1 Mounting position of the nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Fig. 11.6 - 2 Overview of the nozzle changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Fig. 11.6 - 3 Removing the nozzle from the nozzle changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Fig. 11.7 - 1 Vision module for the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Fig. 11.7 - 2 Identification of laser class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Fig. 11.8 - 1 Principle of laser triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Fig. 11.8 - 2 Identification for laser class 3B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Fig. 11.8 - 3 Identification of laser class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Fig. 11.8 - 4 Overview of the coplanarity laser module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Fig. 11.8 - 5 Coplanarity laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Fig. 11.9 - 1 Fluxing overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Fig. 11.9 - 2 Principle of a component with flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Fig. 11.9 - 3 Changing the syringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Fig. 11.9 - 4 Changing the dispensing hose (tube blunt 29") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Fig. 11.9 - 5 Setting the distance between the dispensing needle and the PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Fig. 11.9 - 6 Fluxing option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Fig. 11.9 - 7 Fluxing package form list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Fig. 11.9 - 8 Editing the fluxing package form list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Fig. 11.9 - 9 Editing the flux parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Fig. 11.9 - 10 Rinsing / brushing station with rinsing tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Fig. 11.9 - 11 Single Functions - gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Fig. 11.9 - 12 Gantry functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Fig. 11.10 - 1 Machine option: PCB data transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Fig. 11.11 - 1 Feeder position recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
21
01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 12.1 - 1 Connection of ISDN router to the local SIPLACE-LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

Fig. 12.1 - 2 Connection to the customers site LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Fig. 12.2 - 1 Overall structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Fig. 12.2 - 2 "GEM-Defaults" window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Fig. 12.2 - 3 "GEM/SECS parameters" window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Fig. 12.2 - 4 "State" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Fig. 12.2 - 5 "Placement program" view" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Fig. 12.2 - 6 "Messages" view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
22
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 1 Introduction
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.1 General
1 Introduction
1.1 General
These operating instructions provide a manual or reference work for 1
operating,
setting up and
maintaining the placement machine.
The header of each chapter indicates the 1
release and
software version
from which these instructions apply. 1
If you have any questions concerning these instructions or would like further information on a par-
ticular topic, please contact your local Siemens dealer or write to us directly at: 1
Siemens PLS AG
PL EA 1 V GC DOK
Rupert-Mayer-Str. 44
D-81359 Munich 1
1.1.1 SIPLACE on the World Wide Web (WWW)
We also have our own site on the Internet. Why not log onto our SIPLACE home page at http://
www.siplace.com? 1
All the menus and other information are available in two languages: German and English. 1
23
1 Introduction SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
1.1 General Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 1.1 - 1 The SIPLACE home page
The various headings contain information on 1
our products
services
contacts, etc.
Registered customers can also access the SIPLACE User Group, where you can call up special
information on our placement machines, such as 1
technical documentation
Technical Infos
spare parts lists, etc.
Registering for access to the User Group is sheer childs play: 1
Click on the Register Now user group button

Complete the registration form and just send it off.
You will then quickly receive access authorization with USER ID and a password. 1
24
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.2 Structure of the user manual
1.2 Structure of the user manual
This user manual is made up of the following chapters: 1
Introduction 1
The introduction contains an overview of the structure of this user manual, and the technical data
for the placement machine. It also contains notes on setting up the placement machine, an over-
view of the different modules and a description of the functions of individual modules. 1
Operational safety 1
This chapter covers all safety-related matters. It includes, for example, conventions for the use of
safety instructions in this manual, and rules to ensure safe operation of the placement machine.
The safety devices and safety circuits are described in detail. This chapter also contains important
information on the machines energy state, which is needed for servicing and maintenance work.1
Introduction and basic terms 1

The placement machines controls and user interface are described in this chapter. Illustrations
and flow charts are used to explain the structure of the user interface. 1
Placement functions 1
This chapter provides information on setting up the placement machine. One section classifies the
various errors that can occur, and describes the individual menus. In the Feeders section, you
will learn how to prepare the components, and set up and check feeders. 1
Single Functions 1
This chapter explains the individual gantry, placement head, and PCB transport functions in detail.
After reading this chapter, you will be able to test the operating states of these modules, and an-
alyze errors that occur. 1
Vision functions 1
The functions and technical data of the PCB and component vision systems are described in this
chapter, which also contains a comprehensive description of the menus for optical PCB and -com-
ponent centering, and the vision parameters. 1
What to do when 1
Please pass on this chapter to your machine operators. It contains a number of valuable tips and
tricks gained from experience. For example, you will learn how to minimize machine idle times by
taking preventive action. 1
25
1.3 User classification Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Error information and diagnosis 1

This chapter contains basic instructions on how to use the information provided by the error diag-
nostic system, which also enables you to enter and save your own notes on errors that have oc-
curred. The menu-driven diagnostic system is a valuable aid to troubleshooting and error analysis.1
Online help 1
This chapter explains how to use the online help system. 1
Component handling 1
In this chapter, you will find information concerning the feeders and the components they can be
used to insert. 1
Station extensions / hardware and software 1

Here you will find overviews of the nozzle changers, PCB barcode readers, Remote Service, etc.1
Software installation 1
This chapter tells you how to install the software. 1
1.3 User classification
The operating software is structured so that certain functions or menus can only be used or called
by appropriately trained personnel. There are three different classes of user: 1
Operator
Line engineer and
Service engineer
Access to each class may be password-protected. Chapters containing information for user
classes higher than operator contain a reference to the user class concerned in the footer. 1
The operator 1
This user class consists of any person who has been trained to operate the machine. These peo-
ple are authorized to use any functions associated with operating the machine, and may call up
any menus needed to use the machine. 1
The line engineer 1

Line engineers have undergone special training, and are authorized to carry out line engineer ac-
tivities, such as creating set-up configurations, determining vision parameters, etc. 1
26
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.3 User classification
The service engineer 1

This class is reserved for Siemens engineers, who are trained to carry out servicing work, and to
upgrade and retrofit the placement machine. 1
WARNING
A thorough knowledge of the relevant part of this User Manual is required before carrying out any
work on the machine. All work must be carried out only by appropriately trained and qualified per-
sonnel. All warning, caution and danger notes MUST be observed. 1
PLEASE NOTE: The content of this User Manual is not part of or intended to modify a previous
or existing agreement, undertaking, or legal relationship. Any undertakings entered into by Sie-
mens AG result from the purchase contract, which also contains complete and generally applica-
ble guarantees. Such contractual guarantee provisions are neither extended nor restricted by the
information given in this User Manual. 1
27
1.4 Revision index Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.4 Revision index

First version Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 Edition 11/95
Basic version Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 Edition 01/96
Revision of Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 Edition 03/96
Revision of Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4/F4-6 Edition 07/97
Revision of Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4/F4-6/F5 Edition 03/98
Revision of Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4/F5 Edition 05/99
Revision of Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4, SR.406.xx Edition 02/00
Revision of Users Manual SIPLACE 80S-20/F4, SR.407.xx Edition 01/2001 US
1.4.1 Survey of the revisions in the 03/96 edition

Revised functions Chapters / Sections affected
Nozzle, type 412, for flip chips 11.5; 17.2
Nozzle contour diagrams 17.1
Overview of nozzles 17.2
PCB barcode configured for COM 2 11.3
Maintenance of gantry / Collect&Place head / IC head 9
Maintenance schedules 9
Setting the components illumination at the Collect&Place 7.6.5

head camera

New functions Chapters / Sections affected
Multiple Bar code 5.4.2
Twin conveyor 6; 11(so far only the software has been imple-
mented)
Fluxing 11.7
Remote Service 11.8
GEM Interface 11.9
On-line help expansions 4
28
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.4 Revision index
New functions Chapters / Sections affected
Diagnostics 19.2
Conveyor limit stop right / left LC UNIX Users Manual
Notes on Touch Screen 2

Vision systems 7
Maintenance schedules 9
Maintenance of gantry / Collect&Place head / IC head 9
Maintenance of empty tape cutter 9.1.4; / 9.2; / 9.3.4
Maintenance of components table 9.1.4; / 9.2; / 9.3.3
Maintenance of Collect&Place head 9.1.4; / 9.2; / 9.5.6 Vacuum/

Forced air valves
1.4.4 Overview of the revisions in the 07/97 edition
New functions Affected Chapter / Section
6-nozzle Collect&Place head (all functions) 0; 2; 3; 4; 5; 9; 17
Cover guard on input / output belt 1.2
Display PCB barcode 2; 3; 11
Starting SITEST from user interface 2.4.3

(operation and the range of functions are described in a
separate manual)
Omitting components 3
Approaching the set-up position 4.2.1; 4.3.1
Guidelines for describing case shapes 5.7

What needs to be done...? New chapter 6
29
Components > 12 mm 10.10
Twin conveyor, fixed left side 11.10
Revised functions Affected Chapter / Section
New breakdown into chapters Chapter 3 to 8 and 10

Overview and technical data, tape feeder modules 10.1
Manual nozzle change 9.5; 9.7
Maintenance of the camera systems 9.9
New nozzle type 8 with contour diagram 17
Component vision system for the 0; 5

6-nozzle Collect&Place head
User Interface 2
Empty Tape Cutter on SIPLACE 80F5 Automatic Place- 10.8

ment Machines
Surf tape feeder module 10.10
Introduction 0
On-line help 8
New coplanarity laser module 1; 5; 9
New nozzles, nozzle contour diagrams 17
30
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.4 Revision index

Introduction 0
Vision system 5
Component table, mobile 6, 9, 10
New nozzles 17
New or modified Chapter/Section
SIPLACE on the World Wide Web (WWW) 1.1.1
Safety instructions for the PCB barcode reader (option) 2.1.9
Safety instructions for coupling and uncoupling the mobile 2.1.10

changeover table
Safety instructions for changing the height of component tables 2.1.11
Safety instructions for the changeable component feeder table 2.1.12
"Mode" menu6WDUW6,3/$&(2,6 3.3.2.1
"Mode" menu6WDUW6,3/$&(3UR 3.3.2.1
"Mode" menu&RQILJXUH6,3/$&(FRQQHFWLRQ 3.3.2.1
"Options" menu&RQWUROPRGH 3.3.2.3
"Options" menu, Cluster for fine calibration... 3.3.2.3
Printing a help topic 9.1.2.2
Vision functions 6
What should you do ... 7
3 x 8 mm S module 10.2.2
Component disposal module (80F4) 10.2.13
PCB barcode 11.4
Coplanarity laser module (80F4) 11.8

Fine calibration 11.12
31
1.4.8 Overview of the revisions in the 01/2001 US edition
New or modified Chapter / Section
Technical data noise emissions 1.8.4
Technical data PCB vision module 1.14.3
Technical data dual conveyor 1.15.3
Warning signs on the placement system 2.1.5
Additional warning signs for the NAFTA region 2.1.6
Safety instructions for processing capacitors based on powdered metal 2.1.15
Overview 10.1
Safety instructions for processing capacitors based on powdered metal 10.1.1
12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model C/D 10.2.4
12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model E 10.2.5
88mm S module (80F4) 10.2.12
Fine calibration 11.12
Vacuum tooling 11.13
32
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.5 Description of the machine
1.5 Description of the machine
1.5.1 SIPLACE 80S-20 functional description

The S-20 automatic placement system is a high-performance placement system with two gantry
axis systems. A PCB vision system and a star-shaped 12-segment Collect&Place head are
mounted on each gantry. Collect&Place heads equipped with a component vision system pick up
the components from stationary feeder modules and place them onto the PCB clamped in the
PCB conveyor. 1
Fig. 1.5 - 1 General view of the 80S-20 placement system
(1) 12-segment Collect&Place head with component vision module (gantry 1)

(2) Gantry 1 with PCB vision module
(3) 12-segment Collect&Place head with component vision module (gantry 2)
(4) Gantry 2 with PCB vision module
(5) Stationary component supply (location 1)
(7) PCB conveyor (dual conveyor option)
33
1.5 Description of the machine Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
The concept behind the automatic placement system 1
with its stationary feeder modules,
PCBs that do not move during placement
and positionable placement heads
has a number of significant benefits: 1
For example, the flexible 12-segment Collect&Place heads combined with automatic nozzle
changers enable the nozzle configuration to be changed temporarily and automatically
adapted to receive different component sizes.
You can also optimize the traversing paths and the placement sequence.
With stationary feeder modules, even the tiniest components are picked up reliably.
The components cannot slip on the PCB during placement (as is often the case with moving
PCBs) since the PCB does not move.
Sophisticated optical centering systems (vision systems) for components and PCBs also en-
sure high component positioning accuracy.
Components can be topped up and tapes can be spliced without stopping the machine.
Prepared component tables enable the placement system to be retooled without long stop-
pages.
34
1.5.2 Technical data overview of the SIPLACE 80S-20
Procedure collect &place

Component range
vision module from 0402 to 18,7 mm x 18,7mm
Max. placement rate
12-segment Collect&Place head 20,000 components/hour
12-segment Collect&Place head
Angular accuracy 0.525/ 3 , 0.70/ 4 , 1.05/ 6
Placement accuracy 67.5m / 3 , 90m / 4 , 135m / 6
PCB format 50mm x 50mm to 460 mm x 460 mm
(optionally 460mm x 508mm,18" x 20")
Feeder capacity 40 locations for feeders
Component supply Changeover table,
Types of feeder component tapes, stick magazines, bulk cases
Operating system Microsoft Windows NT / RMOS
Connection In-line or stand alone
Space required 4 m / module
35
1.5.3 Functional description of the SIPLACE 80F4
Fig. 1.5 - 2 General view of the F4 placement machine
(1) 12-segment Collect&Place head with component vision module

(2) Gantry with PCB vision module
(3) Pick&Place head
(4) Fine pitch vision module for the Pick&Place head
(7) PCB conveyor ( dual conveyor option)
36
The F4 placement machine is a high-speed placement machine with a gantry axis system. The
gantry supports: 1
a PCB vision module,
a star-shaped 12-segment Collect&Place head, and
a Pick&Place head.
The 12-segment Collect&Place head will increase the placement rate if the proportion of ICs in
the placement process is very high. 1
The Pick&Place head is particularly suitable for inserting fine pitch components. In addition to the
vision module for PCB centering, the F4 machine also has component vision modules for the Col-
lect&Place head and Pick&Place head. 1
A coplanarity laser module and a flip chip vision module can also be retrofitted as options. 1
A wafflepack changer can be used to supply components. 1
The placement heads pick up components from stationary feeders and then place them in the
PCBs clamped on the PCB conveyor. 1
The concept behind the placement machine 1
with its stationary feeders,
with PCBs that do not move during placement,
and its positionable placement heads
has number of significant benefits: 1
For example, the flexible 12-segment Collect&Place head combined with automatic nozzle
changer enables the nozzle configuration to be changed temporarily and automatically
adapted to receive different component sizes You can also optimize the travel paths, and the
placement sequence.
With stationary feeders, even the tiniest components are picked up reliably.
The components cannot slip on the PCB during placement (as is often the case with moving
PCBs) since the PCB does not move.
Sophisticated optical centering systems (vision systems) for components and PCBs also en-
sure high component positioning accuracy.
Components can be topped up and tapes can be spliced without stopping the machine.
Prepared component tables enable the placement machine to be retooled without long idle
times.
37
1.5.4 General view of the SIPLACE 80F4 with wafflepack changer
Fig. 1.5 - 3 General view of the 80F4 with wafflepack changer
(1) Wafflepack changer

(2) Pick&Place head
(3) 12-segment Collect&Place head
38
1.5.5 Technical data overview of the SIPLACE 80F4
Procedure Collect &place

Component range
Standard vision module from 0402 to 55mm x 55mm
Max. placement rate
12-segment Collect&Place head 10,000 components/hour
Pick&Place head 1,800 components/hour
12-segment Collect&Place head
45m / 3 , 60m / 4 , 90m / 6 ) **
Pick&Place head
PCB format 50mm x 50mm to 460 mm x 460 mm
(optionally 460mm x 508mm, 18" x 20")
Feeder capacity 40 locations for feeders
Component supply Changeover table, wafflepack changer, manual WPC
Types of feeder trays, component tapes, stick magazines, bulk cases
Operating system Microsoft Windows NT / RMOS
Connection In-line or stand alone
Space required 4 m / module
39
1.6 The line concept Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.6 The line concept
1.6.1 Overview
The machine can be linked to input/output stations, screen printing systems, soldering ovens and
other machines from the SIPLACE range (HS-50, S-20, F4, F5/F5 HM, and the SIPLACE G adhe-
sive application station). All SIPLACE modules are supplied with the necessary data by the UNIX
line computer. The placement machine can also be linked to a higher level data processing system
through the use of suitable interfaces. 1
1.6.2 Technical data line concept
System SIPLACE placement lines

Modules SIPLACE HS-50 / SIPLACE 80 S-20 / SIPLACE S-23 HM
SIPLACE 80 F4 / SIPLACE F5 / SIPLACE F5 HM
Peripherals Input/output stations
Screen printers
Soldering ovens
Inspection stations, etc.
Component range From 0402 * to 55 mm x 55 mm **
PCB conveyor Automatic width adjustment
PCB format 50 mm x 50 mm to 460 mm x 460 mm
Placement rate Depends on how the modules are connected to one another
Space required 4 m / SIPLACE 80 module
7.5 m / SIPLACE HS-50 module
1
*) SIPLACE HS-50, SIPLACE 80 S-20, SIPLACE 80 S-23 HM or SIPLACE 80 F4 with 12-segment

Collect&Place head 1
**) SIPLACE 80 F4/F5/F5 HM 1
40
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.7 Electrical and pneumatic connection points
1.7 Electrical and pneumatic connection points
Fig. 1.7 - 1 Electrical and pneumatic connection points on the machine
(1) Compressed air unit

(2) Connection for compressed air line
(3) Main power filter Z1
(4) Hole for power cable
(5) Service socket
(6) Compressed air connection for changeover table
(7) Power supply connection for changeover table
(8) Communications connection for changeover table
(9) LAN supply in control unit
(10) Main switch
41
1.7 Electrical and pneumatic connection points Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
DANGER
The placement machine is supplied with 3 x 400 V or 3 x 208 V (US version) 5 %, 50/60 Hz
mains voltage. Consequently parts of these systems carry potentially lethal voltages, even when
switched off at the main switch. Incorrect handling of this placement machine can therefore result
in death or severe injury, or considerable damage to equipment. 1
WARNING
NEVER detach compressed air lines while they are still pressurized. Risk of injury. 1
42
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.8 Technical data ratings
1.8 Technical data ratings
1.8.1 Technical data electrical ratings
Supply voltage 3 x 400 VAC 5 %; 50/60 Hz (Europe)

3 x 208 VAC 5 %; 50/60 Hz (U.S.A.)
Fuses 3 x 16 A (3 x 400 VAC, 3 x 208 VAC)
Total connected load 5 kVA
Total power 2,9 kW (S-20), 1,9 kW (F4)
Power failure up to 20 msec
1.8.2 Technical data compressed air supply
Compressed air pressure Min. 5.5 bar (S-20), min 6 bar (F4), max. 8 bar
Compressed air consumption 400 Nl/min.
Operating pressure 5.2 bar (fixed)
1.8.3 Technical data compressed air specification

Maximum particle size by density, based on ISO/DIS 8573-1 (class 1) 1
Particle size 0.1 m

Particle density 0.1 mg/m
Maximum oil content (class 1) Particle density 0.01 mg/m
Pressure dewpoint (class 4) Dewpoint +3
1.8.4 Technical data noise emissions
Max. noise emission 74dB(A)
1.8.5 Technical data permissible ambient factors
Room temperature Between 15C and 35C

Atmospheric humidity 30 to 75%
(but no higher than 45% on average in order to prevent
any possibility of condensation on the machine).
43
1.9 Dimensions and weight of the machine Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.9 Dimensions and weight of the machine
1.9.1 Dimensions of the machine
Fig. 1.9 - 1 Dimensions of the machine
1.9.2 Technical data dimensions, weight
Length 1587 mm with conveyor belts

Width 2455 mm with brackets
Height with warning lamp 1836 mm standard height
Ground clearance 120 mm standard height
Weight of basic module 1500 kg
Weight fully equipped approx. 2000 kg
Permissible load per unit area on foundation Min. 1000 kg/m
Load per unit area on mounting feet 4.42 kg/cm
44
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.9 Dimensions and weight of the machine
1.9.3 Center of gravity of the machine
Fig. 1.9 - 2 Center of gravity of the machine
X coordinate - 80 mm
Y coordinate 0 mm
Z coordinate 350 mm high
T PCB transport direction 1
These center of gravity coordinates relate to machines with a PCB transport height of 830 mm. 1
45
1.10 Setting up the placement machine Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.10 Setting up the placement machine
1.10.1 Transport dimensions
Fig. 1.10 - 1 Dimensions of the placement machine during transportation and setting up
A Points for attaching the pallet jack (fork length 1600 mm) 1
(1) Length 1587 mm

(2) Width 1921 mm
(3) Height 1836 mm
(4) Input conveyor
(5) Output conveyor
1
The PCB transport height is 830 mm 15 mm. 1
46
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.10 Setting up the placement machine
1.10.2 Transport configuration and transportation
The following components are not installed when the placement machine is delivered from the fac-
tory: 1
Keyboards
Monitors
Fault indicator lamps and
Changeover tables
Install the dismantled components for commissioning.

Use a pallet jack with a minimum fork length of 1600 mm to transport the machine.
Attach the pallet jack only at the indicated points.
1.10.3 Quality of the foundation
Ensure that
you set up the machine on a firm and non-vibrating foundation.
the load bearing capacity per unit area of the foundation is greater than 1000 kg/m.
1.10.4 Compressed air supply
The pressure of the compressed air supply must be at least 5.5 bar (max. permissible value
8 bar).
The compressed air must conform to the above specification.
This can be achieved with 1
Oil-free compressors, e.g. Atlas, Copco type ZR4
Compressed air washer/dryers
Micro-filters, series X, e.g. from Zander
1.10.5 Power supply
The power socket must be fused with the following fuse ratings:
3 x 16 A for 3 x 400 VAC / 3 x 208 VAC 1
47
1.10 Setting up the placement machine Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.10.6 Setting up the placement machine
Raise the machine using the pallet jack, and adjust the feet until there is a gap of 830 mm be-
tween the top edge of the PCB conveyor and the bottom edge of the feet.
Leave a gap of 1 to 3 mm between the PCB conveyors of the machine.
Use a cord pulled tight to ensure that all the placement machines are exactly in line with one
another.
Adjust each machine using a spirit level with an accuracy of 0.02 mm/m.
Lock the feet in position.
Check the machine again using the spirit level, and correct the settings, if necessary.
CAUTION
Make sure that you remove all the shipping braces from the machine. 1
Fit any components that were dismantled for dispatch.

Connect all the electrical and pneumatic lines.
RISK OF DEATH
The electrical connection work must be carried out ONLY by appropriately trained and certi-
fied personnel. 1
48
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.11 Overview of the modules - controls
1.11 Overview of the modules - controls

1.11.1 Controls
1
Fig. 1.11 - 1 Overview of the modules - controls
(1) Operator panel, input conveyor side (2) Emerg. stop mushroom-head push-button
(3) Start button (white) (4) Stop button (black)
(5) Main switch (6) Operator panel, output conveyor side
(7) Emerg. stop mushroom-head push-button (8) Start button (white)
(9) Stop button (black) (10) Component counter

(11) Key switch (12) Touchscreen monitor
(13) Keyboard with trackball 1
49
1.11 Overview of the modules - controls Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.11.2 Description
All the controls can be reached by a 1.60 m tall person. 1
Main switch 1
The main switch is used to switch the power supply to the machine on and off. 1
RISK OF DEATH
Some parts inside the placement machine carry potentially lethal voltages - even when switched
off at the main switch. 1
Key switch 1
In normal mode, the key switch is set to "0". The key should be removed and kept in a safe place.
It must only be turned to position "I" (set-up mode) by authorized personnel, and then only for cer-
tain maintenance and servicing work. 1
Stop button 1
This button is used to stop the placement machine. 1
Start button 1
This button starts the machine after it has been switched on, or after faults have been eliminated. 1
Emergency stop mushroom-head push-button 1

The emergency stop mushroom-head push-button latches into place when it is pressed. The
power supply for the gantry axes, component tables, conveyor belts, and cutting devices is inter-
rupted, and the voltage to the star axes of the placement heads is reduced. The button must be
turned to release it. 1
Component counter 1
The component counter displays the number of components processed. 1
Station computer, monitor and keyboard 1

The station computer, monitor and keyboard are mounted on a rotating console on the placement
machines central cross-beam. The station computer is a desktop model with a Pentium proces-
sor. The operating system is WINDOWS NT 4.0. The SIPLACE graphical user interface, which is
based on the Windows standard, is used to operate and monitor the machine. A color touchscreen
monitor with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels provides the screen display. Both the keyboard and
50
the touchscreen can be used to enter data. The ultra-flat IBM-compatible PC keyboard incorpo-
rates a trackball for controlling the mouse. 1
Indicator lamp 1
The sequence of colors is white - green white. This lamp is used to signal operating states and
malfunctions of the placement machine. 1
Component barcode reader 1

There is a compartment for a Datalogic DL 910 component barcode reader between the monitor
and keyboard. The barcode reader enables the components to be set up and topped up quickly
and reliably. 1
1.11.3 Ergonomic arrangement of the controls
Figure 1.11 - 1 on page 49 provides an overview of the position of the controls, which are subdi-
vided into the following groups: 1
Operating panel on the PCB input conveyor side with 1

Start button
Stop button
Emergency stop mushroom-head push-button
Main switch (on the left-hand side)
Operating panel on the PCB output conveyor side with 1

Emergency stop mushroom-head push-button
Start button
Stop button
Component counter
Key switch
Console on the central cross-beam with 1

Station computer
Touchscreen monitor
Keyboard and
Component barcode reader (option)
51
1.11 Overview of the modules - controls Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.11.3.1 Controls on the input and output conveyor sides of the machine
The controls on the input and output conveyor sides of the machine are identical. 1
Emergency stop mushroom-head push-button, Start and Stop buttons 1

There is an emergency stop mushroom-head push-button, a Start button and a Stop button on
both the input and output conveyor sides of the PCB conveyor. This arrangement was adopted for
the emergency stop mushroom-head push-buttons because it enables them to be reached quickly
and easily from any position. 1
In addition, it is important to have an unrestricted view of the placement heads and placement area
during maintenance, servicing and setting up work in order to be able to check all the operations
carried out inside the machine. This particularly important during testing phases, or when starting
single functions, for example. 1
Key switch 1
The key switch is located on the operating panel on the PCB output conveyor. It is only needed
for setting up and servicing work so, for reasons of efficiency, it is positioned near the Start and
Stop buttons. 1
Main switch 1
The main switch is part of the power supply unit, so it is positioned on the left-hand side of the
PCB input conveyor. It is located here because it is only needed for servicing and maintenance
work and is therefore not subject to frequent use. 1
1.11.3.2 Controls on the machine console
Station computer, monitor and keyboard 1

The station computer, monitor and keyboard are all mounted on the console. They are arranged
so that any person who is at least 1.60 m tall can work comfortably and efficiently. 1
Component barcode reader 1

The two component tables for supplying components are arranged on the right and left of the ma-
chine. For this reason, the component barcode reader is also located in the central console, since
it enables the operators to work comfortably and efficiently during the set-up and refill check. 1
52
1.11.4 Technical data component barcode reader
Connected to Station computer

Data entry Via barcode scanner or keyboard
Number of characters Up to 40
Not permissible Barcodes starting with a 1 or 2
and less than 5 characters long
Number of barcodes Up to 6 per component
Filter for suppressing data Up to 1 per barcode
Preset code types Code 39 (standard or ASCII)
Code 2 of 5, interleaved and normal,
Code 128, UPC/EAN/JAN codes
(others available upon request)
1
Fig. 1.11 - 2 Component barcode reader
(1) Component barcode reader
53
1.12 Overview of the modules - gantry Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.12 Overview of the modules - gantry
1.12.1 Position of the gantry
Fig. 1.12 - 1 Position of the gantry
S-20 1
(1) Gantry 1
(2) Gantry 2
F4 1
(1) Gantry 1
The gantry system consists of two functional groups 1
X axis and
Y axis.
54
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.12 Overview of the modules - gantry
1.12.2 Structure of the X axis

1
Fig. 1.12 - 2 Structure of the X axis
The x axis essentially consists of the following main modules: 1

Gantry arm (1)
Head mount (2)
X axis measuring system (3)
X axis guide system (4)
X axis DC servomotor (5)
Toothed belt (6)
1
The head mount holds the following components: 1
Sub-gantry camera (camera for the PCB vision module)
Head board
Measuring head for the x axis measuring system
Collect&Place head
55
1.12 Overview of the modules - gantry Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.12.3 Technical data of the X axis
Driving mechanism DC servomotor/toothed belt

Max. speed 2.0 m/sec.
Travel path 620 mm
Distance measuring system Linear metal scale
Scale length 646 mm
Resolution 2.5 m
1.12.4 Structure of the Y axis
The y axis essentially consists of the following main modules: 1
DC servomotor
Y axis toothed belt
Y axis guide system
Y axis measuring system
Each y axis is driven by a DC servomotor. An anti-crash circuit prevents the paths of the gantries
meeting. 1
1.12.5 Technical data of the Y axis
Driving mechanism DC servomotor/toothed belt

Max. speed 2.5 m/sec.
Path of the gantries 910 mm
Distance measuring system Linear metal scales
Scale length 970 mm
Resolution 2.5 m
56
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.13 Overview of the modules - placement heads
1.13 Overview of the modules - placement heads
1.13.1 Structure of the 12-segment Collect&Place head
Fig. 1.13 - 1 Structure of the 12-segment Collect&Place head
(1) Star with 12 sleeves (2) Motor for "Reject" valve adjustment drive
(3) Turning station (4) Component vision module
(5) Z axis driving mechanism (6) Star motor
All the components are inserted with the same cycle time. Before the component is inserted, it is
measured by the optoelectronic vision module. 1
57
1.13 Overview of the modules - placement heads Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
The component vision camera creates an image of the current component.
The precise position of the component is also determined.
The package form of the current component is compared against the programmed package
form in order to identify it. Any components that cannot be identified are rejected.
The turning station turns the component to the required placement angle.
1.13.2 Description of the 12-segment Collect&Place head
The 12-segment Collect&Place head works using the "Collect & Place" principle, i.e. the com-
ponents are held by the nozzles with the aid of a vacuum and, after one complete pick-up cycle,
are placed gently and accurately on the PCB with the aid of blast air. The vacuum in the noz-
zles is also checked several times to determine whether the components were picked up and
set down correctly.
The "adaptive" sensor stop mode of the Z-axis compensates for any irregularity of the
PCB-surface when the components are set down.
Defective components are rejected, and are reworked during a repair cycle.
1.13.3 Technical data of the 12-segment Collect&Place head
Component range 0402 to 18.7mm x 18.7mm including BGA, BGA,

flip chip, TSOP, QFP, PLCC, SO to SO32, DRAM
Max. height 6 mm
Min. lead pitch 0.5 mm
Min. dimensions 0.5 mm x 1.0 mm
Max. dimensions 18.7 mm x 18.7 mm
Max. weight 2g
Max. travel of z axis 16 mm
Programmable placement force 2.4 to 5.0 N
Nozzle types 7xx
Angular accuracy 0.525 / 3 , 0.70 / 4 , 1.05 / 6
Placement accuracy 67.5 m / 3 , 90 m / 4 , 135 m / 6
58
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.13 Overview of the modules - placement heads
1.13.4 Structure of the Pick&Place head
Fig. 1.13 - 2 Structure of the Pick&Place head.
(1) Sleeve
(2) DR axis driving mechanism
(3) Z axis driving mechanism
(4) Fine pitch vision module
59
1.13 Overview of the modules - placement heads Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.13.5 Description of the Pick&Place head
The Pick&Place head works according to the pick&place principle, which means that a compo-
nent is picked up by the nozzle with the aid of a vacuum. After optical centering with the fine pitch
or flip chip vision module, the component is turned to the correct placement angle, and inserted
into the PCB with high precision. The Pick&Place is particularly striking because of its high angu-
lar accuracy. 1
1.13.6 Technical data - Pick&Place head
Component range up to 55mm x 55mm

Component height 13.5mm - PCB thickness
- PCB sagging
Max. height Option:
Component height 20mm - PCB thickness
- PCB sagging
Min. lead pitch 0.4mm (standard), 0.25mm (option)
up to 32mm x 32mm with single measurement
Max. dimensions
up to 55mm x 55mm with quadruple measurement
Max. weight 25 g
Programmable placement
1 - 10 N
force
4xx, 5 standard nozzles including flip chip nozzle with nozzle
Nozzle types
changer
Fine pitch component vision module (standard)
Component centering
Flip chip vision module (option)
Benchmark placement rate 1,800 components/hour
D axis resolution 0.005
Angular accuracy 0.052 / 3 , 0.07 / 4 , 0.105 / 6
Placement accuracy 37.5 m / 3 , 50 m / 4 , 75 m / 6
60
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.14 Overview of the modules - vision systems
1.14 Overview of the modules - vision systems
Every machine has 1
a PCB vision module on the Collect&Place head,
a fine pitch component vision module on the machine base, and
a PCB vision module on the underside of the X-axis gantry
The vision evaluation unit is located on the machines control unit. The component vision module
is used to 1
determine the precise position of the component at the nozzle, and
the geometry of the package form.
The PCB vision module uses fiducials on the PCB to determine 1
the position of the PCB,
its rotational angle,
and the PCB distortion.
Damaged PCBs or subpanels are marked with ink spots. The PCB vision module scans the ink
spots, and signals that these circuits should not be placed. 1
The PCB vision module also uses fiducials on the feeders to determine the precise component
pick-up position. This is particularly important for tiny components. 1
1.14.1 Technical data of the component vision module on the 12-segment

Collect&Place head
Max. component dimensions 0.5mm x 1.0mm to 18.7mm x 18.7mm

0402 to PLCC44
Component range including BGA, BGA, flip chip, TSOP, QFP
PLCC, SO to SO32, DRAM
Minimum lead pitch 0.5 mm
Field of view 24mm x 24mm
Method of illumination Front lighting (3 levels programmable as required)
61
1.14 Overview of the modules - vision systems Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1.14.2 Technical data - fine pitch vision module
32mm x 32mm (single measurement)

Max. component size 55mm x 55mm (multiple measurement)
(larger components available upon request)
PLCC, LCCC, QFP, SO, BGA, flip chip,
Component range components with leads up to 55mm x 55mm
(J-leads and gull wings, balls, bumps)
Minimum lead pitch 0.2 mm
Field of view 38mm x 38mm
1.14.3 Technical data PCB vision module
Fiducials Up to 3 per placement program

Local fiducials Up to 2 per PCB (may be of different types)
Library size Up to 255 types of fiducial system fiducials 249
Image processing Gray scale value-based correlation principle
Method of illumination Front lighting
Fiducial recognition time per fiducial/ink spot 0.8 s
Field of view 5.7 mm x 5.7 mm
62
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.15 Overview of the modules - PCB conveyor
1.15 Overview of the modules - PCB conveyor
1.15.1 Structure of the PCB conveyor
The machine is supplied with a single conveyor as standard. The dual conveyor is available as an
option. The left or the right side of the PCB conveyor can be used as the stationary side, as re-
quired. 1
Fig. 1.15 - 1 PCB conveyor - single conveyor
(1) Input conveyor (2) Center conveyor
(3) Output conveyor (4) Lifting table
(5) Width adjustment T PCB transport direction 1
63
1.15 Overview of the modules - PCB conveyor Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
The conveyor belts are driven by DC motors. The lifting table near the center conveyor clamps the
PCBs in position. The width of the PCB conveyor can be adjusted, either using the menu or from
the line computer. 1
1.15.2 Technical data single conveyor
50mm x 50mm to 460mm x 460mm

2" x 2" to 18" x 18"
PCB format
Optionally: up to 508mm x 460mm
up to 20" x 18 "
PCB thickness 0.5mm to 4.5mm
On top: 4.5mm - PCB thickness
Max. PCB warpage
On bottom: 0.5mm + PCB thickness
Clearance on PCB underside 25mm (standard), 40mm (option)
830mm 15mm (standard)
900mm 15mm (option)
PCB transport height
930mm 15mm (option)
950mm 15mm (SMEMA: optional)
Fixed conveyor edge Right (standard), left (optional)
Type of interface Siemens (standard), (SMEMA: optional)
Component-free handling edge 3mm
PCB changeover time 2.5 s
1
1.15.3 Technical data dual conveyor
50mm x 50mm to 460mm x 216,5mm

2" x 2" to 18" x 8.5"
PCB format
Optionally: up to 508mm x 216,5mm
up to 20" x 8.5 "
PCB thickness 0.5mm to 4.5mm
On top: 4.5mm - PCB thickness
Max. PCB warpage
On bottom: 0.5mm + PCB thickness
Clearance on PCB underside 25mm (standard), 40mm (option)
64
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 1.15 Overview of the modules - PCB conveyor
830mm 15mm (standard)

900mm 15mm (option)
930mm 15mm (option)
950mm 15mm (SMEMA: optional)
Fixed conveyor edge Right (standard), left (optional)
Type of interface Siemens (standard), (SMEMA: optional)
Component-free handling edge 3mm
Components on each conveyor Synchronous: same or different, asynchronous: same
PCB width on each conveyor Synchronous: different, asynchronous: same
Ink spot recognition Synchronous: not possible, asynchronous: possible
Automatic width adjustment Synchronous: not possible, asynchronous: possible
1
65
1.15 Overview of the modules - PCB conveyor Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
66
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 2 Operational Safety
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 2.1 Safety instructions
2 Operational Safety
2.1 Safety instructions
2.1.1 Conventions for the use of hazard symbols
This User Manual contains notes that must be observed to guarantee your personal safety and to
avoid damage to equipment. These notes are highlighted by warning triangles and are indicated
as follows according to the level of risk: 2
DANGER or 2
as used in this User Manual means that death, severe injury or considerable damage to equip-
ment may occur if the danger instructions are not followed. 2
WARNING or 2
as used in this User Manual means that death, severe injury or considerable damage to equip-
ment may occur if the warning instructions are not followed. 2
CAUTION or 2
as used in this User Manual means that slight injury or damage to equipment may occur if the cau-
tion instructions are not followed. 2
PLEASE NOTE 2
as used in this User Manual provides information on the product or indicates a part of the User
Manual that requires particular attention. 2
2.1.2 Qualified personnel
Qualified or adequately trained personnel means that these people are familiar with the setting up,
operation and maintenance of automatic placement systems and add-on devices and are suitably
qualified, e.g. 2
have been trained, instructed or authorized to switch on and off, isolate, earth and identify elec-
trical circuits and system components in accordance with normal safety standards.
67
2 Operational Safety SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
2.1 Safety instructions Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
have been trained or instructed in the upkeep and use of appropriate safety equipment in ac-
cordance with normal safety standards.
have received first aid training.
2.1.3 Use as prescribed
WARNING 2
The product must only be used for the applications specified in the catalogs and technical
descriptions, and then only in conjunction with non-Siemens devices and components that have
been recommended or approved by Siemens. For the product to operate correctly and reliably, it
must have been transported, stored, erected and assembled correctly and must be operated and
maintained with care.
2.1.4 Important notes on operational safety
WARNING 2
The following points MUST be observed in order to maintain operational safety: 2
NEVER open one of the protective covers if you are not totally familiar with the use and func-
tioning of the machine! Do not open the protective covers during operation unless you are told
to do so in this Manual or in the station software dialog.
Only trained and qualified personnel may set the key switch to set-up mode ("I").
During operation, do not set the key switch to the "I" position (set-up mode) unless prompted
to do so in this manual or by the station software. 2
NEVER place your head or arms in the gantry travelling range while the station is switched on!
Never make changes, however minor, unless you are totally aware of the effect they will have
on the overall functioning of the system.
The stations must always be set up, retooled and maintained by appropriately trained person-
nel.
Only use Siemens original spare parts and authorized accessories. The use of other parts will
affect safety and may invalidate the liability for any consequential damage.
The operational safety of SMD automatic placement systems can be guaranteed only if the
system is used as prescribed and in accordance with the instructions in the User/Service Man-
uals.
68
The key for opening control and servo unit doors and the key for the key switch should be kept
in a place that is only accessible to qualified personnel.
If it is necessary to work on the machine and you do not have adequately trained personnel
within your operation, always call in a Siemens service technician. Siemens AG will not accept
liability for any damage or consequential damage that is the result of incorrect work.
Machine operators must only carry out work for which they have been adequately trained and
with which they are totally familiar.
Always follow any safety regulations specific to your country.
Do not make modifications to the safety equipment. In particular, NEVER bypass circuit-break-
ers or remove safety devices.
If particularly hazardous situations are identified while the machine is in use, the machine
owner must immediately notify the manufacturer in writing so that appropriate action can be
taken to reduce the potential danger.
Protective devices must NOT be modified. In particular, circuit-breakers must never be by-
passed and protective devices must never be removed.
If particular hazards are identified while the machine is in use, the machine operator must im-
mediately notify the manufacturer in writing so that the manufacturer can take appropriate ac-
tion to minimise the potential danger.
DANGER 2
This machine is electrically operated. When electrical devices are in use, certain parts carry dan-
gerous voltage levels. Switch off at the main switch and disconnect the placement system from
the power supply before carrying out any work on live components. There is a risk of death, severe
injury and/or considerable damage to equipment if these instructions are not followed. 2
WARNING 2
Despite all the safety measures taken by the manufacturer, severe injury (e.g. from the gantry)
and/or considerable damage to equipment may result if the placement system is operated incor-
rectly. For the machine to be safe, it must be used correctly by qualified personnel and all warn-
ings must be observed. Some work on the machine (e.g. setting up) requires training that goes
beyond the scope of this Manual.
69
2.1.5 Warning signs on the placement system
The following diagram shows the position of the warning signs on the basic machine. 2
Fig. 2.1 - 1 Warning signs on the basic machine - part 1
Item 1 from the diagram 2.1 - 1 showing the warning signs on the basic machine 2
70
Achtung !
Bei ausgeschaltetem Hauptschalter
unter Spannung
Warning !
Always energized, even when
main switch is off
Attention !
Haute tension quand
linterrupteur principal est coup.
Attenzione !
Sotto tensione
con interruttore principale spento
Nicht in die laufende

Maschine greifen
Do not put your

hands into working
machine
Ne pas mettre les

mains dans la machine
en fonctionnement
Non mettere le mani

nella macchina durante
il funzionamento
71
RISK OF CRUSHING HANDS

IF THE PROTECTIVE COVERS ARE NOT CLOSED CORRECTLY 2
VORSICHT NETZSPANNUNG
Vor Abnehmen der Schutzabdeckung
Netz vollstndig abschalten
Kondensatorentladezeit
tmin. = 0,25 Minuten abwarten
WARNING! MAIN POWER VOLTAGE!
Completely isolate the machine

before removing the protective cover.
Capacitor discharge time
tmin. = wait 0.3 minutes
72
Key to Fig. 2.1 - 2
(1) Main power switch

T Direction of PCB transport 2
2
Danger!
All correspondingly marked
parts remain electrically
live and dangerous even
when the main switch is off!
Item from the diagram 2.1 - 2 showing the warning signs on the basic machine 2
73
Warnung ! 3
Diese Maschine kann auf Grund elektrischer Spannungen und Strme sowie
auf Grund mechanischer, thermischer oder chemischer Vorgnge Gefahren
bringen, die zu Krperverletzungen und Sachschden fhren.
Unbedingte Voraussetzung fr den Betrieb der Maschine ist deshalb, da sie
- nur fr den vorgesehenen Zweck verwendet wird

- nur mit Personal betrieben wird, das die erforderliche Qualifikation
besitzt und eine Schulung und Anweisung erhalten hat
- in ihren Schutzeinrichtungen unverndert bleibt. berbrcken von
Schutzschaltern, Entfernen von Schutzeinrichtungen sind unzulssig.
Wenn beim Betrieb der Maschine wesentliche Gefahren erkannt werden,

dann ist der Betreiber verpflichtet, dem Hersteller eine schriftliche Mitteilung
zu machen, damit dieser entsprechende Manahmen ergreifen kann.
Item 3 from the diagram 2.1 - 2 on page 73 showing the warning signs on the basic machine 2
2
Warning ! 4
The operating voltages and currents of the machine, together with ist
mechanical, thermal and chemical characteristics can result in personal injury
or damage to the machine if the correct guidelines are not followed.
The mandatory requirements for operating the machine are as follows:
- the machine must only be used for ist intended purpose

- the machine must only be operated by personnel having the required
qualifications and who have received the necessary training and
instructions
- the protective facilities in and on the machine must remain unchanged.
It is not permitted to bypass safety switches or remove any safety
facilities.
If, while the machine is in operation, any fault is discovered, the operator is
obliged to report this in writing to the manufacturer so that corrective
measures can be taken.
Item 4 from the diagram 2.1 - 2 on page 73 showing the warning signs on the placement system2
74
WARNING
WARNUNG
Use only approved feeders, labeled
as shown below, when feeding
capacitors based on metal-powder
(e.g. tantalum).
Kondensatoren auf Metallpulver-
Basis (z.B. Tantal) drfen nur mit
folgendermaen gekennzeichneten
Gurtfrderern verarbeitet werden:
Approved for
capacitors based on
metal-powder
Freigegeben fr
Kondensatoren auf
Metallpulver-Basis
Pos. 5 der Abb. 2.1 - 2, Seite 73 ber die Warnschilder an der Grundmaschine
Approved for
capacitors based on
metal-powder
Freigegeben fr
Kondensatoren auf
Metallpulver-Basis
Aufkleber auf Frderer (vergrert)
GEFAHR 2
Kondensatoren auf Metallpulver-Basis wie zum Beispiel Tantal-Kondensatoren drfen nur mit Fr-
derern verarbeitet werden, die mit diesem Aufkleber gekennzeichnet sind. 2
75
Key to Fig. 2.1 - 3
T Direction of PCB transport 2
ACHTUNG
Handhabungsvorschriften
beachten
Elektrostatisch gefhrdete
Bauelemente
ATTENTION
Electrostatic sensitive devices
Observe precautions for
handling
Item 1 from the diagram 2.1 - 3 showing the warning signs on the control unit on the basic ma-
chine 2
76
WARNING! MAIN POWER VOLTAGE
Completely isolate the machine

before removing the protective cover.
Capacitor discharge time
tmin. = wait 0.3 minutes
Item 2 from the diagram 2.1 - 3 showing the warning signs on the control unit of the basic ma-
chine 2
77
2.1.6 Additional warning signs for the NAFTA region
Fig. 2.1 - 4 Warning signs on the basic machine - NAFTA region
78
Item 1 in Fig. 2.1 - 4 showing the warning signs on the basic machine - NAFTA region 2
Warning
High voltage Operating Cutting tools

can cause machinery can can slice or
severe crush and sever limbs
injury or death mutilate limbs
Service in this area must be performed by

authorized personell only
Switch off main electrical and pneumatic

switches, remove from main power
Item 2 in Fig. 2.1 - 4 showing the warning signs on the basic machine - NAFTA region 2
Warning !
Hazardous voltages present
even when
EMERGENCY STOP
is pressed
Item 3 in Fig. 2.1 - 4 showing the warning signs on the basic machine - NAFTA region (on the cover
over the terminal panels) 2
79
2
Warning 2
2
High voltage can cause Operating machinery
severe can
injury or death crush and mutilate limbs 2
Service in this area must be performed by 2

authorized personell only
Item 4 in Fig. 2.1 - 4 showing the warning
Switch off main electrical and pneumatic
signs on the basic machine - NAFTA region 2
switches, remove from main power
2
Warning
2
2
Sliding covers
2
can crush or cut
2
Item 5 in Fig. 2.1 - 4 showing the warning signs on the basic

machine - NAFTA region - visible when the covers are open 2
80
WARNING
Fire Hazard
Can cause death, serious injury
or property damage
Use only approved feeders, labeled

as shown below, when feeding
capacitors based on metal-powder
(e.g. tantalum).
Approved for
capacitors based on
metal-powder
Freigegeben fr
Kondensatoren auf
Metallpulver-Basis
Item 6 in Fig. 2.1 - 2 on page 73 showing the warning signs on the basic machine - NAFTA region
Approved for
capacitors based on
metal-powder
Freigegeben fr
Kondensatoren auf
Metallpulver-Basis
Feeder label (enlarged)
DANGER 2
Use only feeders, labeled as shown above, when feeding capacitors based on metal-powder (e.g.
tantalum). 2
81
2.1.7 Safety instructions for the component vision modules (80F4)
DANGER 2
NEVER modify or bypass safety devices on the placement machine or on the fine pitch or flip chip
vision module. 2
The optical radiation from the fine pitch or flip chip vision module conforms to laser class 1, pro-
vided that the module is permanently installed in the placement machine and the protective hoods
are closed (EN 60825-1 and IEC 825). 2
Class 1 Laser Product
Fig. 2.1 - 5 Identification of laser class 1
82
Fig. 2.1 - 6 Fine-pitch and flip chip vision module, coplanarity laser module (80F4)
(1) Fine-pitch vision module

(2) Flip chip vision module
(3) Coplanarity laser module
2
83
2.1.8 Safety instructions for the coplanarity laser module (80F4)
DANGER
You must not make any modifications whatsoever to or tamper with the safety features or co-
planarity laser module (see Fig. 2.1 - 6).
The coplanarity laser module - without

safety features - corresponds to Laser
class 3B (see Fig. 2.1 - 7)
This means danger to eyes and skin!
For this reason the safety features
should under no circumstances be
circumvented.
2
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION 2

DO NOT EXPOSE TO BEAM
CLASS 3 B LASER PRODUCT
1MW MAX., 670 NM;
2
AS PER IEC 825-1(1993)
2
Fig. 2.1 - 7 Identification label for Laser class 3B
To enable the laser module in Laser class 1 to be operated with no danger to eyes and skin the
following safety features have been installed in the machine:
2
The interlock line is connected in series with

the switches for the protective cover. Even if
the key-operated switch is used to circum-
Class 1 Laser Product
vent the protective devices this particular
protective feature will not be disabled. This
means that the laser module can be oper-
ated only within the closed machine. 2
Fig. 2.1 - 8 Identification label for Laser class 1
84
DANGER
In the event of any modifications or tampering with the module the factory safety warranty will be
rendered null and void. In addition, the user shall be obliged to comply with the guidelines of the
Union of Employers Liability Insurance Associations [Hauptverband der Berufsgenossen-
schaften] -VBG 93. In other words:
- Registration with the liability insurance association
- Appointment of a laser safety officer
- Drawing up guidelines for the use of the module 2
The illustration below shows the location of the safety information for operating the coplanarity la-
ser module of the 80F4 SIPLACE machine. This information must be glued onto the cover in the
places which are indicated by arrows so that it is clearly visible. 2
Fig. 2.1 - 9 Safety instructions on the 80F4 SIPLACE machine
85
Key to Fig. 2.1 - 9 2

1 2
Caution
Class 1 Laser Invisible laser radiation if the cover is opened
Product and safety interlock is bypassed
Do not stand in front of the beam
2.1.9 Safety instructions for the PCB barcode reader (option)
Fig. 2.1 - 10 PCB barcode reader (bottom)
(1) PCB barcode reader (bottom)

(2) Laser radiation label (see Fig. 2.1 - 11)
(3) Caution label (see Fig. 2.1 - 12)
86
CAUTION 2
The scanning beam of the barcode reader has a radiant power of less than 1 mW. The barcode
reader thus conforms to laser class 2 and, according to EN 60825-1, requires no special safety
devices or protective measures. NEVER look into the laser beam. There is also a safety circuit
that switches off the laser diode if the polygon wheel is stationary or rotating too slowly. 2
Laser radiation 2
The radiation from the laser diode (infrared or IR

light) of the PCB barcode reader is harmful to the hu-
man eye, 2
so you should never look into the laser beam.

Never direct the PCB barcode reader into other
peoples eyes,
When installing the barcode reader, make sure
that the laser beam cannot be not reflected dur-
ATTENTION
ing use.
LASER RADIATION If you open the housing during use, the scanning cy-
DO NOT LOOK INTO BEAM cle will continue and the laser diode will continue to
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT
EN 60825 1991 switch on. 2
Max. output radiation: 1.0 mW The laser beam output at the barcode template win-
Emitted wave length: 670 nm
dow does not exceed 1.0 mW. The PCB barcode
reader thus conforms to protection class 2. 2
Fig. 2.1 - 11 Laser radiation label
2
Caution
Laser radiation when the cover is opened 2
and the safety interlock is bypassed 2
Do not look into the beam
2
2
Fig. 2.1 - 12 Caution label
87
2.1.10 Safety instructions for coupling and uncoupling the mobile changeover
table
WARNING 2
Never reach into the gaps between the component changeover table and the placement sys-
tem frame while the machine is running (item 1).
Always check that the component table is docked on the placement system before connecting
or disconnecting the power cable for the component changeover table at the socket on the
placement system (item 2).
NEVER connect the connecting cable for the component table to the socket on the placement
system and then operate the component table outside the machine via the compressed air
control unit (item 3).
Fig. 2.1 - 13 Safety instructions for coupling and uncoupling the mobile changeover table
88
6DIHW\LQVWUXFWLRQVIRUFKDQJLQJWKHKHLJKWRIFRPSRQHQWWDEOHV
WARNING 2
The component table must only be converted to modify the default

height by trained Service personnel.
Act with considerable care during the conversion process since
the system contains large weights or compression springs (potential
energy).
&RQYHUWLQJWKHFRPSRQHQWWDEOHWRVXLWDGLIIHUHQWOLQHKHLJKW
Use the placement systems pneumatic controller to raise the table bed. Then insert a 120mm
spacer block between the table bed and cross-beam, and lower the bed onto the block.
Dismantle the internal paneling.
Swivel the handle down. The latching disk swivels down as well.
Set the screw to the desired dimension and lock in place with the locknut.
3/($6(127(
,I\RXFDQQRWORRVHQWKHDGMXVWLQJVFUHZIDUHQRXJKWKHFURVVEHDPPXVWEHUDLVHG
Fix the lifting device to the cross-beam.

Carefully open the cross-beam clamp.
Raise the cross-beam until the end of the tube projects approx. 1mm out of the clamp.
Tighten the cross-beam clamp.
Then turn the adjusting screw to the desired dimension and lock in place with the locknut.
Swivel the component table handle up. The latching disk will also swivel up.
3/($6(127(
,I\RXFDQQRWVZLYHOWKHODWFKLQJGLVNXSWRLWVHQGSRVLWLRQWKHFURVVEHDPPXVWEHUDLVHG
)L[WKHOLIWLQJGHYLFHWRWKHFURVVEHDP
&DUHIXOO\RSHQWKHFURVVEHDPFODPS
5DLVHWKHFURVVEHDPXQWLOWKHHQGRIWKHWXEHSURMHFWVDSSUR[PPRXWRIWKHFODPS
7LJKWHQWKHFURVVEHDPFODPS
Then turn the adjusting screw to the desired dimension and lock in place with the locknut.
89
Then carefully open the cross-beam clamp.

Lower the cross-beam until the adjusting screw comes into contact with the latching disk.
Tighten the cross-beam clamp.
Then check the distance between the cross-beam and floor.
Refit the internal paneling.
Raise the table bed and remove the spacer block.
2.1.12 Safety instructions for the changeable component feeder table
If you use a changeable component feeder table rather than a mobile changeover table, then fol-
low these safety instructions to prevent injury or damage to machines. 2
WARNING 2
If you have installed a changeable component feeder table, do not forget to secure it with the two
M10 hexagon socket-head bolts (see item 1 and 2 in fig. 2.1 - 14). If you do not do this, the com-
ponent feeder table could tip over and the placement head could collide with the feeder as it ap-
proaches the feeder area. 2
90
Fig. 2.1 - 14 Securing the changeable component feeder table
91
2.1.13 Safety instructions for opening the protective covers
To prevent any risk of injury when the protective covers on automatic placement machines are
opened, the owner must instruct his operators to use the protective covers exactly as specified in
the following description. 2
RISK OF TRAPPING FINGERS IF THE PROTECTIVE

COVERS ARE OPENED OR CLOSED INCORRECTLY
When you open the protective covers, if you place one hand in one of the
recessed grips (1) and place the other hand on the protective cover in order to
guide it (item (5) in Fig. 2.1 - 15), you risk trapping your fingers in the narrow gap (4) between the
monitor traverse (3) and the protective cover (2). 2
Fig. 2.1 - 15 Protective covers on the SIPLACE automatic placement machine
92
Key to Fig. 2.1 - 15
(1) Recessed grips for opening and closing the protective

(2) Protective cover
(3) Monitor traverse
(4) Narrow gap (between 4 and 10 mm) between
the monitor traverse and protective cover
(5) Do NOT place your hand on this surface!

Every protective cover on the automatic placement machine has two recessed grips (1). 2
PLEASE NOTE
Always place both hands in these recessed grips (see item (1) in Fig. 2.1 - 16) in order to open
or close the protective covers. This two-handed operation will prevent any risk of injuring your
hands.
You will also avoid tilting the protective covers during opening or closing, which would place an
excessive load on the guides. 2
93
Fig. 2.1 - 16 Two-handed operation
(1) Two-handed operation

2
94
2.1.14 Securing the placement machine to prevent it slipping
In areas with an earthquake risk, it is essential to secure the placement machine to prevent it slip-
ping. 2
Two holes for M8 bolts are provided in the machine feet for this purpose. 2
Use the bolts to fix the placement machine to the floor as shown in the diagram below.
Fig. 2.1 - 17 Securing the placement machine to prevent it slipping
95
2.1.15 Safety instructions for processing capacitors based on powdered metal
There is a risk associated with processing capacitors based on powdered metal (e.g. tantalum). 2
The risk is that 2
An exothermic reaction, i.e. a sudden build-up of heat, may occur if these components are
damaged. If the ambient conditions are unfavorable, and depending on the capacitance, this
build-up of heat can cause damage.
This effect can occur when these components are cut.
Please contact your suppliers to clarify whether the components that you handle are affected. 2
In extremely rare cases, this risk can occur in the tape cutter of SIPLACE machines, with the re-
mote possibility of causing a smoldering fire in the waste tape. 2
The ambient conditions are unfavorable if: 2
(1) The components remain on the tape while the set tape cycle is checked (since the operator
can cycle the feeder onward without removing components during this check).
(2) The components remain on the tape, e.g. due to a tear in the cover foil.
(3) The components remain on the tape, and the components or tape do not conform to the
specification, thus increasing the pick-up error rate.
Please follow the instructions given below to minimize the risk when placing capacitors based on
powdered metal. 2
(1) If the component tape is cycled onward manually, the operator must remove any components
remaining in the tape pocket.
(2) If the cover foil tears, the operator must remove any components remaining on the tape.
(3) The waste tape container must be emptied regularly (recommended interval: every hour).
2
The feeders are labeled as shown

below:
CAUTION 2
To avoid the risk, it is essential to use only feeders that have

Approved for
been approved for placing such components, namely: capacitors based on
Article no.: 00141117-01 Model E metal-powder
Article no.: 00141118-01 Model C/D 2 Freigegeben fr

Kondensatoren auf
Metallpulver-Basis
96
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 2.2 Safety equipment
2.2 Safety equipment
2.2.1 Protective covers
Fig. 2.2 - 1 SIPLACE safety equipment
(1) Cover and guard on the input conveyor

(2) Safety panels, righthand side
(4) Cover and guard on the output conveyor
(6) Safety panels, lefthand side
97
2.2 Safety equipment Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
2.2.1.1 General
The gantry positioning range is covered by two protective covers. If you want to open the protec-
tive covers, first press the Stop button (item 1 in Fig. 2.2 - 2) or the emergency stop mushroom-
head push-button (item 2 in Fig. 2.2 - 2). The power to the gantry axes will be switched off and the
gantries will stop immediately. 2
If you open one of the protective covers or a guard on the incoming or outgoing conveyor, the
power to the gantry axes will be switched off and they will stop immediately. 2
If the key switch is closed (position I), you can continue to pace the star at reduced speed while
the protective covers are open. 2
Placement will stop if you press the emergency stop button. You can then either cancel or continue
placement of the PCB. The protective covers at the sides can be opened in order to refill with com-
ponents when the machine has stopped. 2
WARNING
The protective covers must only be opened, with the key switch closed (position I), by appropri-
ately qualified and trained personnel. 2
Fig. 2.2 - 2 Stop and emergency stop mushroom-head push-buttons
(1) Stop button (2) EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom-head push-button 2
98
2.2.2 Guard on the input / output conveyor
DANGER
The guard must always be set to the height of the PCB to be processed. Ensure that the gap be-
tween the guard and the safety bar is as small as possible. 2
Guards are fitted on the input and output belts of the PCB conveyor. 2
The height of the guard must be set using the slots so that the processed PCB can travel through.2
Fig. 2.2 - 3 Guard on SIPLACE machines
(1) Safety bar (fixed) (2) Guard (adjustable) 2
(3) Slots for adjusting the height (4) Cover 2
99
2.2.3 EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-buttons, protective cover

switches ...
Fig. 2.2 - 4 Location of the buttons and protective contactor combinations K1, K2
(1) Stop button

(2) Start button
(3) EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-button
(4) EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-button
(5) Start button
(6) Stop button
(7) Component counter
(8) Key switch open: position 0 for normal mode
Key switch closed: position I for service purposes
(9) Protective cover switch (output conveyor, 00303617-xx)
(10) Protective cover switch (right, 00321417-xx)
(11) Protective cover switch (input conveyor, 00303614-xx)
100
(12) Protective cover switch (left, 00321416-xx)

(14) Protective contactor combination K1
(15) Protective contactor combination K2
(16) Compressed air unit
2.2.3.1 Functional description
EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-button 2

When the emergency stop mushroom-head push-button is pressed (item 3 or item 4. in
Fig. 2.2 - 4), the motor voltage to the gantry axes is switched off. The gantry axes are no longer
powered, and thus are not dangerous. 2
PLEASE NOTE
Placement is interrupted and can then either be continued or cancelled once the system is working
correctly again. 2
Protective cover switch 2

If one of the protective covers is opened (see item 9, 10, 11 or 12 in Fig. 2.2 - 4), the gantry axes
will stop immediately. They are no longer powered, and thus are not dangerous. 2
Key switch 2
If the key switch (item 8 in Fig. 2.2 - 4) is closed (position I), the star can still be paced at low speed
while the protective covers are open. The gantry axes are no longer powered, and thus are not
dangerous. 2
PLEASE NOTE
The key switch remains open for normal mode, i.e. in the 0 position. 2
WARNING
The protective covers must only be opened, with the key switch closed (position I), by appropri-
ately qualified and trained personnel. 2
101
2.2.3.2 Status messages and the action required
The following displays may appear in placement mode. If they appear, carry out the action spec-
ified in the third column. 2
Status Display on screen Action required

EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop pressed ... Release the pressed emergency
mushroom-head push- Machine stopped. Release stop button (item 3 or 4 in Fig.
button pressed button 2.2 - 4)
Press start button Press the white start button (item 2

or 5 in Fig. 2.2 - 4)
Protective cover open Close the cover Close the protective cover (item 9,
10, 11 or 12 in Fig. 2.2 - 4)
Press start button Press the white start button (item 2

or 5 in Fig. 2.2 - 4)
Tab. 2.2 - 1 Screen display when the emergency stop mushroom-head push-button is pressed
or the protective cover is open
2.2.4 Safety circuits
The SIPLACE automatic placement system has two separate safety circuits which are monitored
by protective contactor combinations K1 and K2. Both protective contactor combinations are in-
corporated into the power supply (see item 14 and 15 in Fig. 2.2 - 4). 2
DANGER
Automatic placement systems from the SIPLACE family are powered with 3x400 VAC (3 x 208
VAC U.S.A. version) 5 %, 50/60Hz mains voltage.
This means that parts of the system carry potentially fatal voltages - even when switched off at the
main switch. Death, serious injury or considerable damage may result if these automatic place-
ment systems are handled incorrectly.
Always follow the applicable accident prevention and DIN regulations (particularly EN 60204,
part 1) and the applicable regulations in your own country.
The guard over the power supply must ONLY be opened by appropriately qualified and trained
personnel. 2
102
Protective contactor combinations K1 and K2 monitor the following circuits:
K1:Emergency stop circuit, safety circuits for the component tables or wafflepack changer,
protective cover switch and the enable software signal
K2:Emergency stop circuit, K1 protective contactor combination, software enable signal and
key switch
K1 or K2 is triggered if any of these functions fail. The mains voltage to the heavy current trans-
former that supplies the gantry axis motors will be interrupted. The voltage to the star-type motor
for the Collect&Place head is reduced from 70 V to 10V. The dp and dR axes of the placement
heads continue to be supplied with 30V. The next diagram illustrates the various statuses of K1
and K2 and their effects on the axes and the PCB conveyor components.
103
2
Start button pressed
Compressed air No
min. 5.1 bar?
Yes
Emerg. stop
mushroom-head push-but- Yes
ton pressed?
No
Component table safety Yes

circuit interrupted?
No
No Yes
Protective cover open ?
Yes Key switch No

closed (position I)?
Active Active Active

K1 *) Yes K1 *) No K1 *) No
K2 *) Yes K2 *) Yes K2 *) No
Voltage Voltage Voltage
Y axis 100 V Y axis 0V Y axis 0V
X axis 100 V X axis 0V X axis 0V
Star axis 70 V Star axis 10 V Star axis 10 V
DP axis 30 V DP axis 30 V DP axis 30 V
Z axis 30 V Z-axis 30 V Z axis 30 V
Active Active Active
PCB conveyor Yes PCB conveyor Yes PCB conveyor No
PCB clamping device Yes PCB clamping device No PCB clamping device No
Width adjustment Yes Width adjustment Yes Width adjustment No
PCB stopper Yes PCB stopper No PCB stopper No
Tape cutter Yes Tape cutter No Tape cutter No
*) K1, K2 protective contactor combination
Fig. 2.2 - 5 SIPLACE safety circuits
104
2.2.5 Guard on the component table locations
DANGER
All locations must be equipped with feeders in order to guarantee operational reliability. If there
are not enough feeders available, a guard ("dummy feeder") must be fitted in place of the feeder.
The following variants can be used:
Item no. 00116820-01 SIPLACE guard for 1 location
Item no. 00116821-01 SIPLACE guard for 6-10 locations
Item no. 00116822-01 SIPLACE guard for 11-20 locations 2
Fig. 2.2 - 6 Guard
(1) Guard for 1 location (2) Guard for 6 to 10 locations
(3) Guard for 11 to 20 locations 2
105
2.3 Residual voltages in the servo unit and discharge times Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
2.3 Residual voltages in the servo unit and discharge

times
When the emergency stop mushroom-head push-button is pressed or the placement system is
switched off, the electrolytic capacitors quickly discharge to safe residual voltage levels via
switched resistors on the discharge board (00308443-xx).
The voltages can be tapped off at test sockets 001 - 009 on the voltmeter unit in the servo unit. 2
DANGER Automatic placement systems from the SIPLACE family are

powered with 3 x 400 VAC (3 x 208 VAC for the U.S.A. version) 5 %, 50/60 Hz main power volt-
age. This means that parts of the system carry potentially fatal voltages - even when switched off
at the main switch. Death, serious injury or considerable damage may result if these placement
systems are handled incorrectly. Always follow the applicable accident prevention and DIN regu-
lations (particularly EN 60204, part 1). The guard over the servo unit must ONLY be opened by
appropriately qualified and trained personnel. 2
Servo
unit
un-
switched switched
Fig. 2.3 - 1 Test sockets on the voltmeter unit in the servo unit
106
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 2.3 Residual voltages in the servo unit and discharge times
2.3.1 Operating voltages, residual voltages and discharge times after pressing
the emergency stop mushroom-head push-button
Test socket 00X Discharge times

Voltage Residual voltage
measured at of electrolytic
in normal mode after emerg. stop
007 (GND) capacitors at 12 VDC
001 70 VDC 10 VDC < 2 sec
002 30 VDC 30 VDC
003 30 VDC < 12 VDC < 2 sec
004 24 VDC 24 VDC
005 12 VDC 12 VDC
006 5 VDC 5 VDC
008 70 VDC 10 VDC < 2 sec
009 100VDC 10 VDC < 1 sec
Tab. 2.3 - 1 Operating voltages, residual voltages and discharge times after pressing the emergency stop
mushroom-head push-button
2.3.2 Residual voltages and discharge times after switching off at the main switch
Test socket 00X Residual voltage Discharge times of electrolytic

measured at 007 (GND) when main switch is off capacitors at 12 VDC
001 < 12 VDC < 2 sec
002 < 12 VDC < 2 sec
003 < 12 VDC < 2 sec
004 0 VDC
005 0 VDC
006 0 VDC
008 < 12 VDC < 2 sec
009 < 12 VDC < 1 sec
Tab. 2.3 - 2 Residual voltages and discharge times after switching off at the main switch
CAUTION To avoid losing data, evaluate the following criteria before switching off your
automatic placement system (apart from in emergencies):
Has the placement system finished transmitting machine, set-up and working data?
Has the placement system finished processing the PCB?
Has the placement system completed the run-up phase?
Has the Windows NT operating system been shut down correctly? 2
107
2.4 Disabling the compr. air supply and discharging the pressure Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
2.4 Disabling the compr. air supply and discharging

the pressure
The compressed air working pressure is set to 5.1 bar, although it may fluctuate between 5.0 and
5.3 bar. The position of the compressed air unit is indicated by item 5 in Fig. 2.4 - 1. The com-
pressed air supply to the machine can be interrupted using the shut-off valve (item 1 in
Fig. 2.4 - 1). 2
You must remove the cover plate to use the shut-off valve.
Turn the lever on the shut-off valve (item 1 in Fig. 2.4 - 1) from the vertical to the horizontal
position.
Watch the working pressure gauge (item 2 in Fig. 2.4 - 1) and the pressure gauges for the com-
pressed air supply to the component tables and tape cutters or to the stopper (item 3 or 4 in
Fig. 2.4 - 1). When the automatic placement system is switched on, the pressure discharges
to 0 bar within 1 minute.
2
Fig. 2.4 - 1 Compressed air unit on the automatic placement system
(1) Shut-off valve lever in the CLOSED position

(2) Working pressure gauge
(3) Pressure gauge for the PCB stopper working pressure
(4) Position of the compressed air unit
WARNING Never disconnect compressed air lines while they are pressurized.2
108
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 2.5 Energy state of the machine after switching off at the main switch
2.5 Energy state of the machine after switching off at

the main switch
DANGER
Automatic placement systems from the SIPLACE family are powered with 3 x 400 V or 3 x
208 VAC (U.S.A. version) 5 %, 50/60 Hz mains voltage. This means that parts of the system
carry potentially fatal voltages - even when switched off at the main switch. Death, serious injury
or considerable damage may result if these placement systems are handled incorrectly.
Always follow the applicable accident prevention and DIN regulations (particularly EN 60204,
part 1). The guards over the control and servo units must ONLY be opened by appropriately qual-
ified and trained personnel. 2
un-
switched switched
Fig. 2.5 - 1 Position of the control unit, servo unit, main switch, service socket and compr. air unit
(1) Main switch Q1 (2) Compressed air unit

(3) Service socket (4) Servo unit
(5) Control unit (6) Power supply for control unit
(7) Measuring unit, servo unit
109
2.5 Energy state of the machine after switching off at the main switch Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
2.5.1 Placement system switched off at the main switch, but still connected ...
The following table specifies the voltages of assemblies when the automatic placement system is
switched off at the main switch, but still connected to the mains supply. 2
Assembly Voltage
Main power filter Z1

Terminals L1, L2, L3 3 x 400 VAC (3 x 208 VAC)
Service socket
230 VAC(115 VAC)
Main switch Q1
Terminals 1, 3, 5 3 x 400 VAC (3 x 208 VAC)
Terminals 2, 4, 6 0 VAC
Servo unit (Item 7 in Fig. 2.5 - 1)
Test socket 001 < 12 VDC
Test socket 004 0 VDC
GND 007
Control unit (Item 6 in Fig. 2.5 - 1)

Test socket 5V 0 VDC
Test socket + 12 V 0 VDC
Test socket 12 V 0 VDC
Test socket 15 V 0 VDC
GND
Tab. 2.5 - 1
2.5.2 Placement system switched off at the main switch and disconnected ...
The automatic placement system is unpowered, apart from slight residual voltages in the servo
unit. 2
2.5.3 Compressed air conditions in the machine after switching off at the main
switch
When the system is switched off at the main switch (item 1 in Fig. 2.5 - 1) or if the power supply
fails, the electrically-controlled main valve Y1 of the compressed air unit closes (Fig. 2.4 - 1,
page 107 ). The pressure will drop to 0 bar within 5 seconds. 2
110
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 2.6 Lock out and tag out procedure
2.6 Lock out and tag out procedure
2.6.1 Purpose and scope
Before performing any maintenance work or service work, a procedure of locking and tagging
must be followed. The procedure, when followed correctly eliminates the possibility of an em-
ployee being injured. 2
NOTE 2
These procedures represent the minimum lock/tag out requirements. Any additional safe-guards
needed to complete work safely can be specified by facilities supervision, the safety officer, the
safety committee and the health department.
2.6.2 Description
Whenever it becomes necessary to isolate, control and release energy, the following procedure is
to be followed 2
1. Notify affected employees.
2. Shut down equipment, using normal stopping procedures, such as
depressing the stop button
shutting down the station computer or
switching off the placement system at the main switch.
3. Isolate the equipment from all its energy sources such as
compressed air supply and
power supply.
4. Lock Out equipment
Apply the lock and the lockout whenever possible.
The Tag Out alternative:
If a machine can be locked out, it must be. However, there are situations where energy iso-
lating devices can not accommodate locks. In these cases, the energy isolating devices
must be tagged to warn employees that the machine is de-energized for servicing. The tag
must be securely fastened, it must be placed in a position visible to all and it may only be
removed by the person who attached it. 2
111
2.6 Lock out and tag out procedure Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
5. Relieve stored energy
Stored energy in the compressed air supply or electrical energy in electrolytic capacitors must
be released by appropriate means. 2
After switching off the placement machine wait until the voltages and the compressed air
have discharged to be able work without any risk.
6. Verify the lock out.
Testing the lock out can be done simply by pressing the start button.
7. The following steps must be taken to restore the machine to operation.
8. Check the area, authorized employees should remove all of their tools and reinstall all guards.
9. Notify all affected employees.
Before removing even one lock or tag, inform all workers in the area that the machine is going
to be restarted. 2
10.Remove locks/tags
Each authorized employee must remove his or her own lock. Each authorized employee will
have his or her own lock. 2
11. Turn the machine on. Authorized workers should observe the equipment in operation to insure
repairs were done correctly.
2.6.3 Testing
The maintenance or electrical person may test the circuits by energizing the circuit for a short
period of time without voiding the lock out procedure provided. This may be done only when no
other work is being performed by any other person on the equipment being tested. 2
It is extremely important that all remote start switches be tagged with the Do Not Operate tag to
prevent inadvertent operation of the equipment during these periods. 2
2.6.4 Responsibilities
1. It shall be the responsibility of the maintenance and electrical personnel to make sure this pro-
cedure is adhered to.
2. It shall be the responsibility of the maintenance and electrical personnels immediate

supervisor to instruct his personnel on this procedure.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the Safety Officer with assistance from the Safety Committee,
Health Service Department, and the various managers and Vice-Presidents to administer the
Lock Out / Tag Out Procedure.
112
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 2.6 Lock out and tag out procedure
2.6.5 Training
1. Employee training
The safety regulations require training for every individual, of course every employee is not ex-
posed to the same degree of danger or is involved with LO/TO as others are. So extensive
training is not necessary for everyone. 2
2. To determine how much training to provide for each worker, the employees are divided into
three groups. Each group has its own level of training.
3. Authorized employees
These workers actually install the locks and tags and do the maintenance or service work. So
they must know the most about controlled energy. First, they must be able to recognize all
energy sources and measure the amount of energy. Authorized employees must look for en-
ergy sources out of the realm of the obvious. These energy sources include electrical, mechan-
ical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal and gravitational. Once these workers can
recognize all energy sources they must be taught how to isolate, control, and release the en-
ergy without any risk. 2
4. Affected employees
These are workers who operate the machinery or equipment that may be de-energized. Other
employees who may be affected include those who work in an area that contain equipment that
may be locked/tagged out. These employees have to be instructed about the nature of the en-
ergy control program, they must know why lock/tag out is important, what tags and locks look
like and why they must not remove tags or locks. 2
5. All others
As the name implies, any employee who is not affected or authorized fits into this category.
There employees include office personal, engineers, managers, and upper management. Al-
though they do not have a direct relationship to the machinery being locked or tagged, they
have to receive some training. 2
6. To evaluate the lock/tag out procedure, the safety department will conduct periodic inspec-
tions. As part of the inspection the safety department will document that all facets of the pro-
cedure are followed. The safety department will follow up with formal classroom review or re-
training of the LO/TO procedure.
2.6.6 Review
This procedure will be reviewed and amended as required but in no case less frequently than once
a year. 2
113
2.7 Emissions and energy efficiency of the MCM 1405 ND monitor Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
2.7 Emissions and energy efficiency of the MCM 1405

ND monitor
2.7.1 X-ray radiation
The X-ray radiation generated in the monitor is adequately shielded by the intrinsically safe cath-
ode-ray tube. The local emissions are less than 1 S/h (micro-Sievert per hour). The accelerating
voltage is limited by the device to a maximum of 26 kV. 2
The monitor conforms to the German Directive for protection against harmful X-ray radiation. The
X-ray emissions from the monitor conformed to the DHHS Rules 21 CFR, subsection J on the date
of manufacture and to the FCC Rules, part 15. 2
2.7.2 Efficiency and electromagnetic emissions
The MCM 1405 ND monitor fulfils the conditions for efficiency (to ISO 9241-3) and safety (to EN
60950). 2
The low-frequency electromagnetic emissions fall below the MPR II guidelines issued by the
Swedish Radiation Institute in Stockholm. 2
114
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 2.8 ESD guidelines
2.8 ESD guidelines
2.8.1 What does ESD mean?
Almost all of the modules in use today are equipped with highly integrated MOS blocks and com-
ponents. The manufacturing techniques used mean that these electronic components are ex-
tremely sensitive to overvoltage and thus to electrostatic discharge. 2
The abbreviation for such modules is ESD (Electrostatic Sensitive Device). This is used interna-
tionally, although the German abbreviation EGB may also be seen. 2
The following symbol on cabinet rating plates, racks or packaging indicates that components
which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge have been used and thus that the modules con-
cerned are also touch-sensitive. 2
ESDs can be destroyed by voltages and power levels that are far below the level
that can be perceived by humans. Such voltages occur if a person touches a com-
ponent or module without earthing themselves. Components that are exposed to
such overvoltages do not generally appear to be defective immediately - incorrect
behavior starts after the component or module has been in operation for some time. 2
2.8.2 Important measures to protect against static charging
Most plastics can easily become charged and must therefore be kept away from at-risk com-
ponents.
Always ensure that people, the workplace and packaging are safely earthed when handling
electrostatic sensitive components.
2.8.3 Handling ESD modules
Do not touch electronic modules unless it is absolutely essential to do so in order to carry out other
work. If it is necessary, make sure that you do not touch the pins or printed conductors when you
pick up flat modules. 2
Do not touch components unless 2
you are constantly earthed by an ESD wrist strap or

you are wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe earthing strips on an ESD floor.
2
Always discharge yourself before you touch an electronic module. To do this, simply touch a con-
ductive and earthed object immediately before you touch the module (such as unpainted parts of
a switch cabinet, a water pipe, etc.). 2
115
2.8 ESD guidelines Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Do not allow modules with chargeable and highly insulating materials to touch one another, e.g.
plastic films, insulating table surfaces or items of clothing made from synthetic fibers. 2
Always place the modules on a conductive surface (table with an ESD coating, conductive ESD
foam, ESD bag or container). 2
Do not bring modules near visual display units, monitors or televisions. Keep them at least 10 cm
away from the screen. 2
2.8.4 Measurements and modifications to ESD modules
Do not take measurements on such modules unless

the measuring device is earthed (e.g. via PE conductors) or
you discharge the measuring head just before taking measurements with a potential-free mea-
suring device (e.g. by touching an unpainted metal part of the controller casing).
Always use an earthed soldering iron if you carry out any soldering work.
2.8.5 Dispatching ESD modules
Always store modules and components in conductive packaging (e.g. metallized plastic bags
or metal sleeves) and dispatch them in conductive packaging.
If the packaging is not conductive, place the modules in a conductive envelope before pack-
aging. (Use ESD bags, domestic aluminum foil or paper, for example. NEVER use plastic bags
or film). 2
If the module has integral batteries, ensure that the conductive packaging does not touch or
short-circuit the battery terminals and, if necessary, first cover the terminals with insulating tape
or material.
2
116
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 3 Introduction and basic concepts
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
3 Introduction and basic concepts
This chapter describes the machine displays and controls together with the components of the
graphic user interface.
3
It also provides a basic understanding of the use of the user interface and its functions. 3
NOTE
It is essential for operators who are not yet familiar with the user interface of the station computer
software (SC software) to read this chapter. 3
117
3 Introduction and basic concepts SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
3.1 Machine displays and controls Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
3.1 Machine displays and controls
3.1.1 Overview
Fig. 3.1 - 1 Overview
Key to Fig. 3.1 - 1
(1) Monitor
(2) Keyboard
(4) Front control panel
(5) Rear control panel
(6) Computer
(7) Main fault indicator
118
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 3.1 Machine displays and controls
3.1.1.1 General
Every station is equipped with a station computer. The station computer, monitor and keyboard
are mounted on a pivoting console above the placement system.
There is an operating panel on both the input and the output side of the placement system. Each
panel has a Start and a Stop button, an emergency stop mushroom-head push-button, a key
switch and a component counter.
NOTE
You can operate the SR software interface either via the keyboard and trackball or via the touch
screen (see section 3.2.1). 3
The position of the switches and buttons (main switch, key-operated switches, start/stop button,
EMERGENCY STOP button etc.) is illustrated in Figure 3.1 - 2. The functions are described in
Chapter 2.
3
WARNING
The machine base doors may only be opened by qualified personnel since certain machine
components carry hazardous voltages.
The relevant accident prevention and applicable regulations (DIN) regarding electrical/electrome-
chanical installations must be strictly complied with. Failure to do so may result in death, severe
physical injury or considerable damage to property. 3
119
3.1.2 Machine switches and buttons
The figure below presents the position of the switches and buttons on the machine. 3
3 9
4
5
10
8
7 4
6
3
Fig. 3.1 - 2 Position of switches and buttons on the machine
Key to Fig. 3.1 - 2
(1) Key-operated switch (2) Component counter
(3) Start and stop buttons (4) Emergency stop mushroom-head push-button
(5) Cover switch, lefthand side (6) Main switch

(7) Cover switch, cover of input conveyor (8) Cover switch, righthand side
(9) Cover switch, cover of output conveyor (10) Direction of PCB transport
WARNING
Only appropriately qualified personnel are permitted to use the key-operated switch for service or
maintenance work. The key must be removed to prevent unauthorized access as otherwise
serious injury to personnel or damage to the machine may occur. 3
120
3.1.3 Main fault indicator
The main fault indicator (see Figure 3.1 - 1) contains 2 fault indicator lights (white) together with
an operating indicator light (green) 3
The operating indicator light is located between the two fault indicator lights. This indicates
whether the machine is in production or wait mode. 3
The nature and location of any malfunction can be identified using the operating indicator light
(flashing, glowing etc.) and the two fault indicator lights. 3
The following section describes the information provided by the two fault indicator lights. 3
3.1.3.1 Functions
General Operating Statuses: 3

Operating indicator light continuously illuminated
The machine is operating.
Operating indicator light flashes

The machine is waiting for a PCB in the input conveyor or is waiting for the output conveyor to
become free.
Fault light flashes

One or more tracks are empty at the feeder location of the gantry in question.
However, the machine will process any components present.
Fault light continuously illuminated

An error has occured at the gantry in question--> the machine has stopped.
Both lights continuously illuminated

An error has occurred which affects the entire machine--> the machine has stopped.
3.1.4 Barcode reader
The barcode reader is available as an option. It is very helpful, particularly under production
conditions, since component barcodes on component reels and track barcodes can be read in
quickly and reliably from the barcode strip on the machine.
An acoustic signal sounds each time a data record is successfully read in.
NOTE
For a detailed description of the function, connection and operation of the bar code reader, refer
to chapter 11 Station extensions /Hardware. 3
121
3.1.5 Station computer
The station computer is a desktop model and is equipped with a 31/2" floppy drive and a CD-ROM
drive. The operating system is Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 and the graphical user interface for the
placement system is based on the Windows standard. 3
3.1.6 Monitor
The color monitor with integrated touch screen acts as the display and operating tool for the
graphic user interface of the SC software. You select functions using your finger which guides the
mouse pointer over the screen itself. 3
Actions can be executed by touching the corresponding object (e.g. button or icon) on the
screen. 3
CAUTION
Protect the monitor from humidity and excessive heat (sunlight, room heating).
Never obstruct the ventilation slots.
Never try to remove the cover.
Make sure that no moisture is able to penetrate the inside of the monitor.
Make sure that the operating voltage is set correctly.
Make sure that the brightness and contrast of the screen display are set to medium values since
these greatly prolong the lifetime of the screen. 3
NOTE
Each monitor is supplied with a separate User Manual and you should follow the warnings and
safety instructions it contains.
Please refer to the Manual for a description of the connections and setting options. By default, the
resolution of the screen display is set to 640 x 480 pixels. 3
122
3.1.7 Keyboard
The ultra-flat keyboard installed is IBM-compatible. It is equipped with integrated trackball and
mouse button. 3
The keyboard and trackball act as the standard operating tools for the graphic user interface of
the SC software. 3
NOTE
A separate User Manual is supplied for the keyboards. These contain a description of the keys,
indicators and setting options.
Please respect the warnings and safety instructions contained in this Manual. 3
ESC Num Caps Scroll Pad Trackball

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12
TAB Q
1
3
CTRL PROG LASER
Fig. 3.1 - 3 Keyboard
Key to Figure 3.1 - 3
(1) RETURN key

(2) Left mouse button
(3) Trackball
(4) Function keys F1 to F12
123
3.2 Principles of the graphic user interface Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
3.2 Principles of the graphic user interface
This section describes how you use the various operating tools such as the keyboard, trackball,
mouse buttons and touch screen as well as the functions of the individual components of the
graphic user interface. 3
3.2.1 Inputs and controls
Keyboard 3
The keyboard with its integrated trackball and mouse buttons (see Figure 3.1 - 3) acts as the
standard input tool for the graphic user interface of the SC software. 3
Trackball and mouse buttons 3

You use the trackball to move the mouse pointer across the user interface to the desired object.
You then use the left mouse button to select the object or execute the corresponding function. 3
Touch screen 3
The screen (touch screen) can also be used to operate the user interface. In this way, you can
directly select the actions described above, or trigger the corresponding functions, by touching the
corresponding object with your finger on screen. 3
NOTE
In this Users Manual, the triggering of actions using the left mouse button or by touching the
screen with your finger is always referred to as "clicking". 3
124
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 3.2 Principles of the graphic user interface
3.2.2 Components of the user interface
3
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Fig. 3.2 - 1 Components of the user interface (example of main view)
(1) Caption bar

(2) Menu bar
(3) Working area/display area
(4) Controls
(5) Status area
(6) Toolbar
(7) Info bar
3
125
Caption bar 3
The caption bar displays the name of the current view (e.g. main view). 3
Menu bar 3
The menu bar contains menus, the contents of which (functions and options available in the menu)
may change depending on the current view. 3
Working area/display area 3

This area displays the controls (buttons, icons) used to set/activate functions, the contents of
active menus and submenus, general messages, error messages and other comments. In
addition, in the main view, animated and/or different color objects are used to indicate certain
processes or statuses (e.g. processing, feeder location empty etc.). 3
Controls 3
You trigger actions, select options or make settings by clicking the corresponding controls with the
left mouse button.
If a control is displayed in inverse video (light gray), this means that the conditions for the
execution of the corresponding functions are not satisfied. 3
Status area 3
The status area displays the current machine status, the last error to have occurred and the action
which is to be performed by the operator
If the "GEM Interface" option has been configured, the status of the connection to the host
computer is also displayed at the right-hand side of the area. 3
Toolbar 3
This bar contains buttons which you use to switch the user interface to a different view where you
can perform the necessary operations. When you click a toolbar button, the user interface
switches to the view which corresponds to it. The button matching the active view then itself
becomes inactive. 3
Info bar 3
This bar displays concise information about the menu item or icon/button over which the mouse
pointer is currently positioned. The current control mode is displayed next to this in a separate
area. 3
126
3.2.2.1 Icons in the working or display area
In main view, certain operating statuses (processing, error etc.) are indicated by different icons or
by changes in the color of the corresponding graphic in the display area. 3
Meaning of the individual operating status icons 3

3
Pause processing 3
You can pause the processing in order to carry out single functions, for example. 3
Click on the icon.

Processing will be paused as soon as the PCB on the center conveyor is complete. The color
of the "Processing" icon will change to green.
3
Process 3
If you paused processing (placement) of a PCB in order to switch to the "Single functions" menu,
for example, you can click on this icon to resume placement. The color of the "Pause processing"
icon will change to red. 3
Cancel processing 3
The color of the icon changes to red. Click on this icon to cancel processing a PCB (after a fatal
error message, for example). You will be prompted to confirm this action.
3
Continue processing 3
The color of the icon changes to green. 3
Click on the icon if you wish to continue processing the PCB even after a fatal error mes-
sage, for example. The placement process will be resumed.
3
127
Meaning of the other icons and markings 3

A message window will be overlaid if a track, machine or transport error occurs (see the following
examples). 3
Machine error gantry 1 3

3
Track empty error 3

3
128
Nozzle configuration error 3

3
Transport error 1 3
3
Fiducial error 3
3
129
3.2.2.2 Toolbar in main view
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 3.2 - 2 Toolbar in main view
(1) Main view

(2) Set-up, placement functions (for a description see Chapter 4)
(3) Error, placement functions (for a description see Chapter 4)
(4) Component feeder, placement functions(for a description see Chapter 4)
(5) Gantry, single functions (for a description see Chapter 5)
(6) Conveyor 1 and 2, single functions (for a description see Chapter 5)
(7) Teach fiducials, vision functions (for a description see Chapter 6)
(8) Test component, vision functions (for a description see Chapter 6)
(9) Start SITEST test program (for a description see Users Manual
"Test Program SITEST")
(10) GEM interface (for a description see Chapter 12)
3
NOTES to points 6 and 10

The single functions for Conveyor 2 can only be called if a twin conveyor has been configured.
The GEM interface functions cannot be called unless this has been configured. 3
Click the required button in the toolbar.

The user interface is switched to the corresponding view.
The button corresponding to the view which is currently active itself becomes inactive.
3
130
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 3.3 User interface - views and menus
3.3 User interface - views and menus
3.3.1 Views
To perform a particular operation at a particular moment via the user interface, you may need to
switch this to a different view. You can do this by clicking the appropriate toolbar button (see
section 3.2.2.2) or by selecting the corresponding menu item in the "View" menu (see section
3.3.2.2). 3
NOTE
For a description of the functions available in the various views, refer to the chapters which explain
the procedures applicable to the operations to be performed (e.g. "Refilling Empty Tracks",
Chapter 4). 3
3.3.2 Menus
3.3.2.1 "Mode" menu
The complete set of functions present in the "Mode" menu is only available in the main view.
In the views "Setup ...", "Errors..." and "Feeders" and their sub-views, only the menu items "Stop
processing PCB" and "Processing PCB" are available. In the other views, the "Mode" menu is not
displayed. 3
NOTE
For a detailed description of the menu items "Stop processing PCB", "Processing PCB" and
"Continue processing", refer to section 3.2.2.1 since these functions are usually activated via the
corresponding icons in the working area. 3
131
3.3 User interface - views and menus Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Processing PCB 3
Assembly of the PCBs is started or continued if previously interrupted. 3
Click the menu item Processing PCB (or the corresponding icon).
3
Stop processing PCB 3

The current PCB assembly process is stopped. 3
Click the menu item Stop processing PCB (or the corresponding icon)
3
Abort processing 3
This function allows you to abort certain operating steps such as feeder position recognition or
nozzle changes in the event of a machine stoppage (fatal error, Stop button pressed) 3
Click the menu item Abort processing.

The current operation is aborted when you confirm the action in the displayed dialog box.
3
Continue processing 3
The preceding assembly process, interrupted for example because of an error, is continued once
the fault has been eliminated. 3
Click the menu item Continue processing (or the corresponding icon).
Start SIPLACE OIS 3

This menu command starts the operating data acquisition system SIPLACE OIS (Operator Infor-
mation System), provided the software has been installed and configured. 3
The SIPLACE OIS user interface allows you to obtain information on the operation of an entire line
or individual machines at any time during production. 3
Start SIPLACE Pro 3

This menu command starts the SIPLACE Pro programming system. 3
SIPLACE Pro allows you to program and optimize SIPLACE placement machines and lines. 3
132
Configure SIPLACE connection... 3

This menu command displays a dialog box in which you can specify which computer is to supply
the current station computer with data. If you do not make an entry, the station computer accepts
the first computer to establish a connection. 3
Click the Configure SIPLACE Pro connection... menu command.

The following dialog box appears.
3
In the "Computer name" text box, enter the name of the computer on which the relevant SI-
PLACE Pro line control server is installed.
In the "IP address" text box, enter the IP address of this computer.
NOTE
To obtain the information you require in order to make these entries, open the "Network" dia-
log box on the computer on which the relevant SIPLACE Pro line control server is installed
(Start -> Settings -> Control Panel -> Network). The computer name is displayed on the
"Identification" tab. You can obtain the IP address on the "Protocols" tab by double-clicking
the TCP/IP protocol in the list of network protocols in order to select it.
Click the Accept button.

The entries are accepted, and configuration of the SIPLACE Pro connection is thus completed.
3
133
Switch to operating system ... 3

You use this menu item to switch to the Windows operating system after entering your password.
From here, you can then subsequently return to the SIPLACE user interface. 3
NOTE
This menu option is not available at the "Operator" access level. 3
Click the menu item Switch to operating system ...

The Windows user interface is displayed and the SC software continues to run in the
background.
Shut down computer... 3

All applications are closed without any files which may have been processed being saved and the
station computer is shut down. 3
NOTE
This menu option is not available at the "Operator" access level. 3
Click the menu item Shut down computer...

The following dialog box is opened.
Click Yes if you want to terminate your work.

The station computer is shut down.
Switch off the machine at the main switch.
134
3.3.2.2 "View" menu
The "View" menu contains the options for calling the placement functions, single functions and
vision functions. It is also used to start the SITEST test program and call the view for running the
GEM functions. 3
Click the required menu option.

The screen display is switched to the corresponding view in which you can then call the
necessary functions.
NOTE
All the options in this menu can also be called by clicking the corresponding toolbar button (see
section 3.2.2.2) or by pressing the corresponding function key. If shortcuts have been defined,
these can also be used. 3
NOTE
The 3 menu options below belong to the group of placement functions. 3
135
Setup F2 3
The setup for a feeder location is displayed in tabular form. It can be called separately for each of
the four locations.
The procedure is described in more detail in Chapter 4 Placement functions. 3
Errors F3 3
Errors are differentiated by type and each error type is presented in a separate table. You can call
separate tables for track errors, conveyor errors, machine errors and general errors.
The last error to have occurred is always displayed at the top of the table. Identical errors are
cumulated in the error counter ("#E" column).
Feeders F4 3
Here you can use a variety of functions to display and fill empty tracks for linear feeders or to
display and modify inventory levels for trays and wafflepack changers.
NOTE
The following 6 menu options belong to the group of single functions.
The single functions are used to execute specific actions following fatal errors as well as to set up
and test the machine since they allow you to address the various functional modules in a defined
manner.
Execution of the single functions is described in Chapter 5 Single functions. 3
Gantry 1 F5 3
This allows you to call the Single functions for the gantry. These functions can be used, for
example, to test the revolver head functions. 3
Transport 2 F6 3
Single functions for PCB conveyor 2 (= left conveyor track in the case of twin conveyors) 3
NOTE
The single functions for Conveyor 2 cannot be called unless twin conveyors are configured.
The functions are identical to the functions for Conveyor 1. 3
136
Transport 1 F7 3
Used to call the single functions for PCB conveyor 1 (= right conveyor track in the case of twin
conveyors). These are used to test and set the functional modules for PCB conveyor as well as
to set the conveyor width. 3
NOTE
The next two menu options belong to the group of vision functions.
These functions are used to teach and test fiducials, measure components and change package
form data.
The vision functions cannot be executed at the "Operator" access level. 3
Teach fiducial F8 3
This menu item is used to call the functions for the processing of fiducials for PCB position
detection.
For a more extensive description of the procedure refer to Chapter 6 "Vision Functions". 3
Test component F9 3
This menu item is used to call the functions for the processing of package forms for component
centering.
For a more extensive description of the procedure refer to Chapter 6 "Vision Functions". 3
Start SITEST F10 3

This automatically starts the SITEST test program for machine set-up and calibration.
The user interface, together with the procedure for the execution of the functions, is described in
the separate Users Manual for the SITEST test program. 3
NOTE
The SITEST test program cannot be started from the "Operator" access level. 3
GEM F11 3
This menu item is used to call the GEM interface functions.
For a more extensive description of the procedure refer to Chapter 12. 3
NOTE
The GEM interface functions cannot be called unless the GEM interface has been configured.
At the "Operator" access level, only the function "Send and receive messages" is available. 3
137
3.3.2.3 "Options" menu
The "Options" menu is only available in the main view. This menu contains all the supplementary
functions. 3
Click the required menu item and then make the appropriate settings or selections in the corre-
sponding windows or dialog boxes.
3
138
Machine options... 3
Depending on access level, you can obtain information about the station configuration
("Operator") or activate or deactivate the displayed machine options ("Line engineer", "Service").3
Click the menu item Machine options...

The following window is displayed.
3
NOTE
Only those machine options are displayed which are configured at the current station.
The different machine options and the associated functions are described in Chapter 4 Placement
functions, Chapter 11 Station extensions /Hardware, Chapter 6 Vision functions and chapter 12
Station extensions / software. 3
Click the checkboxes corresponding to the machine options which you want to activate or
deactivate.
NOTE
At "Operator" access level, it is only possible to activate and deactivate the conveyor interface
options. 3
139
Access level... 3
It is possible to protect some user interface functions against unauthorized use by setting an
access level and allocating a password. Functions which are not accessible from a given access
level cannot be executed since the associated push-button, radio buttons and menu commands
are either inactive or not displayed. 3
You can choose between the access levels "Operator", "Line engineer" and "Service". Passwords
can be allocated for the access levels "Line engineer" and "Service". 3
Click the menu item Access level ...

The "Access level" dialog box is opened.
3
Click the radio button for the required access level.

Click the "Change password" button to the right of the access level if you want to allocate a
password or change an existing password.
The dialog box for password entry is now displayed.
3
140
Example of initial password allocation 3
Click the "New password" text box and enter the required password.
Click the "Confirm password" text box and re-enter the password.
Click the OK button to confirm the password.
3
Example for the modification of an existing password 3
Click the "Old password" text box and enter the current password.
The other two text boxes now become active.
Click the "New password" text box and enter the new password.
Click the "Confirm password" text box and re-enter the new password.
Click the OK button to confirm the password.
Click OK to close the "Access level" dialog box.
141
Control mode... 3
The control mode determines how the station is supplied with the necessary placement data. 3
Click the menu item Control mode...

The "Control mode" dialog box is displayed.
3
Control modes: 3
Stand alone (for test purposes only)
This control mode allows you to load a cluster (placement program) for test and service purposes
from the station computer using the menu item "New cluster..." .
The necessary data must be located on the station computers hard disk. 3
GEM Host
In this control mode, clusters can only be specified by the host computer.
The necessary data must be located on the host computers hard disk. 3
NOTE
This setting must be activated if you want to download cluster data from the host computer to the
station computer via the GEM interface. The procedure for doing this is described in Chapter. 12.3
Line Computer
If a cluster has been prespecified at the station, all the necessary associated data is loaded from
the line computer. The data must be located on the line computers hard disk. 3
142
NOTE
By default, clusters and set-ups should be prespecified by the line computer.
If the line computer is powered down via "Shut down" and then rebooted, all the connected
stations must also be rebooted. 3
SIPLACE Pro
When a cluster is specified at the station, all the data required for this are loaded from the com-
puter specified in the configuration of the SIPLACE Pro connection. The data must be located on
the hard disk of this computer. 3
Activate the radio button for the required control mode.

Click OK to make your settings active.
New cluster... 3
In the "Stand alone" control mode, you can load the data for a selected cluster from the station
computers hard disk.
Click the menu item New cluster...

Now enter the name of the required cluster in the displayed text box and click OK to confirm.
The cluster data is now loaded.
NOTE
The data, including the fiducial and package form data, of the last cluster successfully prespecified
by the line computer, is now saved on the station computers hard disk under the cluster name
"AKTUELL" and can be loaded by entering this name. 3
143
Software ... 3
This menu item is used to activate the test commands (test functions) for checking a variety of
machine components. 3
NOTE
This menu item can only be called from the "Service" access level. 3
DANGER
Settings for test commands and test command execution should be performed by service
engineers only. 3
Click the menu item Software ...

The following window is opened.
3
Select the tab corresponding to the required machine component and activate/deactivate the
test commands by clicking the corresponding checkboxes.
Click Accept to set the software options.
NOTE
When the station is rebooted, the software options are reset to their original settings. 3
144
Cycle mode... Alt+t 3

You use this menu item to switch the station to cycle mode (e.g. to localize errors). 3
Click the menu item Cycle mode... or press the key combination ALT+t. The "Cycle mode"
settings box is opened.
Click the On radio button to activate cycle mode or the Off radio button to deactivate it.
Click the OK button. Cycle mode is now either activated or deactivated.
NOTE
In cycle mode, you must press the Start button on the machine for every operating step. 3
Load table program 3

This menu item allows you to reload the table program into the memory of the table program
controller. You may need to do this, for example, if a machine error has resulted in the loss of the
table program. 3
NOTE
This function cannot be executed in "Operator" access mode. 3
Click the menu item "Load table program".

The program is loaded. (The loading process can take some time).
Video image > Alt+8 3

In the case of certain actions, it may be necessary to display the camera image of the MVS system
on-screen (vision analysis unit) during assembly. 3
Click the menu item Video image > or press the key combination ALT+8.
The display area is switched to the MVS system camera image in processing area 1.
Press then ESC key to restore the display area to the normal view.
145
Cluster for fine calibration... 3

In the "Stand alone" control mode, you can use this menu item to load the data of a selected
cluster (placement program) from the station computers hard disk. 3
NOTE
The data for the cluster selected in the box is designed for the assembly of special glass compo-
nents on a glass PCB. The assembled glass PCB is then used for fine calibration in conjunction
with the SITEST test program. 3
Click the menu item Cluster for fine calibration...

In the box which is now displayed, select the entry corresponding to the required cluster and
click OK to confirm your selection.
The cluster data is now loaded.
GEM-Defaults ... 3
You use this item to specify the GEM parameters which are used as the default parameters when
the station is switched on. 3
Click the menu item GEM-Defaults...

The window in which you set the GEM default parameters is now opened.
For a detailed description, refer to Chapter 12.
Fluxing ... 3
In order to apply flux for placing flip-chips on a PCB, the process data for the flip-chip must be
entered in a list and general flux application parameters must be entered on the station computer.3
Click the menu item Fluxing....

For a more extensive description of the procedure refer to 11.
PCB barcode ... 3

You use this item to display a dialog box with a list of the barcodes most recently read by the PCB
barcode reader.
This dialog box also informs you if an error occurred while reading the barcode, if the file format
is incorrect or if no data is available. 3
NOTE
You cannot call the menu item "PCB barcode ..." unless the PCB barcode reader has been
installed in the machine and has been activated in the machine options. 3
Click the menu item PCB barcode ...

The "PCB barcode" dialog box is opened.
146
Click the Delete list button if you want to delete all the entries in the list.
Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
NOTE
The current status of barcode operation is displayed below the "Delete list" button. Barcode
operation is activated or deactivated in the LC program. 3
3.3.2.4 "Language" menu
You can use the "Language" menu to select between the language versions which are integrated
in the SC software.
You can chose between the languages "German", "English", "French", "Italian", "Spanish", "Portu-
guese", "Hungarian", "Czech", "Russian", "Simplified Chinese", "Traditional Chinese", "Korean"
and "Japanese". 3
Click the menu item corresponding to the required language.

The user interface texts are displayed in the selected language.
147
3.3.2.5 "Help" menu
This menu gives you access to all the functions required to call the help system and general infor-
mation concerning the station computer or the software. 3
Content Ctrl+F1 3
This calls on-line help. 3
Help Alt+F1 3
Help information relating to the current view is displayed. 3
Use help 3
Information on how to use Help is displayed. 3
Info ... 3
This displays information on the currently installed software version (SC , MC, WPC, GEM
version) together with general information on the station computer. 3
NOTE
You can use the key combination CTRL+F1 to call the on-line Help function from within any view
in the user interface.
You can use the key combination Alt+F1 to call up help on the current view and the key combi-
nation Shift+F1 to access help on menu items, icons and buttons.
For a detailed description of the functions in the Help menu, refer to Chapter 9. 3
Click the required menu item in the "Help" menu or press the corresponding key combination.
3
148
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 4 Placement functions
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 4.1 Setup display
4 Placement functions
4.1 Setup display
If the cluster has been specified with its corresponding setup, then the setup of each of the 4
locations can be displayed in this view.
4
1 2 3 4
Fig. 4.1 - 1 Setup location 1 view
Key to Fig. 4.1 - 1
(1) Display setup for location 1
149
4 Placement functions SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
4.1 Setup display Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
4.1.1 "Setup location x" view
Click on the icon in the toolbar in the Main view.

The user interface switches to the "Setup location x" view.
The setup data for the current location is presented in the display area in tabular form.
NOTE
The view is the same for each location. 4
4.1.1.1 Meaning of the entries in the setup table
Loc.
The number of the location whose setup is to be displayed is entered in this column. (See
Chapter 3, Fig. 3.1 - 2 for the position of the locations)
Track
The number of the track on which the corresponding feeder or waffle pack tray is located is
entered here.
Div.
The number of the feeder division from which the component in the corresponding feeder is to
be picked up, or the number of the waffle pack tray compartment from which the component is
picked up is entered in this column.
Tray
The number of the level in the waffle pack tray from which the component is picked up is en-
tered in this column.
(Only valid for automatic placement machines with wafflepack changers).
CmpName
The name of the corresponding component is entered in this column.
GF no.
The number of the package form for the corresponding component is entered here.
Track barc.
The track barcode assigned to the corresponding track is entered in this column.
150
CO-BC
This column shows whether or not a component barcode has been specified for the corre-
sponding component in the setup using the "***" or "-" symbol.
*** A barcode is specified for the component.

The "Comp. verification with barcode ..." button is active when you click
on these lines in the table (see Section 4.1.2). 4
- No barcode is specified for the component.

(The "Comp. verification with barcode ..." button is not active). 4
4.1.2 Component verification with barcode
You prevent a track from being refilled with the wrong components with this function when refilling
components with a specified component barcode.
The operator reads the track barcode and then the component barcode with the barcode reader
(see Chapter 12) . The two barcode assignments are compared with the help of the SC software.
Incorrect assignments are not accepted. 4
Requirements
The barcode reader must be connected to the station computer.
The "Track BC" option must be activated on the line computer (in the configuration editor) for
the corresponding station. (Only then will the "Component verification with barcode" option be
displayed in the machine options on the station computer).
The barcodes for the corresponding components must have been entered on the line computer
with the help of the component editor.
(A maximum of 6 different barcodes can be entered for a component at the present time).
The "Component verification with barcode" option must be active in the machine options.
Procedure
Open th e Options menu in the Main view and click on the Machine options ... menu option.
The "Machine options" window is opened (see Chapter 3).
Activate the checkbox for "Component verification with barcode".
Click on Apply. The window closes.
Switch the user interface to the "Setup location x" view.
Click on the icon in the toolbar for the desired location (see Fig. 4.1 - 1).
151
Select the entry in the setup table for the track for which you want to execute a component ver-
ification (or read the track barcode on the barcode bar using the barcode reader). The line se-
lected is highlighted in light blue in the table.
Click on the Comp. verification with barcode ... button
The following window is opened. The data for the selected track is displayed so you can check
the data.
4
Fig. 4.1 - 2 "Component verification with barcode" window
Read the component barcode in from the corresponding component reel with the
barcode reader. The barcode read in is displayed in the "Barcode:" line (see Section 4.1.2.1).
NOTE
If the component barcode cannot be read in, then enter it manually. The procedure is
described in Section 4.1.2.1. 4
152
4.1.2.1 Acceptable barcodes
The list of barcodes (max. of 6) that are known for the component in the selected track is displayed
with this function. 4
Click on the Acceptable barcodes button

The following selection box is opened.
4
Click on the Close button. The selection box is closed.

The barcode read in using the barcode reader is compared to the possible barcodes.
The positions hidden due to the filter (marked by a ) will not be used for the comparison.
The results of the barcode comparison will be displayed in the display field of the "Component
verification with barcode" window (see the following examples).
The barcodes match.

4
The barcodes do not match.

4
153
4.1.2.2 Manual input of the component barcodes
Click on the Manual input button to enter the barcode by hand.

The following input box is opened.
Enter the barcode in the input field and close the input box using OK.
The barcode comparison is started.
The results of the barcode comparison will be displayed in the display field of the "Component
verification with barcode" window (see Section 4.1.2.1).
The further procedure is described in Section 4.1.2.1.
154
4.1.2.3 Refilling an empty track with "Refill track"
As soon as a feeder in an empty track has been refilled with components, this fact must be con-
firmed so that the placement head can access this track again. This is done with the help of the
"Refill track" function. 4
Procedure
The track barcode of the corresponding track is read in.

The component barcode of the corresponding component reel is read in.
The "Refill track" button is active when the barcodes match (see the following figure).
4
Fig. 4.1 - 3 "Component verification with barcode" window, matching barcodes
If the feeder in the current track is full, then click on the Refill track button to confirm this or
read in the return barcode on the barcode bar.
Close the window with Close.
4
155
4.2 Error display Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
4.2 Error display
The errors are listed in tabular form according to their type, and each type has its own view con-
taining its list of errors.
4

The user interface switches to the error display (see Fig. 4.2 - 1, Track errors, for example). All
errors of the current error type that have occurred are displayed in the display area.
If you want to switch the display area to a different type of error, then click on the icon for the
desired error type in the toolbar.
The display area switches to the selected error type.
4
Error type icon
Track error
Machine error
Transport error
General error
NOTE
The error that occurred last is always displayed in the top position in the table.
The error counter is incremented whenever the same error arises ("#E" column).
Information and an error diagnostics can be called up for every error displayed
(see Section 4.2.1 for this procedure). 4
156
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 4.2 Error display
4.2.1 Functions
The following functions described below can be executed by selecting the corresponding buttons
in the views for the corresponding error type. 4
Delete all 4
All entries in the table for the error type currently displayed are deleted with this function. 4
Click on the Delete all button

The error table is emptied.
Error information 4
This starts a help system that displays information on the possible causes of error for the selected
error as well as corrective measures. 4
Select the entry in the table for the error for which you require additional information. The line
selected is highlighted in light blue in the table. The "Error information" button is now active
(see Fig. 4.2 - 1, for example).
Click on the Error information button
The help system window is opened.
The further procedure is described in Chapter 8 "Error information".
Diagnostics 4
This starts the diagnostics system. You use this system to attempt to recognize the cause of the
current error and to correct this error together with the operator. 4
Select the entry in the table for the error for which you want to start the error diagnostics.
Click on the Diagnostics button.
The user interface switches to the Main view of the diagnostics system.
NOTE
The diagnostics system is not available in the current software version. 4
157
4.2.2 "Track errors" view
Fig. 4.2 - 1 "Track errors" view
158
4.2.2.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "Track errors"
No
The error number of the corresponding error is entered in this column.
CmpName
The name of the component for which the error has occurred is entered here.
Loc.
The number of the location for which the corresponding component is set up is entered in this
column.
Tr D T
The number of the track and of the feeder division for the corresponding component or the
number of the waffle pack tray compartment and the level in the waffle pack changer is entered
here.
Seg
The number of the segment that was used to insert the component is entered here.
#E
This column displays how often the corresponding error has occurred until now.
Text
The error that has occurred is described in this column.
159
4.2.3 "Machine errors" view
Fig. 4.2 - 2 "Machine errors" view
4.2.3.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "Machine errors"
No
Error number of the corresponding error
Seg
Number of the segment (see also Section 4.2.2.1)
DEV
Short description of the sender of the error
(e.g. "MC1" of an error has occurred on gantry 1)
#E
Error counter (see also Section 4.2.2.1)
Text
Description of the corresponding error
160
4.2.4 "Transport errors" view

4
Fig. 4.2 - 3 "Transport errors" view
4.2.4.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "Transport errors"
No
Error number of the corresponding error.
Transp
The number of the transport in which the error has occurred is entered here.
1 = Transport 1 (Standard transport or right transport track for dual transports)
2 = Transport 2 (Left transport track for dual transports)
DEV
#E
Error counter (see also Section 4.2.2.1).
Text
Description of the corresponding error.
161
4.2.5 "General errors" view
Fig. 4.2 - 4 "General errors" view
4.2.5.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for "General errors"
No
Error number of the corresponding error.
Info1 / Info 2
These are only intended for internal use by Siemens.
DEV
#E
Error counter (see also Section 4.2.2.1.
Text
Description of the corresponding error.
162
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 4.3 Feeders
4.3 Feeders

The user interface switches to one of the views described in the following sections.
NOTE
When the "Feeders" menu function is called for the first time after starting the SC software, then
the "Empty tracks" view is displayed first (see Fig. 4.3 - 1). 4
4.3.1 "Empty tracks" view
If the placement head cannot pick a component from a track after 3 attempts, then it will not use
this track again. This track is added to the "Empty tracks" list.
As soon as the feeders or waffle pack trays in the empty tracks are filled with components, this
fact must be confirmed so that the placement head can access these tracks again. This is done
by refilling the empty tracks using the "Refill track" function. You can refill individual tracks or all
tracks of a location at the same time when refilling empty tracks with "Refill track". 4
NOTE
The manual refilling of tracks that contain components with specified component barcodes is only
possible using "Refill track" when the "Component verification with barcode" option in the machine
options is not active.
If the "Component verification with barcode" option is active, then a corresponding note is dis-
played instead of the buttons for locations 1 through 4 (see Fig. 4.3 - 2). 4
Click on the icon, if necessary.

The "Empty tracks" view is displayed (see Fig. 4.3 - 1).
4
163
4.3 Feeders Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 4.3 - 1 "Empty tracks" view
Key to Fig. 4.3 - 1
(1) "Empty tracks" view

(2) "Omit components" view
(3) "Trays" view
(4) "Linear feeder" view
(5) "Waffle pack changer" view
4
164
Fig. 4.3 - 2 "Empty tracks" view when the "Component verification with barcode" option is active
4.3.1.1 Meaning of the entries in the table "Empty tracks"
Loc.
Number of the location whose track is "empty".
Tr D T
Number of the "empty" track and of the feeder division or number of the waffle pack tray com-
partment and the level in the waffle pack changer for the corresponding component
CmpName
Name of the corresponding component.
Track barc.
The track barcode assigned to the corresponding track is entered in this column.
165
CO-BC
This column displays whether or not a component barcode is specified for the corresponding
component in the setup using the "***" or "-" symbol.
NOTE
If the "-" character is entered in this column, then this means that no barcode is specified for
the corresponding component. You can therefore manually refill the corresponding track us-
ing "Refill tracks" even if the "Component verification with barcode" option is active (see Sec-
tion 4.3.1.5). 4
4.3.1.2 Functions in the "Empty tracks" view
Location 1 4
Confirms that all tracks for location 1 are full. 4
Location 2 4
Selected track 4
Confirms that the feeder or waffle pack tray on the selected track for location 1 or 2 is full. 4
Location 3 4
Location 4 4
Selected track 4
Confirms that the feeder on the selected track for location 3 or 4 is full. 4
166
4.3.1.3 "Refilling" empty tracks
Select the entry in the table or the track that is to be confirmed as being "refilled". The line se-
lected is highlighted in light blue in the table and the "Selected track" button is active.
Click on the Selected track button when the feeder or waffle pack tray in this track has been
refilled with components.
The track is then considered full and the entry is deleted from the list of empty tracks.
The "Selected track" button is not active thereafter.
4.3.1.4 Refilling all empty tracks of a location
Click on the button for the location that is to be confirmed as being "refilled", e.g. Location 1.
All tracks of this location are then considered refilled and the corresponding entries for the
empty tracks in this location are deleted from the list of empty tracks.
The button for the location is not active thereafter.
4.3.1.5 Refilling empty track when the "Component verification with barcode" option
is active
When the "Component verification with barcode" option is active, then empty tracks can normally
only be confirmed as having been "refilled" in the manner described in Section 4.3.1.5.
The tracks containing components without component barcodes are an exception. You can man-
ually "refill" here even if the "Component verification with barcode" option is active. 4
Select the entry in the table (see Fig. 4.3 - 2) for an empty track that contains components with-
out barcodes (see the note on page 4 - 166).
The "Selected track" button is active.
Click on the Selected track button when the feeder or waffle pack tray in this track has been
refilled.
The "Selected track" button is not active thereafter.
167
4.3.2 "Omit components" view
With the help of the "Omit components" function in this view, you can omit specific components
from selected tracks when inserting components in the current PCB.
This is necessary, for example, when components have not been correctly inserted in the first PCB
of a new cluster. The components placed under "Omit components" are then ignored in all tracks
containing these components when inserting components into the current PCB. The incompletely
populated PCBs are then transported in the output conveyor and must be removed by hand.
After the PCB has been removed, the "Omit components" setting is reset for the components not
inserted, and they will then be used to populate the next PCB. 4
Click on the icon.

The "Omit components" view is displayed (see Fig. 4.3 - 3).
4
Fig. 4.3 - 3 "Omit components" view
NOTE
The "Omit components" function cannot be executed in the "Operator" access level. 4
168
4.3.2.1 Meaning of the entries in the tables of the "Omit components" view
Loc.
Number of the location
Tr D T
Number of the track and of the feeder division or the number of the waffle pack tray compart-
ment and the level in the waffle pack changer
CmpName
Name of the component
GF no.
Number of the package form
4.3.2.2 Omit component
Select the entry for the component that is to be omitted in the "Empty tracks" table. The line
selected is highlighted in light blue in the table.
The "Omit components" button is active.
Click on the Omit components button. The following selection box is opened.
4
Confirm the query with Yes.

The entries for all tracks whose feeders or waffle pack trays contain the components that are
not to be used to populate the current PCB are displayed in the "Omitted components with al-
ternate tracks:" table.
4
169
4.3.3 "Trays" view
The "Update inventory levels" function can be used to update the display of the inventory levels
for all waffle pack trays in this view as required. 4
NOTE
Display of the inventory levels is not updated automatically during placement. 4
When waffle pack trays have been refilled with components, it is possible to enter the number of
components in each waffle pack tray which has been refilled. It is not possible to enter a value
higher than the predefined maximum value. 4
Click on the icon.

The "Trays" view appears (see Fig. 4.3 - 4).
4
Fig. 4.3 - 4 "Trays" view
170
4.3.3.1 Updating inventory levels
Click on the Update inventory levels button.

The current inventory level for each waffle pack tray is shown in the table.
4.3.3.2 Entering new inventory levels
After a waffle pack tray has been refilled with components, choose the entry in the table for the
waffle pack tray which has been refilled.
The selected line is shown in light blue in the table.
The "New inventory level..." button is activated.
Click on the New inventory level... button.
The following dialog box appears.
4
In the text box, enter the actual number of components contained in the waffle pack tray and
confirm your entry with OK.
The dialog box closes and the new inventory level is shown in the table for the selected waffle
pack tray.
4
171
4.3.4 "Linear feeder" view
When refilling the linear feeders with components, the operator must select the correct component
in the Setup view to refill an empty track (see Section 4.1.1). The track with the corresponding lin-
ear feeder must be vibrated so that the new components move to the front after the tray has been
inserted. 4
Click on the icon.

The "Linear feeder" view is displayed (see Fig. 4.3 - 5).
4
Fig. 4.3 - 5 "Linear feeder" view
172
4.3.4.1 Meaning of the entries in the table for the linear feeder
Loc.
Number of the location
Track
Number of the track
Div.
Number of the feeder division
Tray
This column is not relevant for the linear feeder table.
CmpName
Name of the component
Vibrate
If the "<==" symbol is displayed in this column, then this means that the linear feeder on the
corresponding track is currently being vibrated.
4.3.4.2 Vibrate track with linear feeder
Select the entry in the table for the track with the linear feeder that has been refilled and that
is to be vibrated now.
The selected line is highlighted in light blue in the table. The "Vibrate on" button is active.
Click on the Vibrate on button.
The components used to refill the track are vibrated to the front.
The "Vibrate off" button is active.
Click on the Vibrate off button when the vibrating is to be switched off.
Vibration stops.
NOTE
If the user interface is switched to a different view, then vibration will also stop. 4
173
4.3.5 "Wafflepack Changer" view
This view contains all the functions needed for refilling and making available waffle pack trays. 4
Click on the icon.

The "Wafflepack Changer" view is displayed (see Fig. 4.3 - 6).
4
Fig. 4.3 - 6 "Wafflepack Changer" view
4.3.5.1 Go to refill position
To allow the trays in the waffle pack changer to be refilled, they must be moved to the refill position.
This can be done during placement. If, however, the placement head attempts to access compo-
nents from one of these waffle pack trays, placement is interrupted until the refill position has been
quit. This is indicated by an appropriate status message. 4
Activate the option button corresponding to the location of the waffle pack changer.
Click on the Go to refill position button.
The waffle pack changer moves all waffle pack trays to the refill position.
174
4.3.5.2 Quit refill position
Click on the Quit refill position button.

The waffle pack trays specified in the setup are moved to, checked and aligned.
4.3.5.3 WPC refilled
As soon as the waffle pack trays which have been identified as being "empty" have been refilled
with components, this must be confirmed, so that the placement head can again access these
trays. This is done using the "WPC refilled" function. 4
Click on the WPC refilled button.

This confirms that the waffle pack trays have been refilled.
All the waffle pack trays which have been identified as being "empty" are now regarded as
"full". Placement continues with components from these waffle pack trays.
4.3.5.4 WPC reference run
This function causes the lift of the waffle pack changer to carry out a reference run. 4
NOTE
The waffle pack changer must not be in the refill position when this function is carried out. 4
Click on the Stop processing PCB function in the Mode menu.

The current placement operation is halted.
Click on the WPC reference run button.
First, any waffle pack tray which has been moved out will be returned to its level. The reference
run is then performed.
4.3.5.5 Transport position
To allow the waffle pack changer to be transported safely, the lift of the waffle pack changer must
be moved to a defined transport position. 4
NOTE
Click on the Stop processing PCB function in the Mode menu.

The current placement operation is halted.
Click on the Transport position button.
The lift moves to the defined safety/transport position.
175
4.3.5.6 Feed tray
This allows you to define the level containing the waffle pack tray to be made available for place-
ment. 4
NOTE
Click on the Feed tray button.

The following dialog box is displayed.
4
In the text box, enter the number of the required level and confirm your entry with OK. The waf-
fle pack changer moves the waffle pack tray from the selected level to the pick-up position.
NOTE
If a waffle pack tray is already in the pick-up position, it is first moved to its defined level. 4
176
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 5 Single functions
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 5.1 General comments
5 Single functions
5.1 General comments
Gantry functions and transport functions are known as single functions. They are used to set up
and test the machines and to carry out particular actions following a machine shutdown caused
by an error.
Single functions can be used to control various function modules in a defined manner.
WARNING
Single functions may only be executed by appropriately qualified and trained personnel, since
improper handling can result in personal injury/damage to the machine.
177
5 Single functions SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
5.2 Single functions, gantry Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
5.2 Single functions, gantry
NOTE
The travel functions of the x or y axis can only be carried out when the machine cover is closed.
To execute this function, press the start button.
As a rule, the gantry only travel slowly. 5
Click on the icon in the toolbar in the Main view (or choose the option SF gantry 1
from the View menu).
The user interface is switched to the "Revolver head functions" view (see Fig. 5.2 - 1).
5.2.1 "Revolver head functions" view
The revolver head functions can be used to control all functions relating to the Collect&Place
head. 5
NOTE
The Collect&Place head functions can be executed with the machine cover open. To do this the
key-operated switch must be turned to position I. 5
178
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 5.2 Single functions, gantry
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fig. 5.2 - 1 "Revolver head functions" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head)
Key to Fig. 5.2 - 1
(1) Gantry functions

(2) Revolver head functions
(3) IC-head functions
(4) Vacuum test, revolver head
(5) Nozzle offset, revolver head
(6) Nozzle configuration, revolver head
(7) Nozzle changer configuration, revolver head
(8) Nozzle changer configuration IC-head
(9) Fluxer head functions
NOTE
The current position of the Collect&Place head segment is shown by the graphic above the "Star in
position 1" button. 5
179
5.2.1.1 Functions
In the "Revolver head functions" view, the functions described below are available to help you test
the Collect&Place head. 5
Vacuum test in the pick-up position

Vacuum test in the reject position
Vacuum test in the holding circuit
Revolver head functions
The functions are triggered by clicking the appropriate button. 5
Pick-up circuit - Forced air on/off 5

When this function is activated, the forced air to the nozzle in the pick-up position is either
switched on or off.
In the "Pick-up circuit" area, click the Forced air on/off button.
This switches the forced air on or off.
Pick-up circuit - Vacuum on/off 5

When this function is activated, the vacuum at the nozzle in the pick-up position is either
switched on or off.
In the "Pick-up circuit" area, click the Vacuum on/off button.
This switches the vacuum on or off.
Pick-up circuit - Measure forced air 5

When this function is activated, forced air at the pick-up position is measured.
Switch on the forced air (using the "Forced air on/off" function in the "Pick-up circuit" area).
Click the Measure forced air button in the "Pick-up circuit" area.
The forced air is measured and the result displayed in [mbar] above the button.
NOTE
The value displayed after the measurement is taken does not correspond to the actual values at
the nozzle.
When calibrating the machine, you must use a manometer to establish the values (see Adjustment
instructions or the Service Manual). 5
Pick-up circuit - Measure vacuum 5

When this function is activated, vacuum at the pick-up position is measured.
Switch on the vacuum (using the "Vacuum on/off" function in the "Pick-up circuit" area).
Click the Measure Vacuum button in the "Pick-up circuit" area.
The vacuum is measured and the result displayed in [mbar] above the button.
180
Reject circuit - Forced air on/off 5

When this function is activated, the forced air at the nozzle in the reject position is switched on or
off.
Click the Forced air on/off button in the "Reject circuit" area.
The forced air is switched on or off.
Reject circuit - Vacuum on/off 5

When this function is activated, the vacuum to the nozzle in the reject position is switched on or
off.
Click the Vacuum on/off button in the "Reject circuit" area.
The vacuum is switched on or off.
Head reference run 5

This function is used to start a head reference run of all the head axes, or in other words, all head
axes travel to their origin. The gantry axes travel over the reject container and discard compo-
nents in a defined manner.
Click the Head reference run button.
The head axes execute a head reference run.
Holding circuit - Measure vacuum 5

When this function is activated, the vacuum at the nozzle in the holding circuit is measured.
Click the Measure vacuum button in the "Holding circuit" area.
The vacuum is measured and the result displayed in [mbar] above the button.
Star in position 1 5
This function is used to bring the Collect&Place head into a defined starting position.
Click the Star in position 1 button.
The Collect&Place head is moved round so that segment 1 is in the pick up and placement
position (lowest position). In addition the Collect&Place head and the z-axis perform a refer-
ence run.
RV head indexing 5
This function is used to move the Collect&Place head. Each time you click the button the Col-
lect&Place head is moved round by one segment.
Click the RV head indexing button.
The Collect&Place head is moved by one segment.
The current positions of the segments is displayed in the graphic.
181
Actuate DP-axis 5
When this function is activated, the D-axis is rotated by 900.

Click the Actuate DP-axis button.
The nozzle in the D-axis is rotated by 900 once.
5.2.2 "IC-head functions" view
The IC-head functions can be used to control all functions relating to the IC-head. 5
NOTE
The IC-head functions can be executed with the machine cover open. To do this the key-operated
switch must be turned to position I. 5
In the current view for the single functions for Gantry, click the symbol .
The user interface is switched to the "IC-head functions" view (see Fig. 5.2 - 2).
5
Fig. 5.2 - 2 "IC-head functions" view
182
5.2.2.1 Functions
In the "IC-head functions" view, the functions described below are available to help you test the
Pick&Place head. 5
Vacuum test
Return nozzle
Pick up nozzle
IC-head functions
The functions are triggered by clicking the appropriate button. 5
Vacuum/offset test 5
This function carries out a vacuum test and an offset test for the nozzle currently on the IC head.5
Click on the Vacuum test button.

The vacuum and the height of the current nozzle are tested.
The result of the vacuum test is displayed.
Return 5
This function returns the nozzle currently on the IC head to the nozzle changer. The number of the
current nozzle is displayed. 5
Click on the Return button.

The nozzle is returned to the nozzle changer.
Pick up... 5
This function picks up a specific nozzle from the nozzle changer. 5
Click the Pick up... button.

The dialog box shown below is displayed.
5
183
In the text box, enter the number of the required nozzle and confirm your entry with OK. The
corresponding nozzle is picked up from the nozzle changer.
NOTE
If a different nozzle is still on the IC head, this is first automatically returned to the nozzle changer.5
Head reference run 5

This function starts a reference run for the z and d axes, i.e. they both move to their reference
points. 5
Click on the Head reference run button.

The axes perform a reference run.
Turn D-axis 5
This function is used to test the d-axis. 5
Click on the Turn D-axis button.

The D-axis is turned once through 900.
Unclamp 5
This function unclamps the z-axis. All other functions are locked while the z axis is unclamped. 5
Click the Unclamp button.

The z-axis is unclamped and a dialog box opens indicating this status.
Click on OK in the dialog box when the axis is to be clamped again.
Clamping is reactivated and the dialog box is closed. All functions are available again.
On/Off ("Vacuum" field) 5

This function allows the vacuum at the nozzle to be checked by switching it on and off. 5
Click on the On or Off button in the "Vacuum" field.

The vacuum is switched on or off.
On/Off ("Forced air" field) 5

This function allows the forced air at the nozzle to be checked by switching it on and off. 5
Click on the On or Off button in the "Forced air" field.

The forced air is switched on or off.
5
184
5.2.3 "Gantry functions" view
The user interface is switched to the "Gantry functions" view (see Fig. 5.2 - 3).
5
Fig. 5.2 - 3 "Gantry functions" view
NOTE
All travel functions of the main axes (x and y) must be started using the start button.
A message appears in the status field on the view which asks you to "Please press the start but-
ton".
If the machine covers are not closed, the message "Close cover" will appear in the status field. 5
185
5.2.3.1 Functions
In the "Gantry functions" view the following functions are available to test the gantry.
The required function is triggered by clicking on the corresponding button. 5
Go to set-up position 5
This function is used to check the set-up position of the gantry.
When the gantry is in the set-up position, it is possible to unload and retool the feeders.
Click the Go to set-up position button and press the start button as often as you are asked to.
The gantry moves (from the feeder area) into the set-up position.
Go to service position 5
This function is used to check the service position of the gantry.
When the gantry is in the service position, it is possible to carry out work on the placement head
and on other parts of the gantry.
Click the Go to service posn button and press the start button as often as you are asked to.
The gantry moves into the service position.
Go to waiting position 5
This function is used to check the waiting position of the gantry.
When the gantry is not required for placement, it moves to the waiting position.
Click the Go to waiting posn button and press the start button as often as you are asked to.
The gantry moves into the waiting position.
Go to zero pulse 5
This function is used to check the zero pulse of the gantry.
The zero pulse is the origin of the gantry to which the counting procedures of the incremental
encoder refer. For a reference run, the gantry moves to this origin.
Click the Go to zero pulse button and press the start button as often as you are asked to.
The gantry moves to the origin of the x and y axes.
Gantry reference run 5

This function is used to perform a reference run with the x and y axes of the active gantry. The
axes move to the origin to determine their position in the machine.
Click the Gantry reference run button and press the start button as often as you are asked to.
The gantry performs a reference run.
186
5.2.4 "Vacuum test" view
The user interface is switched to the "Vacuum test" view (see Fig. 5.2 - 4).
5
Fig. 5.2 - 4 "Vacuum test" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head)
187
5.2.4.1 Functions
In the "Vacuum test" view only the "Measure" button is available. This is used to start the vacuum
test for all nozzles.
Measure 5
This function is used to start a head reference run. This measures the vacuum values in the open
and closed pick-up positions for each of the nozzles.
Click the Measure button.

The vacuum calculation procedure is started.
The calculated vacuum values for each of the nozzles are displayed in two columns, "Pick-up
open (mbar)" and "Pick-up closed (mbar)". You can use these values to see, for example,
whether a nozzle on a particular segment is dirty.
188
5.2.5 "Nozzle offset" view
The user interface is switched to the "Nozzle offset" view (see Fig. 5.2 - 5).
5
Fig. 5.2 - 5 "Nozzle offset" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head)
189
5.2.5.1 Functions
In the "Nozzle offset" view only the "Measure" button is available. This is used to start a evalua-
tion of the nozzle height for all nozzles.
Measure 5
When this function is activated, after a vacuum check the gantry moves the placement head to a
defined position above the board conveyor. The z-axis is lowered until the nozzle touches the con-
veyor, the procedure is then repeated for each nozzle. In this way, you can measure the height of
each nozzle.
The gantry then returns to its starting position. 5
Click the Measure button.

This starts the procedure used to measure nozzle height.
The values determined are displayed in the column "Offset (1/100 mm)" for each of the noz-
zles. These values can, for example, be used to determine whether the nozzle on a particular
segment broken.
190
5.2.6 "Nozzle configuration revolver head" view
The user interface is switched to the "Nozzle configuration revolver head" view (see
Fig. 5.2 - 6).
5
1 2
Fig. 5.2 - 6 "Nozzle configuration revolver head" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head)
Key to Fig. 5.2 - 6
(1) The entry for the segment currently located in the changeover position is highlighted in light
blue.
(2) The arrow points to the number of the segment which is in the changeover position.
5.2.6.1 Functions
The "Nozzle configuration revolver head" view provides functions which allow you to change the
nozzle configuration and to then confirm that this change has been made. The required function
is carried out by clicking on the appropriate button. 5
191
NOTE
The functions "Return", "Pick up", "Remove" and "Replace" can only be carried out if a nozzle
changer is installed and configured in the machine options.
Settings: 5
5
One nozzle
If this radio button is activated, the functions "Return", "Pick up", "Remove", and "Replace" can
only be carried out for one selected nozzle. When you call one of these functions a dialog box ap-
pears. You can enter the number of the segment with the required nozzle.
By default the box already contains the number of the segment currently in the changeover posi-
tion (marked by an arrow, see Fig. 5.2 - 6). 5
Activate the One nozzle radio button.

Click the button for the required function.
The dialog box shown below is then displayed.
5
In the entry field, enter the number of the required segment, and confirm with OK. The function
is then carried out for the selected nozzle.
5
All nozzles
If this radio button is activated, the selected function i.e."Return", "Pick up" or "Remove" is carried
out for all nozzles on the Collect&Place head. 5
Activate the All nozzles radio button.

Click the button for the required function.
The function is carried out for all functions on the Collect&Place head.
192
Return 5
When this function is activated, the nozzles are returned to the correct magazine of the nozzle
changer (or the nozzle on the selected segment is returned to its magazine).
Click the Return button.
If the "All nozzles" radio button is activated, the function is carried out immediately.
If the "One nozzle" radio button is activated, a dialog box is opened for you to enter the number
of the required segment (see page 5 - 192).
Remove 5
When this function is activated, all nozzles or the nozzle on the specified segment are discarded
into the reject container.
Click the Remove button.
Pick up 5
When this function is activated, nozzles specified for current use are picked up from their respec-
tive magazines (or a nozzle is picked up for the specified segment).
Click the Pick up button.
Replace 5
This function is used to replace the nozzle on the specified segment with one of the same type.
Click the Replace button.
A dialog box opens to allow you to enter the segment number.
(The rest of the procedure is described on page 5 - 192).
RV head indexing 5
This function is used to move the Collect&Place head.
Click the RV head indexing button.
The Collect&Place head is moved on one segment.
The current positions of the segments are shown in the graphic.
193
Confirm 5
This function allows you to confirm that a nozzle has been changed (without nozzle changer).
To change a nozzle without a nozzle changer you must perform the operation by hand. You can
only change the nozzle on one segment at a time because the segment must be in the
changeover position. By turning the head in a clockwise fashion you can bring each segment in
turn to the changeover position.
5
In the table, find the segment for which the nozzle is to be changed.
Click the RV head indexing button as often as required to bring the required segment round
until it is displayed in the changeover position (marked with an arrow).
The table entry for this segment is now highlighted in light blue (see Fig. 5.2 - 6).
Remove the nozzle by hand and replace it with a nozzle of the type shown in the "Preset" col-
umn.
Click the Confirm button.
The change is confirmed. The entries in the columns "Actual" and "Preset" agree. The new
nozzle configuration is saved to the machine data.
5
194
5.2.7 "Nozzle changer configuration revolver head" view
In the current view for the single function for Gantry, click the symbol .
NOTE
The nozzle changer must be installed and configured in the machine options. When calling
this view the nozzles on the placement head are returned to the nozzle changer. 5
The user interface is switched to the "Nozzle changer configuration revolver head" view (see
Fig. 5.2 - 7). 5
Fig. 5.2 - 7 "Nozzle changer configuration revolver head" view (12-nozzle Collect&Place head)
195
5.2.7.1 General comments
In the "Nozzle changer configuration revolver head" view there are functions which allow you to
adjust and confirm the nozzle configuration for the individual magazines in the nozzle changer.
Click on the appropriate button to carry out the required function.
The nozzle changer configuration is displayed in the table in the display.
5
Conditions for changing the set-up of the nozzle changer
Remember the following points when changing the set-up: 5
The magazines may only be filled when all nozzles on the Collect&Place head have been re-
turned to their magazines.
Magazines may only contain nozzles of one type.
The maximum number of nozzles per magazine is 12.
The maximum number of magazines on a nozzle changer is 7.
The magazines must be filled outside the machine and must only ever be changed in their en-
tirety.
To remove and load nozzles you must open the lock. Once you have finished, you must then
close the lock again.
Meaning of the entries in the table in the display
Magazine
Number of the magazine
Number
Number of nozzles in the magazine
Actual
Type of nozzles currently in the magazine
Preset
If the type of nozzle currently in the magazine is not the same as shown in this column, then it
is to be changed
To change
An arrow ( <== ) in this column indicates that the nozzle type currently in the magazine ("Ac-
tual" column) must be changed for the nozzle type shown in the "Preset" column.
196
5.2.7.2 Functions
Lock. op./close 5
To be able to fill the magazine manually, you must use this function to open the lock (locking
plate) on the nozzle changer and close it afterwards.
Click the Lock. op./close button.

The magazine locking plate is opened.
The magazine locking plate is closed again.
Refill 5
This function allows you to refill the magazine with new nozzles of the type already in use (or in
other words, the set-up itself is not changed).
During placement operation it may be necessary to refill individual magazines with nozzles. You
must fill the magazine with 12 nozzles and these must be of the same type that were originally
contained in the magazine. 5
The nozzle types shown in the columns "Actual" and "Preset" of the table will agree.
The number of nozzles in the magazine is shown in the "Number" column. 5
Select the entry corresponding to the magazine you want to fill with nozzles. This line is then
highlighted in light blue.
Fill the magazine with the same type of nozzle it originally contained.
NOTE
The magazines must always be completely refilled (12 nozzles of the same type for each
magazine). 5
Click the Lock. op./close button again.

Click the Refill button.
The entry in the "Number" column is updated and now shows the new number of nozzles in
the magazine.
197
Confirm magaz. 5
This function is used to confirm that an individual magazine has been filled with a new nozzle
type.
When changing the set-up of a machine it may be necessary to change the type of nozzle in
some of the magazines. To do this, the current nozzle configuration (Actual) and the nozzle con-
figuration for the new set-up (Preset) is shown in the table for each of magazine. When you
change the nozzle type from the "Actual" to "Preset" type, you must confirm this for each maga-
zine separately.
Click the entry in the table which corresponds to the magazine for which you must change the
nozzle type. The line is now highlighted in light blue.
Replace all the nozzles in this magazine with the nozzle type shown in the "Preset" column.
Click the Lock. op./close button again.
Click the Confirm magaz. button.
The change of is now confirmed. In the table, the arrow ( <== ) is no longer displayed next to
the entry for this magazine.
5
198
5.2.8 "Nozzle changer configuration IC-head" view
NOTE
The nozzle changer must be installed and configured in the machine options. When calling
this menu the nozzles on the placement head are returned to the nozzle changer. 5
The user interface is switched to the "Nozzle changer configuration IC-head" view (see
Fig. 5.2 - 8). 5
Fig. 5.2 - 8 "Nozzle changer configuration IC-head" view
199
The "Nozzle changer configuration IC head" view only provides the function for confirming the
nozzle configuration for the individual nozzle holders in the nozzle changer.
Click on the appropriate button to carry out the required function.
The nozzle changer configuration is displayed in the table in the display.
5
Conditions for changing the set-up of the nozzle changer
Remember the following points when changing the set-up: 5
Each of the nozzle holders can be set up with different nozzle types.
The maximum number of nozzles per magazine is 5.
The maximum number of magazines on a nozzle changer is 4.
Meaning of the entries in the table in the display
Garage
Number of the nozzle holder
Actual
Type of nozzles currently in the nozzle holder
Preset
If the type of nozzle currently in the nozzle holder is not the same as shown in this column, then
it is to be changed
To change
An arrow ( <== ) in this column indicates that the nozzle type currently in the nozzle holder
("Actual" column) must be changed for the nozzle type shown in the "Preset" column.
200
5.2.8.2 Functions
Confirm 5
This function is used to confirm that an individual nozzle holder has been filled with a new nozzle
type.
When changing the set-up of a machine it may be necessary to change the type of nozzle in
some of the nozzle holders. To do this, the current nozzle configuration (Actual) and the nozzle
configuration for the new set-up (Preset) is shown in the table for each nozzle holder. When you
change the nozzle type from the "Actual" to "Preset" type, you must confirm this for each nozzle
holder separately.
In the table, click on the entry for the nozzle holder for which the nozzle is to be replaced. The
line is now highlighted in light blue.
Replace the nozzle currently in this nozzle holder with a nozzle of the type entered in the "Pre-
set" column.
Click the Confirm button.
The change of is now confirmed. The arrow ( <== ) no longer appears in the table against the
corresponding nozzle holder.
5
201
5.2.9 "Fluxing" view
The user interface is switched to the "Fluxing" view (see Fig. 5.2 - 9). 5
NOTE
The "Fluxing" option must be installed and configured in the machine options before the func-
tions in this view can be executed. 5
Fig. 5.2 - 9 "Fluxing" view
202
The "Fluxing" view provides the fluxing functions described below. Click on the appropriate button
to carry out the required function. 5
Go to refill position 5
This function moves the fluxer head to the refill position. It is only possible to refill the flux storage
tank or replace the flux nozzle in this position. 5
Click on the Go to refill position button.

The fluxer head moves to the refill position.
5
Rinse fluxer head 5

This function allows you to rinse the piping system of the fluxer head as required in order to re-
move trapped air or flux residue. This can, for instance, be necessary after changing the flux stor-
age tank or when no flux has been applied for some time. 5
NOTE
The flux parameter "No. of rinse cycles" can be used to set how many rinse operations will be car-
ried out (see Chapter 11 Station extensions /Hardware). 5
Click on the Rinse fluxer head button.

First the flux nozzle is cleaned on the brush and then the piping system of the fluxer head is
rinsed.
Init. fluxer head 5

This function starts a reference run of the fluxer head. The valve and lifting axis are moved to the
home position. 5
Click on the Init. fluxer head button.

The reference run is carried out.
203
5.3 Single functions, transport Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
5.3 Single functions, transport
NOTE
The travel functions of the x or y axis can only be carried out when the machine cover is closed.
To execute this function, press the start button.
As a rule, the gantries only travel slowly. The Collect&Place head is set to travel slowly. 5
On the tool bar in the main view, click the symbol which represents the transport you want to
test the functions of (or select the corresponding menu item from the "View" menu, e.g. "Trans-
port 1" for Transport 1).
NOTE
When dual transport is installed and available in the machine configuration, the single func-
tions can be called for either the right-hand transport (Transport 1) or the left-hand transport
(Transport 2). The functions are identical for both right and left. The symbols used to call the
single functions are marked with the number which corresponds to the transport side.
Example for Transport 1 (= right-hand transport or single transport). 5
The user interface is switched to the "Transport functions" view of the selected transport (see
Fig. 5.3 - 1). 5
204
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 5.3 Single functions, transport
5.3.1 "Transport functions" view
The transport functions are used for checking and adjusting the functional modules of the board
conveying systems. 5
1 2 3
Fig. 5.3 - 1 "Transport functions" view
Key to Fig. 5.3 - 1
(1) Functions for the board conveying systems

(2) Functions for adjusting the transport conveyor width
(3) Functions to display state of the ultrasonic sensors
5
205
5.3.1.1 Functions
Ceramic substrate centering 5
NOTE
The ceramic substrate centering function can only be activated if the "Ceramic substrate centering"
option is installed and entered in the machine options. 5
This function is used to check the centering (clamping) of ceramic substrates in the center con-
veyor.
Click the PCB to center conv. button.

The ceramic substrate is moved to the center conveyor.
Click the Ceramic subst. cent. button.
The ceramic substrate is centered (clamped).
Click the Ceramic subst. cent. button again.
The centering is released again.
Actuate clamping 5
This function can be used to check board clamping for the center conveyor. 5
Use the PCB to center conv. function to move the board to the center conveyor.
Click the Actuate clamping button.
The board is clamped to the center conveyor.
Click the Actuate clamping button again.
The clamping is released again.
Actuate stopper 5
This function can be used to check the operation of each stopper as it is extended and then
retracted. The function can be executed either with or without a board.
Click the Actuate stopper button in the center conveyor.

The stopper for the center conveyor is extended and then returned to its original position.
PCB to center conv. 5

This function can be used to move a board which is on the input conveyor to the center conveyor,
stop it there and clamp it. 5
Click the PCB to center conv. button.

The board currently located on the input conveyor is moved to the center conveyor.
206
PCB to output conv. 5

This function is used to move a board currently in the center conveyor to the output conveyor. 5
Click the PCB to output conv. button.

The board currently located on the center conveyor is moved to the output conveyor.
Refresh 5
The "Refresh" function is used to check whether the ultrasonic sensors for the whole of the trans-
port conveyor are adjusted correctly. To do this, position a board over one of the sensors. 5
The most recent states of the light barriers for the input conveyor (input), center conveyor (center),
and output conveyor (output) are displayed above the "Refresh" button. When you execute the
"Refresh" function the current states are queried and the results displayed (see Fig. 5.3 - 1). 5
Position a board over the sensor for the required conveyor.

Click the Refresh button in the "Sensor state" area.
The sensors are updated and the result is displayed over the button.
There are two possible states for each sensor: 5
1= The sensor has responded.

There is a board on this conveyor. 5
0= The sensor has not responded.

There is no board on this conveyor. 5
Repeat the process for each of the transport conveyors, if necessary.
On 5
This function can be used to check the conveyors at both slow and high speed. The input conveyor
only travels at high speed. 5
NOTE
The conveyor must be empty before carrying out this function. 5
Click the PCB to output conv. button to empty the conveyor.

Activate the "High speed" check box in the "Conveyor" area if the conveyor is to travel at high
speed.
Deactivate the check box if the conveyor is to travel at the slower speed.
NOTE
The input conveyor only travels at high speed. 5
207
Click the On button. This opens the following dialog box.

5
The conveyors are traveling at the set speed.

All functions are locked. 5
Click the OK button in this dialog box if the operation is to be stopped.

The conveyors will be stopped and the dialog box closed.
All functions are then released.
5
208
5.3.2 "PCB conveyor width" view
In the "Transport functions" view, click the symbol.

The user interface is switched to the "PCB conveyor width" view (see Fig. 5.3 - 2).
5
Fig. 5.3 - 2 "PCB conveyor width" view
CAUTION
Before adjusting the conveyor width, make sure there are no boards or other objects on the
machines conveyors. Failure to do so may result in damage to both machine and boards!
209
The "PCB conveyor width" view makes available all functions necessary to adjust the width of the
conveyor.
It may be necessary to change the width of the conveyor, for example, for maintenance work or
when introducing a board with new dimensions. 5
The conveyor can be adjusted to suit the width of the board.

Incremental width adjustments are made by clicking the buttons "Larger" or "Smaller" (see section
5.3.2.2).
Width adjustments can be made in large increments (increment size = 1 mm) or in smaller steps (in-
crement size = 0,1 mm). This can be controlled by activating or deactivating the "High speed" check
box in the "Width adjustment" area (see section 5.3.2.2). 5
5.3.2.2 Functions
Measure width 5
This function can be used to measure the current width of the conveyor. The result is shown and
saved.
Click the Measure width button.

The measured width is displayed above the button.
5
Incremental adjustment
Activate the "High speed" check box to adjust the conveyor width in large increments.
Deactivate the check box if you want to adjust the conveyor width in smaller steps.
5
Conveyor width adjustment
Larger 5
Click the Larger button to increase the width of the conveyor.
Each time you click the button the width is increased by the increment size set using the
"High speed" check box.
Smaller 5
Click the Smaller button to reduce the width of the conveyor.
Each time you click the button the width is reduced by the increment size set using the
"High speed" check box.
210
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 6 Vision functions
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.1 The vision systems on the placement machine
6 Vision functions
6.1 The vision systems on the placement machine
The quality requirements concerning the accuracy of automatic placement systems are constantly
rising, for several reasons: 6
continuing miniaturization of components,
increasing lead connection density,
increasing complexity of PCBs and
increasing component density.
To help meet these requirements, high-precision mechanical components are combined with op-
tical centering and recognition systems (known as vision systems) for components and PCBs. 6
6
Fig. 6.1 - 1 Position of the placement heads on the 80S-20 machine
(1) 12-segment Collect&Place head, gantry 1

(2) 12-segment Collect&Place head, gantry 2
6
211
6 Vision functions SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
6.1 The vision systems on the placement machine Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 6.1 - 2 Position of the placement heads on the F4 machine
(1) Pick&Place head

6
80S-20 6
The placement system has two gantries (see Fig. 6.1 - 1). On each of these gantries there is a
DLM1 Collect&Place head with a separate component camera system (see Fig. 6.1 - 3). A PCB
camera system is mounted on the underside of the head mount of each gantry (see Fig. 6.1 - 5).6
80F4 6
The placement machine has one gantry (see Fig. 6.1 - 2). The gantry supports one 12-segment
Collect&Place head (see Fig. 6.1 - 3) and one Pick&Place head (see Fig. 6.1 - 4). 6
A PCB camera system is mounted on the underside of the head mount (see Fig.
6.1 - 5). The vision analysis unit plugs into the control unit (see item 1 and 2 in Fig. 6.1 - 6). The
component and PCB cameras and the vision analysis unit together form the vision system. 6
212
6.1.1 Component vision module on the 12-segment Collect&Place head
The component vision module (see item 2 in Fig. 6.1 - 3) essentially consists of the following mod-
ules: 6
Optical lens
CCD chip for creating an electronic image of the component
CCD camera amplifier
Three illumination levels flat, average and steep for optimum illumination of a wide
range of component shapes
Illumination control board for setting the intensity of the individual illumination levels.
The component camera system is fastened to the top of the Collect&Place head using four hexa-
gon socket-head screws. It is then held in place by two parallel pins. 6
The component camera system can be used to optically center and place components ranging
from 0402 up to and including PLCC 44 in size. The components therefore vary in size between
1.0mm x 0.5mm and 18.7mm x 18.7mm, and from 0.3mm and 6mm thick. The minimum lead
pitch can be as little as 0.5mm. 6
213
Fig. 6.1 - 3 Component camera system on the 12-segment Collect&Place head

(2) 24x24 component camera
(3) Component illumination control board
6.1.2 Component camera system on the Pick&Place head
The component camera system (see item 2 in Fig. 6.1 - 4) essentially consists of the following
modules: 6
Optical lens
CCD chip for creating an electronic image of the component
214
Three illumination levels flat, average and steep for optimum illumination of a wide
range of component shapes
Illumination control board for setting the intensity of the individual illumination levels.
Fig. 6.1 - 4 Component camera system on the Pick&Place head
(1) Pick&Place head

(2) Fine pitch vision module
6
215
The fine pitch vision module is fixed to the machine base on the right of the PCB conveyor. 6
The component camera system can be used to optically center and place components up to and
including 55mm x 55mm in size. The minimum lead pitch can be as little as 0.4mm. A flip-chip
vision module can be fitted in addition to the fine pitch vision module as an option, in order to op-
tically center components up to 20mm x 20mm in size. The minimum lead pitch can be as little as
0.25mm. 6
6.1.3 PCB camera system
Fig. 6.1 - 5 PCB camera system, basic gantry bottom view
(1) PCB camera lens and illumination

(2) Camera amplifier
(3) Head mount
(4) Gantry
6
216
The PCB camera system (see item 1 and 2 in Fig. 6.1 - 5) essentially consists of the following
components: 6
Optical lens
CCD chip
An illumination level for illuminating PCB fiducials and ink spots
The PCB camera system is fixed to the Collect&Place head on the underside of the gantry. As
standard, it can center PCBs from 50mm x 50mm up to 460mm x 460mm (2" x 2" to 18" x 18"),
with the thickness ranging from 0.5mm to 4.5mm. 6
217
6.1.4 Vision analysis unit
The vision analysis unit (see item 1 and 2 in Fig. 6.1 - 6) plugs into the machines control unit. It
processes and analyzes the electrical signals from the component and PCB camera systems.
Corrected values are calculated from any deviations from setpoint. These values are then used to
recalculate the placement positions and rotational angle for placement. 6
The vision analysis unit also performs a component identification process. If the synthetic model
and the package form measurement do not tally, for example, the component will not be placed. 6
The precise component pick-up position, which is particularly important for small components, is
also determined in the vision analysis unit. Fiducials on the feeders are used to determine the de-
viation in position of the individual feeders. 6
The electronic image signals from components, PCB fiducials, and feeder fiducials can be trans-
ferred from the vision analysis unit, via the video multiplexer, to the station monitor, where they are
used for measuring and testing purposes. 6
Key to Fig. 6.1 - 6
(1) Vision analysis unit

(2) COM1 interface
(3) COM2 interface
(4) HS3L interface
(5) Camera connections:
S-20 F4
1 PCB camera, gantry 1 PCB camera
3 CO camera, gantry 1 CO camera, 12-segment Collect&Place head
(6) Camera connections

S-20 F4
2 PCB camera, gantry 2 Fine-Pitch-vision modul
4 CO camera, gantry 2 Flip-Chip-vision modul
218
Fig. 6.1 - 6 Vision analysis unit
219
6.2 PCB vision system Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
6.2 PCB vision system
The PCB vision system records the precise position of the PCB by measuring fiducials, and cal-
culates the offset in the X and Y directions, the angle of rotation relative to the PCB transport di-
rection and the shear acting on the PCB. Reject fiducials (ink spots) are also recorded and
analyzed by the PCB vision system. 6
6.2.1 System description
The PCB vision system for detecting the position of PCBs consists of the optical PCB position de-
tection system and the vision analysis unit 6
Optical PCB position detection system 6

Each gantry has a separate PCB position detection system (see Fig. 6.1 - 5 on page 216). 6
Vision analysis unit 6

On each machine, an analysis unit for PCB and component position recognition is housed in the
control unit (see Fig. 6.1 - 6, page 219). 6
A CCD camera (SONY XC75) with integral mapping and illumination lens forms the optical PCB
position detection system. The field of view of the PCB module is 5.7 mm x 5.7 mm. The size and
position of the search field can be programmed as required within the fields of view. The mapping
lens is a special measuring lens which corrects most errors caused by the curvature of the PCB.
The illumination is switched on only while fiducials are being recorded. 6
The vision analysis unit (MVS) is a single-board system conforming to VME standards. The hard-
ware consists of 6
the MVS motherboard with vision processor and interface connections
and the MVS camera interface for up to four CCD cameras.
MVS motherboard with vision processor and interface connections 6

The two VME bus connections are located on the back of the VME module. 6
The front panel of the VME module contains connectors for 6
the monitor (VGA mode, 15-pin SUBD connector)
the high-speed interface (HS3L), 9-pin SUBD connector
up to 4 camera inputs (2 x 15-pin SUBD connector)
two serial interfaces (RS232 for COM1 with a 25-pin SUBD connector and COM2 with a
9-pin SUBD connector)
220
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.2 PCB vision system
trigger and flash signals (10-pin ribbon cable connector)
and status display LEDs for 6
the CPU (CFG)
the vision processor (ACA)
the camera input (BCA)
the screen display (DISP)
6.2.2 Technical Data
Camera model: SONY XC75 6
Number of pixels: Camera 768 (H) x 494 (V), Image 640 (H) x 484 (V) 6
Field of view: 5.7 mm x 5.7 mm 6
Illumination method: Incident light method (activated during measurement) 6
Image processing: Correlation principle, gray scale system 6
Screen: RGB monitor (VGA mode) 640 x 484 pixels in the station computer6
Fiducials: Library memory for up to 255 fiducial definitions 6
6.2.3 Description of Functions
Before placement the location, skew and shear of the board is determined by the PCB vision sys-
tem using the position of the fiducials. Deviations from the setpoint values are then included in the
calculation of the placement positions of the components as corrections. 6
A board must have at least 2 fiducials if the system is to be able to detect deviations in the board
position and the skew of the board. The presence of 3 fiducials will furnish additional information
concerning shear or stretching of the board or of the board layout. 6
6.2.4 Sequence of Functions
Before a fiducial can be used for board recognition it must first be taught to the machine. In other
words, the fiducial structure parameters must have been saved in the PCB vision system for that
pattern. 6
The fiducial structure can be taught using the PCB vision camera mounted on the gantry and the
vision program. The vision analysis unit determines the significant fiducial structure parameters
using digital image processing methods. 6
221
Measurement takes place in two stages: 6
2-D pattern search (2-dimensional process) in the coarse grid and provisional determina-
tion of the fiducial coordinates
1-D pattern search (1-dimensional process) for a precise determination of the position of
the fiducials.
With the 2-D pattern search process the template window is divided into moxel areas. Moxels
(mosaic pixels) are pixel fields containing for example 16 x 16, 8 x 8 pixels and so on. The lower
the pixel count per moxel the higher the resolution and the lower the search speed. 6
1 2
5
6
Fig. 6.2 - 1 Explanation of camera field of view, search area and template window
Key to Fig. 6.2 - 1
(1) Camera field of view

(2) Search area camera field of view (the fiducial is searched for in this area)
(3) Reference fiducial
(4) Moxel = pixel field, eg 16 x 16 pixels
(5) Template window (it contains the reference fiducial)
(6) Fiducial which is to be searched for
222
The template window is moved over the search area in moxel steps. The gray scale values of each
moxel of the reference fiducial are calculated at this time. This reduced data structure will contain
enough information on the coarse structure and position of the reference fiducial. 6
NOTE 6
The search window should be as small as possible in order to keep the speed of searching high.
On the other hand the window should be large enough to allow the fiducial to be identified with-
out ambiguity.
The 1-D pattern search procedure is used for precisely determining the pattern and position of the
fiducial. The fiducial image is broken up into rows and columns and the gray scale values in each
row and column added up. The next diagram illustrates this process using a double cross. 6
1 2
Fig. 6.2 - 2 Row and column profile of a double cross
Key to Fig. 6.2 - 2
(1) Fiducial
(2) Sum of the grey scale values in one column: column profile
(3) Sum of the grey scale values in one row: row profile
6
The position of the fiducial is precisely determined from the horizontal and vertical profiles.
After teaching, the fiducial structure parameters obtained are saved to the line computer.
The saved pattern is now tested. The gantry moves the PCB camera over the board to all 4
corners of the search area (worst case). During this test the vision system must re-identify the
fiducial four times.
223
Finally, the coordinates of each individual fiducial (at least two) are manually added to the NU
file or transferred from the CAD file to the NU file. In this way, the coordinates and fiducial struc-
ture parameters for the board are defined as a pattern in the system.
During the placement process, the fiducial will be determined once again using the 1-D and
2-D image processing methods described above. The template window is moved moxel by
moxel over the search area searching for the best possible agreement of the gray scale values
of the reference and board search fiducials (correlation procedure). Maximum correlation is at-
tained when the reference and search fiducials agree.
Once the fiducial has been found, the 1-D pattern search process begins. The precise shape
and coordinates of the fiducial are determined in each case by applying the correlation proce-
dure to the column and row profiles (see Fig. 6.2 - 2). From the coordinates obtained in this
way, the location, skew and shear of the board are determined.
Reject fiducials (= ink dots) are also detected and evaluated using the methods described
above.
6.2.5 Criteria for Creating Fiducials
Basically the same criteria apply to both fiducials and reject fiducials (ink dots): uniqueness of fi-
ducial shapes and readily detectable structures which stand out from their surroundings. 6
Use existing structures as fiducials 6

Instead of fiducials, you can also use uniquely identifiable structures within the PCB layout. It
should, however, be remembered that solder stop lacquer is frequently accompanied by a loss in
contrast. 6
Location of the fiducials 6

Position the fiducial where there are as few structures as possible and where the fiducial will stand
out well from its surroundings. Measuring outwards from the center of the fiducial, there should be
a clearance on each side equal to at least one fiducial size plus 1 mm. 6
Types of fiducials 6
There are 2 types of fiducials: 6
Positive fiducials
The fiducial extends above the base material of the board.
Negative fiducials
The fiducial is etched into the base material of the board.
224
Fiducial shape 6
Always choose a well-structured, distinct shape as fiducial shape: 6
Recommended fiducial shapes: 6
Rectangle, square or circle

Properties 6
Low informational content (fiducials can easily be confused with test dots).
NOTE 6
Make sure that there are no similar structures in the fiducial search area. 6
Low space requirements in the layout
Very robust with respect to different tinning procedures (e.g. hot-tinning).
Recommended fiducial dimensions 6
for square and rectangles: Side length 1.2 mm - 2.2 mm
for the circle: Diameter 1.2 mm - 2.2 mm
Double cross and single cross 6

Properties of the double cross 6
Higher informational content
More space required in the layout
Sensitivity with respect to high tin-coatings (bare copper is preferable)
Poor fiducial quality may result in incorrect position recognition.
Properties of the simple cross 6
The informational content is somewhat lower than with the double cross
Less space required in the layout than with the double cross.
Less sensitive to high tin-coatings than with the double cross.
225
Dimensions of the fiducials: Simple and double crosses 6

6
s = 0.5 mm s = 0.5 mm
b = 2.75 mm
b = 2.0 mm
a = 0.75 mm
l = 2.0 mm l = 2.75 mm
1 2
Fig. 6.2 - 3 Simple and double crosses with ideal dimensions
Key to Fig. 6.2 - 3
(1) Simple cross

(2) Double cross
6
The minimum dimensions for a fiducial in length (l) and width (b) depend on the line thickness (s)
and on the structure of the fiducial. 6
Length (l) and width (b)

For the good fiducial recognition, the length and the width should be at least 0.9 mm with the
simple cross and 1.8 mm with the double cross. The ideal dimensions for the simple cross are
2.0 mm and for the double cross 2.75 mm. Under normal circumstances, length and width will
be equal.
Line thickness (s)

The ideal line thickness for both fiducial types is 0.5 mm. The line thickness may vary, however,
according to standard structure widths and the type of fiducial. You should ensure that the line
is at least 0.3 mm thick, though.
Line spacing (a)

Line spacing depends on the type of fiducial. Under no circumstances should line spacing fall
below 0.5 mm. For the double cross, the ideal spacing will be 0.75 mm.
226
Thickness (d)
You should ensure, particularly with tin fiducials, that a warpage of more than 1/10 of the struc-
ture width is not exceeded. If this degree of warpage is exceeded, the fiducial may not be
evenly illuminated. This would lead to variations in reflection characteristics and unwanted re-
flections. Recognition of the fiducials will then no longer be assured.
Recommended fiducial dimensions 6
Simple cross Double cross
Fiducial type Range Ideal Range Ideal
Length (l) 0.9 mm (min) 2.0 mm 1.8 mm (min) 2.75 mm
Width (b) 0.9 mm (min) 2.0 mm 1.8 mm (min) 2.75 mm
Line thickness (s) 0.3 - 1.4 mm 0.5 mm 0.3 - 0.75 mm 0.5 mm
Line spacing (a) 0.5 mm (min) 0.75 mm
Thickness (d) < 1/10 of the structure width < 1/10 of the structure width
Tab. 6.2 - 1
Analysis of the fiducial shapes 6

For tinned and higher dimensional stable structures, (a low degree of etching variation) full circles
or full squares may be regarded as very satisfactory fiducial shapes (the ratio of fiducial thickness
to presoldering thickness will be large!). If dimensional stability falls, the full circle should be pre-
ferred to the square. 6
As far as the fiducial shapes of simple and double cross are concerned, bright copper is advanta-
geous as long as oxidation has not advanced too far. 6
Surface of the fiducials

Make sure that the surface of the fiducial is as level as possible and with little oxidation. Avoid
wetting the fiducial with solder-stop lacquer as this could result in lowering the contrast with the
background or produce unwanted reflections. Similar effects occur with tinned fiducials as well.
Contrast of the fiducials

To ensure that fiducial recognition is of a high quality, select a high brightness contrast between
the fiducial and the base material; in other words, bright fiducials on a dark base material and
vice versa. For example, on a copper or tin background apply dark fiducials. In the case of ce-
ramic substrates with a bright surface and unsatisfactory reflective properties, it is often helpful
to precoat with a dark resistance material in order to improve contrast characteristics.
Number of fiducials
When using ceramic substrates and small boards, tow fiducials will usually be sufficient. How-
ever, with larger boards it is recommended that three fiducials be defined. The individual fidu-
227
cials can vary in structure. You can simplify the recognition procedure if you use the same
structure for each fiducial.
Correction with two fiducials X-position

Y-position
PCB skew
Correction with three fiducials: ideally, the straight lines which each pass through the cen-
ters of two fiducial will be parallel with the x and y axes
X-position
Y-position
PCB skew
Shear
Warpage of PCB in the X direction
Warpage of PCB in the Y direction
NOTE 6
You should never position 3 fiducials so that they are located on a straight line. 6
Spacing between the fiducials

You may locate the fiducials at any point on the board. However, it is a good idea to space the
fiducials as far apart as possible on the two axes. The further apart the fiducials are from one
another, the more accurate optical position and angle recognition will be.
228
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.3 Component vision systems
6.3 Component vision systems
The PCB vision system records the precise position of a component by determining the offset be-
tween the component center and the nozzles axis of symmetry, and by calculating the rotational
offset from the relative rotational position of the nozzle. It is also possible to analyze the state of
the lead configuration in the X and Y directions. The component vision system consists of the op-
tical system for recognizing the component position, and the vision analysis unit. 6
6.3.1 Component vision system on the 12-segment Collect&Place head
6.3.1.1 System description
The 12-segment Collect&Place head has its own component position recognition system in star
station 7 (see Fig. 6.1 - 3, page 214). The vision analysis unit for PCB and component position
recognition is located in the control unit (see Fig. 6.1 - 6, page 219). 6
The optical component position recognition system consists of a CCD camera with deflector, im-
age lens, and LED illumination system. The usable field of view of the CCD camera (SONY XC75
camera) measures 24 mm x 24 mm. For position recognition, and for the lead test, the component
is evenly illuminated by the rows of LEDs using the front lighting method, and is projected onto the
CCD chip in sharp focus by the lens. The position, rotational angle, and lead condition parameters
are determined using the high-accuracy lead extraction (HALE) method of digital image process-
ing. 6
The vision analysis unit (MVS) was described in section 6.1.4, page 218, since it performs both
PCB and component evaluation functions. 6
6.3.1.2 Technical data
Camera type: SONY XC75

Number of pixels: 484 x 484
Field of view: 24mm x 24mm
Illumination method: Front lighting (infrared light), 3 LED levels
Image processing: HALE gray scale method
(High Accuracy Lead Extraction)
Screen: RGB monitor (VGA mode), 640 x 484 pixels
Component sizes: 0.5mm x 0.5mm ... 18.7mm x 18.7mm
Range of recognizable components: TSOP, LCC, PLCC, QFP, SO series up to SO28
essentially all components with J and
gull wing leads, BGAs
Minimum lead pitch: 0.3mm for the camera
0.5mm for the machine
Minimum ball diameter for BGAs: 250 m
229
6.3 Component vision systems Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
A segment of the 12-segment Collect&Place head picks up a component at star station 1. As the
star advances, further components are picked up. Once a component reaches star station 7,
where the component vision system is located, three offset rows of LEDs evenly illuminate the
component with infrared light. The lens maps components up to 5mm high in sharp focus onto the
cameras CCD chip. 6
The digital image of the component generated by the camera is then transferred to the vision anal-
ysis unit, where the HALE digital image processing method is used to compare the component
image with a synthetic model previously created in the GF (package form) editor. The parameters
thus obtained provide information on deviations in position, the rotational angle, lead condition,
and component reidentification. The HALE method has proved to be highly resistant to disruptive
factors such as unwanted reflection, different reflection behavior of leads, diffused light, etc, and
it is faster and more accurate than the matching method.Once the measurement is complete, the
segment advances to star station 9, and rotates the component into the correct orientation for
placement. Finally, the component is placed in the correct position on the PCB at star station 1.6
6.3.2 Component camera module for the Pick&Place head
6.3.2.1 System description
Component vision module for the Pick&Place head: fine pitch vision module 6
All the optical components of the system 6
CCD camera (SONY XC77 camera)
lens
optical strip filter for suppressing unwanted reflections
are located in a dust-tight housing. The field of view of the CCD camera measures 38 mm x
38 mm. For position recognition, and for the lead test, the component is illuminated by three LED
levels using the front lighting method, and is projected onto the CCD chip in sharp focus by the
lens. The position, rotational angle, and lead condition parameters are determined for fine pitch
components and BGAs (Ball Grid Arrays) using digital image processing methods. 6
Component vision module for the Pick&Place head: flip-chip vision module 6
All the optical components of the system, such as the 6
CCD camera (SONY XC75C camera)
lens
are located in a dust-tight housing. The field of view of the CCD camera measures 12.2 mm x
9.2 mm. For position recognition and for the ball test, the flip-chips are illuminated by two LED lev-
230
els using the front lighting method, and are projected onto the CCD chip in sharp focus by the lens.
The position, rotational angle parameters, and the number and position of the balls are determined
using digital image processing methods. 6
The vision analysis unit is described in section 6.1.4, from page 218. 6
6.3.2.2 Technical data
Fine pitch vision module for the Pick&Place head 6

Camera type: SONY XC77
Field of view: 38 mm x 38 mm
Illumination method: Front lighting (infrared light)
3 illumination levels
Image processing: HALE gray scale method
(High Accuracy Lead Extraction)
Range of recognizable components: Fine pitch up to 55 mm x 55 mm and BGAs
(ball grid arrays)
Minimum lead pitch: 0.4 mm
Flip-chip vision module for the Pick&Place head 6

Camera type: SONY XC75C
Field of view: 12.2 mm x 9.2 mm
Illumination method: Front lighting (infrared light)
2 illumination levels
Image processing: approx. 1 second for standard flip-chips
Range of recognizable components: flip-chips and fine pitch components up to 15 mm x
15 mm
Minimum ball size: 80 m
Minimum lead pitch: 0.2 mm
There are two optical centering systems available for centering components with the Pick&Place
head: 6
the fine pitch vision module for fine pitch components up to 55 mm x 55 mm in size, and with
a minimum lead pitch of 0.4 mm, and BGAs (ball grid arrays)
the flip-chip vision module for flip-chips and fine pitch components up to 15 mm x 15 mm in
size, and with a minimum lead pitch of 0.2 mm
231
The Pick&Place head picks up components from waffle pack trays, and positions them over the
optical centering system used. Offset rows of LEDs evenly illuminate the component with infrared
light. The digital image of the component generated by the camera is then transferred to the vision
analysis unit, where it is evaluated according to the component type. The results thus obtained
provide information on deviations in position, the rotational angle, lead condition, and the mapping
quality of the component. 6
New illumination methods and special algorithms for obtaining the component parameters have
been developed for BGAs and flip-chips. This means that this new generation of components
can now be optically centered.
The Pick&Place head returns any components that cannot be optically centered to the waffle
pack tray for further analysis.
6
6.3.3 Criteria for Recognition of Components
Shape of the components 6

Optical component centering allows both regular and irregular components to be centered. The
maximum number of leads, horizontally and vertically, is 99 in each case. 6
Criteria for regular components 6

Definition:
A component is deemed to be regular when it satisfies the following four conditions: 6
rectangular package shapes (special case: square shape)
only one lead type per side
only one lead group per side
opposite lead groups located symmetrically with respect to the two main axes
(X and Y axes).
232
X
1
Pin 1
Fig. 6.3 - 1 Regular component
Key to Fig. 6.3 - 1
(1) Axis of symmetry

6
Criteria for irregular components 6

Definition:
A component is deemed to be irregular when it does not satisfy the conditions for regular compo-
nents. 6
Additional conditions for centering with the component vision system: 6
In any one row up to 3 different lead types are permitted.
In any one row up to 15 groups are permitted.
233
Pin 1
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 3 Type 2

Group 1 Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
Fig. 6.3 - 2 Example of irregular components
Pitch deviation 6
The pitch deviation (which is the distance from the center of one lead to the center of the next) can
be edited separately for each component in the GF editor. If this value is exceeded during the vi-
sion inspection, the component will not be centered and therefore not placed. 6
Limit values for quality measurement 6

Components exceeding the limit values for quality measurement will be rejected and, therefore,
not placed: 6
Difference in the number of leads between the original and the model.
Pitch deviation larger than the value in the GF file.
Larger orthogonality error than specified in the GF file.
Larger deviations of the external dimensions.
Deviation of the central point greater than the permitted positional tolerance for pick-up.
234
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.4 Access to the Teach Fiducial and Test Component Options
6.4 Access to the Teach Fiducial and Test Compo-

nent Options
Access to the Teach fiducial and Test component options is only available to user class Line en-
gineer and higher. The Teach fiducial and Test component icons will remain grayed out until user
classes Line engineer or Service engineer have been selected. The grayed-out icons will be ac-
tivated and appear black, indicating that the options are available. 6
Selection of user classes: 6

In the menu bar of the Main view menu click on the Options pull-down menu.
Click on the Access level option. The user class option box will drop down.
Select the appropriate user class.
6
Test component icon
Teach fiducial icon
Fig. 6.4 - 1 Access to the options Teach fiducial and Test component
235
6.4 Access to the Teach Fiducial and Test Component Options Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
You can also protect the user classes Line engineer and Service engineer by entering a pass-
word at the station computer which will then be used to control access. 6
In the menu bar of the Main view menu click on the Options pull-down menu.
Click on the Access level option. The user class option box will drop down.
Click on the Change password. The input box for the password will drop down.
Type in the password and then confirm.
Click on OK to accept the password or Cancel to reject it.
Move the mouse pointer over the Teach fiducial or Test component option. The status line
will display a brief explanatory text for the option in question. You can also use the F8 or F9
function keys to access the options. The View drop-down menu will list the allocations of the
function keys and the individual options.
Click on either of the two icons (buttons). The screen will then display either the Select fiducial
menu or the Select package form menu depending on whether you have selected the Teach
fiducial option or the Test component option (see Figs. 6.4 - 2 and 6.4 - 3).
6
Again, depending on your choice, you can access further menus for the Teach fiducial option or
the Test component option. 6
236
Select fiducial Test fiducial Contrast sensitivity Test fiducial

icon icon icon icon
Fig. 6.4 - 2 Teach fiducial option: menus
You can select the following menus from the Teach fiducial option either by clicking on the icons
in the symbols bar or by using function keys F2 to F5: 6
Select fiducial
Teach fiducial
Contrast sensitivity, and
Test fiducial.
You can return to the Main view menu either by clicking on the Main view icon or by pressing
function key F1. 6
237
6.4 Access to the Teach Fiducial and Test Component Options Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Test component icon
Select package form icon
Fig. 6.4 - 3 Test component option: menus
You can select the following menus from the Test component option either by clicking on the
icons (buttons) or by pressing function keys F2 to F3: 6
Select package form
Test component
You can return to the Main view menu either by clicking on the Main view icon or by pressing
function key F1. 6
The options Teach fiducial and Test component are described in Section 6.5 from page 240 and
Section 6.6 from page 275. 6
238
To provide you with some orientation, at the start of each section you will find a flow chart and a
brief description for the Teach fiducial and Test component options. Each flow chart begins with
Main view menu and shows you the hierarchical structure of all of the menu options. 6
NOTE 6
Section 3 includes a general description of 6
using the menus with trackball, touch screen and function keys F1 to F12.
the layout of the screen.
the screen displays.
239
6.5 Teach Fiducial Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
6.5 Teach Fiducial
6.5.1 Teach Fiducial Flow Chart
The Teach fiducial flow chart shows in graphic form all menu options together with their sub-func-
tions. The menus are indicated by being bordered with a solid line, while the option boxes use a
dashed line and the input boxes a dotted line. 6
6.5.2 Information on the Flow Chart
6.5.2.1 Menus
The Teach fiducial option includes the following menus: 6
Select fiducial
Teach fiducial
Contrast sensitivity
Test fiducial
The Save fiducial data option box will be displayed each time you quit the Teach fiducial option
after having created or modified fiducial data. You are thus given the choice of saving these fidu-
cial parameters or of discarding them. 6
You can quit the individual menus by clicking on either the icon of another menu or on the Main
view icon. 6
6.5.2.2 Input Boxes, Option Boxes
The system provides the following input boxes for entering data, for displaying values and for ex-
ecuting actions: 6
Define new fiducial
Change fiducial name
Program transform 5
You can quit the input boxes with OK, Accept or Cancel. 6
Click on OK or Accept with the mouse and the data will be transferred to the program and
saved. The input box closes.
Click on the Cancel button and the data will be discarded and the input box closed.
240
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.5 Teach Fiducial
6.5.2.3 Buttons
For selecting options the system provides the following buttons: 6
Select the teaching gantry

Use the mouse to select the teaching gantry.
Save fiducial
The fiducial parameters just generated will be saved when you click on this button.
Load fiducial
Once you have selected the desired fiducial from the lists field, click on the Load fiducial but-
ton. The fiducial parameters will be loaded.
6.5.2.4 Video Images
The camera image of the MVS system (vision analysis unit) can be displayed on the screen of the
station computer. In addition the screen will include header and footers: 6
The header includes, for example, the currently selected menu option, the fiducial number,
analysis criteria, measurement results and so on.
The footers include command sequences, keyboard commands, camera coordinates and so
on.
You can always quit displays of video images with the ESC key. The corresponding menu window
will then reappear. 6
6.5.2.5 Warning and Message Boxes
Messages are text fields which contain information regarding actions, warnings and so on. They
will appear under the following circumstances: 6
incorrect operator actions (for example, a board still on the processing conveyor).
requests to the operator to carry out certain actions (for example, remove board).
instructions (for example, input the name of a fiducial).
indicates the system is busy performing an action (for example, loading fiducial data).
241
Teach fiducial menu options
Main view menu
Main view
Set-up
Error
Feeders
Gantry 1 functions
Gantry 2 func. (S-20)
Fiducial is PCB transport 2

restored
PCB transport 1
Teach fiducial
Fiducial Test component

is saved
SITEST
GEM
OK
Cancel
Save
fiducial
Teach fiducial
menu option
Yes Main view
Markenauswahl
Select fiducial
Fiducial
Teach fiducial
processed?
Contrast graduation
Test fiducial
Fig. 6.5 - 1 Teach fiducial flow chart - menu options
242

Select fiducial menu
Select fiducial
Select fiducial Fiducial loaded

A number or taught?
No
Yes
Define Save Load Change

new fiducial fiducial fiducial fiducial name
New fiducial Change

input box fiducial name *)
OK Cancel
Select the teach gantry:

gamtry 1, gantry 2 (S-20)
*) Change fiducial name input box
Fig. 6.5 - 2 Teach fiducial flow chart, Select fiducial menu
243

Teach fiducial menu
Teach
fiducial
Fiducial
Select fiducial
loaded or No
menu
A
taught?
Change search area

Yes
Standard Low Medium High

Search area
values resolution resolution resolution
Video image Video image Video image
Position Position camera Change template

camera and change search area field
Teach message Upon any modification of Upon any modification of

with the search area a teach the search area a teach
standard values message is prompted. message is prompted.
Output of Uniqueness values Uniqueness values

uniqueness are displayed are displayed
ESC ESC ESC
Fig. 6.5 - 3 Teach fiducial flow chart - Teach fiducial menu
244

Contrast graduation menu
Contrast
graduation
Select
Fiducial loaded
or taught?
No fiducial A
menu
Fiducial
Yes
Program
transform 5 Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5
Option box for Video image

Cancel Program graduation Default values
of transform 5 (Accept Teach command with
default values) different grey-scale
transformation
Accept (save programmed values)
Output of
uniqueness
ESC
Fig. 6.5 - 4 Teach fiducial flow chart - Contrast graduation menu
245

Test fiducial menu
Test fiducial
Fiducial
Select fiducial
loaded or No
menu
A
taught?
Yes
Positioning
Fiducial
PCB to
Move PCB to
processing Center Test
x/y axes output conveyor conveyor
Video image Video image Video image
Position PCB Define template Triggering

camera transport 1/2 window measurement
sequence
(hor./vert.) fiducial quality
ESC output
ESC ESC
Return Return
(save) (repeat)
Fig. 6.5 - 5 Teach fiducial flow chart - Test fiducial menu
246
6.5.3 Select Fiducial Menu

When the Teach fiducial option is selected in the Main view menu the following actions will be
started: 6
The functions for the vision system are activated in the station computer
The Select fiducial menu will drop down.
The station computer asks the line computer for the list of fiducial numbers with commentaries
and displays them on the screen. The transformation tables for the screen colors are held lo-
cally in the station computer.
6
Fiducial numbers list 6
Fig. 6.5 - 6 Select fiducial menu
As the diagram shows, the menu offers the following options for selection. 6
Select gantry
Load fiducial
Define new fiducial
Change fiducial name
Save fiducial
247
NOTE 6
Buttons are active when the text on the button is black (rather than gray). This means that you
can launch the associated function by clicking on the button with the mouse.
The Load fiducial button will, for example, only be active if you have previously clicked on a
fiducial in the lists field.
The Change fiducial name button will only be active if you have loaded a fiducial and the Save
fiducial button will only be active if you have either changed the fiducial name or fiducial param-
eters.
You can switch from the Teach fiducial menu to the Main menu at any time in order to start actions
such as "Fill track" etc. The settings in the Teach fiducial menu will be retained, which means that
the same conditions will be set up when you return to the Teach fiducial menu. 6
However, if you have changed fiducial data or taught a new fiducial and then switch from the Main
menu to the Test component, Single functions, SITEST or Continue placement menu, the
Save fiducial data selection box will appear when you leave the Teach fiducial option. You can
then either save the modified or new data or delete it. 6
6
Fig. 6.5 - 7 Select fiducial menu, Save fiducial data option box
248
Selecting the Save fiducial option causes the station computer to send the new or changed fidu-
cial data to the line computer and to update the fiducial numbers list. The fiducial data is also up-
dated in the remaining stations. The transformation tables are held locally in the station computer. 6
6.5.3.1 Select Gantry Option
With this option you can use the Gantry 1 or Gantry 2 buttons to choose which gantry to use as
the teaching gantry. The default setting is Gantry 1. 6
Position the mouse pointer over the desired gantry.

Click on the button. The button of the selected gantry will now turn black.
Since F4 placement machines have only one gantry, this option is permanently set to Gantry 1.6
Fig. 6.5 - 8 Select fiducial menu, Select gantry option
249
6.5.3.2 Load Fiducial Option
NOTE 6
When you call the Load fiducial option, the Save fiducial data option box will appear if you had
previously edited a fiducial (see Fig. 6.5 - 7).
Display field for fiducial number and fiducial name
The selected
fiducial will be
shown against
a cyan-colored
bar. 6
List field
Fig. 6.5 - 9 Select fiducial menu, Load fiducial option
If you wish to save your data, the fiducial data will be transmitted to the line computer. The fiducial
numbers list will also be updated. 6
From the list field use the mouse pointer to select a particular fiducial. The selected fiducial will
appear against a cyan-colored bar.
Click on the Load fiducial button. In the Fiducial display field the fiducial name and the fiducial
number will be displayed.
The station computer will request from the line computer the fiducial data of the selected fiducial.
The pattern structure and search area will be transmitted to the machine controller which then
downloads it into the memory of the MVS system. Following this the teaching parameters structure
is initialized in the station computer with the current values. 6
250
6.5.3.3 Change Fiducial Name Option
NOTE 6
This option can only be activated if you have already loaded a fiducial. If this is not the case, the
Change fiducial name button will be inactive. The grayed-out text on the button indicates this.
Load the desired fiducial, as described in Section 6.5.3.2 on page 250.
Click on the Change fiducial name button.

The input box will appear on the screen.
Input the new fiducial name into the New name field.
Click on OK if you wish the change to go ahead. The fiducial list will now be updated.
Click on Cancel if you wish to discard the change.
Fig. 6.5 - 10 Change fiducial name option, input box for new fiducial name
251
6.5.3.4 Define New Fiducial Option
With this option you can generate a new fiducial. 6
Click on the Define new fiducial button.

The input box for the fiducial number and the fiducial name will appear on the screen.
Fig. 6.5 - 11 Select fiducial menu, Define new fiducial option, input box
Input a fiducial number and the fiducial name.
Conclude your input with OK or discard your input with Cancel.
The new fiducial can also be taught with standard values and further processed.
When finished save the fiducial by clicking on the Save fiducial button.
NOTE 6
If a fiducial number already exists after clicking on OK you will be asked if you want to over-
write the existing fiducial. 6
252
6.5.3.5 Save Fiducial Option
With this option you can save fiducials together with their modified parameters. The button will
only become activated if you have 6
changed the fiducial name or
generated a new fiducial.
Fig. 6.5 - 12 Select fiducial menu, Save fiducial option
253
6.5.4 Teach Fiducial Menu
As the diagram shows, the Teach fiducial menu offers the following options: 6
Standard values
Search area
Change search area with
low resolution,
middle resolution and
high resolution
Fig. 6.5 - 13 Teach fiducial menu, options
254
NOTE: 6
Buttons are active when the text on the button is black (rather than gray). This means that you can
launch the associated function by clicking on the button with the mouse.
The Search area button will, for example, only be active if you have 6
already loaded a fiducial or
created a new fiducial.
A model must already exist for the selected fiducial.
If a new fiducial number has been input then you can select the Standard values options. If you
have loaded an existing fiducial all options will be accessible. In the menu the following options
will be available: 6
Changing the parameters of the fiducial structure fields (template)
Changing the parameters of the search area
Teaching with standard values
Fiducial structure field parameters are 6
width,
height and
camera resolution
Search area parameters are 6
width and
height
The parameters are stored in a list in the station computer. This list is initialized with default and
current values when the Load fiducial option is launched. 6
If you change a parameter, a teach command will be generated in the machine controller (MC).
The only parameter block which will be added to the teach command in the general parameters
will be the block which has been changed. 6
For this reason the machine controller generates three different teach commands: 6
Teach with standard values
Teach the search area
Teach the fiducial structure field (template)
255
6.5.4.1 Standard Values Option
When this option is selected 6
the menu is closed.
the teaching process is launched.
the video image is shown with fiducial, fiducial structure field and uniqueness value.
header and footer with commentary, measurement results, key assignments and command se-
quences will be displayed.
The teaching process will now be launched with the standard values. The result of the teaching
process is the uniqueness value which is shown in the header of the video image. This value pro-
vides information on the differentiation quality of the fiducial with respect to other structures in the
vicinity of the fiducial. The figure displayed may range between 6
0 = unsatisfactory and
100 = very good differentiation capability. 6
Practice shows that a uniqueness value of at least 60 must be achieved for fiducials and ink dots. 6
Standard values Fiducial No. = 8 Uniqueness = 70
x/y step width = ...
Ret : teach : x axis + : y axis +

1..6 : x/y step : x axis - : y axis -
Fig. 6.5 - 14 Teach fiducial menu, Teach with standard values video image
256
NOTE 6
If you wish to use a fiducial despite the fact that it has a low uniqueness value, you should ensure
that the fiducial has a good quality value (see Section 6.5.6.2 on page 271).
If the quality is bad as well, it would be better to select another fiducial (see Criteria for Creating
Fiducials in Section 6.2.5 on page 224).
Use the arrow keys to change the camera position. You can vary the step width by entering a
number in the range 1 - 6.
Press the Return key to repeat the teaching process.
Press Esc to quit the teaching process. The video image disappears and the Teach fiducial
menu is displayed once more.
6.5.4.2 High, Middle and Low Resolution Options
When you select one of these options, 6
the menu closes,
the video image is shown with fiducial and search area, and
quences are displayed.
6
Template high res. Fiducial No. = 8 Uniqueness = 70
Field step = ... Direction = ... x/y step width = ...
Ret: teach Tab : field step

Blank: hor./vert. + : larger : x axis + : y axis +
1..6 : x/y step - : smaller : x axis - : y axis -
Fig. 6.5 - 15 Teach fiducial menu, Change search area video image
257
Use the arrow keys to change the camera position. You can specify the step width by entering
a number in the range 1 - 6.
Use the + and - keys to move the fiducial boundaries and teach them at the same time. With
the space bar you can toggle between horizontal and vertical directions. With the Tab key you
can toggle the field step width between 1 pixel and 10 pixels.
Press Return to launch the teaching process.
The unique value appears on the screen as the measurement result. This may vary between 6
0 = unsatisfactory and
100 = very good differentiation capability. 6
Practice shows that a uniqueness value of at least 60 must be achieved. 6
Repeat the teaching process a number of times with changed field sizes. In this way you can
optimize the uniqueness value. Reducing the size of the search area to dimensions which are
less than those of the fiducial itself will increase the uniqueness value since the fiducial ends
will, for example, when wetted with solder-stop lacquer, exhibit poor reflection characteristics.
However, you should not select too small a field as this may impair the uniqueness of the fidu-
cial among other things.
Press Esc to quit this option.
NOTE 6
If you wish to use a fiducial despite the fact that it has a low uniqueness value, you should
ensure that the fiducial has a good quality value (see Section 6.5.6.2 on page 271).
If the quality is bad as well, it would be better to select another fiducial (see Criteria for Cre-
ating Fiducials in Section 6.2.5 on page 224). 6
Changing existing fiducials 6

During each teaching process the centering offsets are set to zero. If this is not done, optical cen-
tering with the fiducial structure field boundaries will not be correct; the measurement results
would be distorted. 6
6.5.4.3 Search Area Option
The search area is a freely selectable field within the field of view of the camera. 6
NOTE 6
Always select a size for the search area which will still also take into account tolerances in
board positioning.
258
Make sure that there are no other structures within the search area. Otherwise, fiducial identi-
fication could be made unnecessarily more difficult.
Repeat the tests with different search area sizes. It may also be appropriate to optimize the
uniqueness value.
When you select the Search area option 6
the menu closes,
the teaching process is launched,
the video image is shown with fiducial and search area, and
quences are displayed.
Change search area Fiducial No. = 8 Uniqueness = 70
Field step = ... Direction = ... x/y step width = ...

Ret: teach Tab : step width
Blank: hor./vert. + : larger : x axis + : y axis +
1..6 : x/y step - : smaller : x axis - : y axis -
Fig. 6.5 - 16 Teach fiducial menu, Teach search area video image
Use the arrow keys to change the camera position. You can specify the step width by entering
a number in the range 1 - 6.
Use the + and - keys to move the fiducial structure boundaries and teach them at the same
time. With the space bar you can toggle between horizontal and vertical directions. With the
Tab key you can toggle the field step width between 1 pixel and 10 pixels.
Press Return to launch the teaching process.
259
The uniqueness value appears as the measurement results. This may vary between 0 (= unsat-
isfactory) and 100 (= very good) differentiation capability. 6
Practice shows that a uniqueness value of at least 60 must be achieved for fiducials and ink dots. 6
Repeat the teaching process a number of times with changed field sizes. In this way you can
optimize the uniqueness value.
NOTE 6
If you wish to use a fiducial despite the fact that it has a low uniqueness value, you should
ensure that the fiducial has a good quality value (see Section 6.5.6.2 on page 271).
If the quality is bad as well, it would be better to select another fiducial (see Criteria for Cre-
ating Fiducials in Section 6.2.5 on page 224). 6
260
6.5.5 Contrast Sensitivity Menu
The Contrast sensitivity menu provides options for optimizing the contrast between the fiducial
and its surroundings. 6
NOTE 6
All of the options in this menu are only accessible if you have loaded a fiducial beforehand. If you
have done so, this will be indicated by the text on the button being black (rather than grayed out).
The fiducial number and fiducial name are displayed in the Fiducial display field.
If you have not loaded a fiducial you will only be able to select the Program Transform 5 Option.
Fig. 6.5 - 17 Contrast sensitivity menu, options
Each pixel of the video camera contains one unit of 8-bit gray-scale information. The significance
of the values is as follows: 6
0 = black and
255 = white
261
To make it easier for you to assess the range of brightness or the contrast, these gray-scale values
have been converted with the help of transformation tables into color as is shown below: 6
Gray scale Allocated color
0 black
30 violet
50 blue
77 blue-green
100 green
127 brown
150 red
175 orange
200 yellow
255 white
Tab. 6.5.1
NOTE 6
In order to achieve a good uniqueness value the contrast difference between the fiducial and its
surroundings should be at least 75. For example, if the background is green the fiducial should
be orange.
If the contrast is unsatisfactory you can select in the menu between five pre-programmed trans-
formation tables in order to obtain a color image which is capable of supplying the necessary in-
formation. In addition, you can also program a transformation table yourself. 6
NOTE 6
When the color presentation is changed the fiducial will be taught at the same time.
262
6.5.5.1 Transforms 1 to 5 Option
When you select this options, 6
the menu closes,
the video image is displayed,
the teach command is given, and
header and footer with color table option, fiducial number and the uniqueness value are dis-
played.
Disp. with transform 2 Fiducial No. = 8 Uniqueness = 70
Fig. 6.5 - 18 Contrast sensitivity menu, Transforms 1-5 video image
263
6.5.5.2 Program Transform 5 Option
When this option is activated the Contrast sensitivity transform 5 option box opens. 6
Scroll bar
Scroll field
Fig. 6.5 - 19 Contrast sensitivity menu, Contrast sensitivity transform 5 option box
You can select the following parameters: 6
Number of sections which the transformation table should have: a number between 1 and 5
Choice of paired values: with 5 sections 10 value pairs are permitted.
Layout of the Contrast sensitivity transform 5 option box 6

Numerical presentation of Transform 5 6
The numerical values are indicated in the upper part of the option box. These are: 6
Section: Number of sections 6
OUT Begin: OUT End: Ranges of values for the transformation of the individual sections 6
IN: Range limits of the individual sections 6
264
Graphic presentation of Transform 5 6

In the diagram 6
the abscissae (X axis) represent the input value range, subdivided into sections.
the ordinates (Y axis) represent the output values with their color allocation.
Buttons 6
Accept
Click on the Accept button to save the settings. The option box will then close.
Cancel
With Cancel you can discard the settings. The option box will then close.
Help
With the Help button you can access explanatory material regarding the on-screen presenta-
tion.
Standard values
Click on the Standard values button if programming the transformation table fails. When you
select this option the transformation table will be preassigned default values. After this you can
start over with programming table 5.
Number input field
You can choose the number of sections
by entering the numerical value directly into the display field, or

by moving the scroll field in the scroll bar to the right or left using the mouse. In this way you
can run back and forth through the values range (1 - 5), or
by clicking on the left-hand or right-hand arrow on the scroll bar. In this way you can in-
crease or decrease the number of selections.
Programming the transformation table 6

Specifying the output values
Position the mouse pointer over the ends of the transformation lines of each section. The ends
are marked with small horizontal lines. A vertical double arrow will then appear on the screen.
Click on the left-hand mouse key and move the arrow upwards or downwards. This will move
the selected end of the transformation line and the numerical value will be displayed at OUT
Begin or OUT End.
Selecting the section limits

The graphical representation in Fig. 6.5 - 19 shows section limits with the ranges 0 - 126, 127 -
255 and so on. You can change these section limits if you wish. However limits 0 and 255 are
permanently allocated and cannot therefore be moved.
Position the mouse pointer on a section limit (but not 0 and 255). A horizontal double arrow will
appear on the screen. Hold down the lefthand mouse pointer and use it to drag the section limit
in the direction you want. The corresponding numerical value will be displayed at IN:.
265
Once you have programmed your transformation table you can quit the option box by clicking
on Accept or Cancel. If you have not managed to obtain a satisfactory result, click on Default.
Notes on using the transformation tables to set the contrast sensitivity 6

Select up to 3 sections.
The range of values for the individual sections should be at least 75.
Program the ranges so that no jumps occur at the range limits.

Set the contrast sensitivity so that the shape of the curve roughly corresponds to one of the
three following examples:
Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures 6

Select the following settings for lighter PCBs or fiducials in order to suppress defective struc-
tures.
6
Fig. 6.5 - 20 Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures
266
Setting the contrast sensitivity to intensify low-contrast fiducials 6

Select the following settings for low-contrast fiducials in order to intensify the contrast:
6
Fig. 6.5 - 21 Setting the contrast sensitivity to intensify low-contrast fiducials
267
Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures and intensify the contrast at
the same time 6
Select the following settings to suppress defective structures and at the same time to intensify
the contrast for low-contrast fiducials:
6
to intensify the contrast at the same time
268
6.5.6 Test Fiducial Menu
In the Test fiducial menu the following options are available: 6
Centering the fiducial (Center)

Testing the fiducial (Test)
Positioning the teaching gantry (X/Y movement) (move X/Y axes)
Transporting the board onto the output conveyor (PCB to output conveyor)
Transporting the board onto the processing conveyor (PCB to processing conveyor)
Fig. 6.5 - 23 Test fiducial menu, options
NOTE 6
The Center and Test options will only be available if you have already loaded a fiducial and a
model already exists for this fiducial.
If you have selected a fiducial the fiducial number and the fiducial name will appear in the display
field. 6
269
6.5.6.1 Center Option
If you click on the Center button the Test fiducial menu will close and the video image is shown
on the screen. The picture shows the 2D fiducial structure and the rows and columns profiles of
the 1D structure used for determining precisely the center of the fiducial. Header and footer will
be shown as well. 6
Center fiducial Fiducial No. = 8 Edge = left
Fiducial Result: Centering crosshair
Column profile
of fiducial
Edge line markings to be shifted Row profile of fiducial

via cursor keys
Ret : Edge ok : up : right

: dn : left
Fig. 6.5 - 24 Test fiducial menu, Center video image
The Center function determines via software the center of the fiducial. The parameters for the
function, the edges of the fiducial structure, are selected via a dialog. The system draws edge line
markings as suggestions at possible edge positions. 6
With the arrow keys shift the current edge line marking designated in the header.
With Return you can accept the position of the suggested edge line marking or the one whose
position you changed. The system will then show you the next edge line marking. The se-
quence in which testing takes place is Fiducial edge left, Fiducial edge right, Fiducial edge
top, and lastly, Fiducial edge bottom. This notation appears in the header.
270
The results of fiducial centering are indicated by a cross. The X and Y offset values of the fiducial
center will be entered in the fiducial data field. 6
PLEASE NOTE 6
An incorrectly centered fiducial will cause a placement offset.
Press the Esc key to quit the option and return to the Test fiducial menu.
6.5.6.2 Test Option
If you click on the Test button the Test fiducial menu will close and the video image be displayed
on the screen. 6
Test fiducial Fiducial No. = 8 Quality fact. = 70
x/y step width = ...
Ret : test : x axis + : y axis +

1..6 : x/y step : x axis - : y axis -
Fig. 6.5 - 25 Test fiducial menu, Test video image
The dimensions of the pattern structure and search area are stored in the station computer. These
figures are required for calculating the travel path for the corners test. The centering offsets of any
fiducial centering which may already have been carried out will also be taken into account in cal-
culating the travel path. 6
271
Following this 6
the test will be shown on the video display as it runs,
the header will be shown with the option, the fiducial number and the quality factor, and
in the footer the operator fields and command sequences will be shown and a test started
which determines the fiducials quality factor.
By pressing the Return key you can repeat the test procedure.
You can change the position of the gantry with the arrow keys. By entering the numbers 1 - 6
you can change the step width.
The PCB camera travels into the 4 corners of the search area, and each time, issues a measure-
ment command. For each measurement command, the machine controller is provided with the fi-
ducial quality by the vision analysis unit (MVS). The worst value (which is the worst case) of the
test is displayed on the screen in the header. 6
The quality value is a figure between 0 (= bad) and 100 (= very good) and should not fall below
the value 40 for the fiducial and the ink dot. If it does, we recommend you choose another fidu-
cial. 6
272
6.5.6.3 Move X/ Y Axes Option
When you select this option from the Test fiducial menu, the station computer will have the fol-
lowing actions carried out: 6
The screen will close the Test fiducial menu and will switch over to the video image. At the
same time the current camera position will be displayed and the operator field option dropped
down.
If there is the risk of a gantry/head crash, the axis controllers will be blocked.
Move x/y axes
x/y step width = x pos. cam = y pos. cam =
1..6: x/y step : x axis + : y axis +

: x axis - : y axis -
Fig. 6.5 - 26 Test fiducial menu, Move X/Y axes video image
After selecting the step width (by choosing a number between 1 and 6) you can use the arrow
keys to change the camera position of gantry 1.
With Esc you can quit the option. The Test fiducial menu will be displayed again.
273
6.5.6.4 PCB to Processing Conveyor Option
Click on the PCB to processing conveyor button and the following actions will be executed: 6
(1) There is a board on the input conveyor.
The conveyor belt starts and conveys the board as far as the stopper.
The board will be clamped.
(2) There is no board on the input conveyor.
The message appears: No PCB on the input conveyor.
Insert a board.
Click on the PCB to processing conveyor button.
The conveyor belt starts and conveys the board as far as the stopper.
The board will be clamped.
NOTE 6
If there is already a board on the processing conveyor, this function will be blocked. You will
then see a message informing you that there is already a board on the processing conveyor.6
NOTE 6
If a twin conveyor is installed you can use the buttons in the option box Conv. selection to
select conveyor 1 or conveyor 2. 6
6.5.6.5 PCB to Output Conveyor Option
This function will only be executed when there is a board on the processing conveyor. 6
NOTE 6
When you quit the menu, the board will be transported automatically onto the output conveyor.
NOTE 6
If a twin conveyor is installed, you can use the buttons in the option box Conv. selection to select
conveyor 1 or conveyor 2.
274
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.6 Test Component
6.6 Test Component
6.6.1 Test Component Flow Chart
The Test component flow chart shows in graphic form all menu options together with their sub-
functions. The menus are indicated by being bordered with a solid line, while the option boxes use
a dash-dotted line and the input boxes a dotted line. 6
6.6.2 Information on the Test Component Flow Chart
6.6.2.1 Menus
The Test component option includes the following menus: 6
Select package form
Test component
The Save component name option box will drop down every time you wish to quit the Test com-
ponent menu, having previously generated or modified GF data. This gives you the choice of ei-
ther saving or discarding the GF data in question. 6
You can quit the individual menus by clicking on either the icons of another menu or on the Main
view icon. 6
6.6.2.2 Input Boxes, Option Boxes
For data input, displaying values and initiating actions the system offers the following input boxes:6
Measure mode
Adjust contrast sensitivity
Select component type (F machines only)
You can quit the input boxes by clicking on OK, Accept or Cancel. 6
Click on OK or Accept to have the program save the data. The box will then close.
Click on the Cancel button to discard the data, after which the input box will close.
6.6.2.3 Buttons
The system provides the following buttons for selecting options: 6
Load GF data
Once you have selected the component you want from the lists field, click onto the Load GF
data button. The package form parameters will be loaded.
275
6.6 Test Component Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Save GF data
The generated package form parameters will be saved when you click on this button.
Pick up
The placement head picks up the selected component.
6.6.2.4 Video Images
In certain situations, the camera image of the MVS system (vision analysis unit) is displayed on
the screen of the station computer. The screen will also contain a header and footers: 6
The header may contain, for example, the currently selected menu option, the package form
number, analysis criteria, measurement results, and so on.
The footers will contain command sequences, keyboard commands, camera coordinates and
so on.
You can always quit video image screens by pressing the Esc key. The current menu window will
then reappear. 6
6.6.2.5 Messages
Messages are text fields which contain information regarding actions, warnings and so on. They
will appear under the following circumstances: 6
incorrect operator actions.
requests to the operator to carry out certain actions (for example, input package form number).
information (for example, board is being disposed of).
to indicate the system is busy performing an action (for example, package form data being
saved).
276
Test component menu options
Main view menu
Main view
Set-up
Error
Feeders
Gantry 1 functions
Gantry 2 functions
PCB transport 2
PCB transport 1
Teach fiducial
Test component
Yes
SITEST
GEM
Package
Package Discard
form is
form is saved component
restored
Test component
No menu option
Yes
Main view
Save Package form

No Yes Markenauswahl
Select package form
GF data edited?
Test component
Save edited GF data

option box
Fig. 6.6 - 1 Test component flow chart - Test component menu option
277
Select package form menu
Select
package form
Select
A package form
Save Load
GF data package form
If there is a
component on
the nozzle, it will
Camera type be discarded.
The station
computer
requests GF file
12 seg. *) Pick & Place from the line
Default Flip-chip *)
revolver head head *) computer and
loads it down to
the MVS.
*) Applies to F machines in the case that the component is to be centered not only using the standard
camera type (Default) but also another camera type.
Fig. 6.6 - 2 Test component flow chart - Select package form menu
278
Test component menu
Test component
GF data Select package

No
loaded? form menu A
Yes
Pickup
Component
Pickup
component from
feeder and rotate
it underneath the
component
camera
Test Measure Display Store image Evaluation time
Video image Video image Video image Video image
Video image is
Perform GF- Measure saved on hard
specific meas. package form. Display synthetic disk of MC Evaluation time
steps one after Display meas. description controller
the other results
ESC ESC ESC ESC
Fig. 6.6 - 3 Test component flow chart, Test component menu, Component menu item
279

Edit GF data menu
Test component
GF data Select package

No form menu
loaded? A
Edit package form data Yes
Package Pin Measure

Illumination Transform Ball image
dimension dimension mode
Video image Video image Video image Video image See menu
options Test
Modification Modification Modification Modification component,
of of of of from Figs.
GF data GF data GF data GF data 6.6-5 to 6.6-8
Cancel Accept
ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC
Input box
Select contrast graduation:
Cancel
Program LUT
Accept data
Fig. 6.6 - 4 Test component flow chart - Edit GF data menu
280

Measure mode menu
Measure mode menu
SIZE measure
Cancel
Accept
SIZE Set
mode menu
Cancel
Accept
ROW measure
ROW Set
mode menu
Cancel
Accept
CORNER measure
CORNER Set mode menu
Cancel
Accept
Measure LEAD measure
LEAD Set
mode mode menu
Cancel
GRID measure
Accept
GRID Set
mode menu
Cancel
Accept
Cancel
Accept
BALL measure
BALL Set
mode menu
Hex input
SIZE ROW CORNER LEAD GRID BALL
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
P2
P2 P1 P1a P2 P1a
P3
P2a P1a P2 P3 P2
P4
P3 P5 P2a P3a P3_5
Cancel Accept
Measure mode 2
menu
Fig. 6.6 - 5 Test component flow chart, Test component menu option - Measure mode menu
281

SIZE measure mode menu
Resolution of Method for calculation of

angle calculation rotation
low Automatic
medium selection
high SWIN method
very high TWIN method
Integration Resolution in Resolution in direction

direction measurement direction of integration
In X direction low low

in Y direction medium medium
high high
very high very high
Integration settings of Cancel Accept

SIZE meas. mode menu
Fig. 6.6 - 6 Test component flow chart, SIZE measure mode menu
282

ROW measure mode and CORNER measure mode menus
ROW measure mode menu
ROW measure mode menu -

Use package integration settings
Measurement
form edges
Tip measurement
For the
via inner tips Resolution in Resolution in
rotational
windows meas. direction direction of
Center integration
measurement low
For the
medium low
translational
Tip measurement high medium
windows
via outer tips very high high
very high
Cancel Accept
Cancel Accept
CORNER measure mode menu
No. of pins to be measured Angle measurement

Measurement
at each corner activated
Tip measurement
via inner tips One window
across the whole
Center lead window
Yes/No
measurement
No. of pins
Tip measurement at each corner
via outer tips
Cancel Accept
Fig. 6.6 - 7 Test component flow chart, ROW and CORNER measure mode menus
283

LEAD, GRID, and BALL measure mode menus
LEAD measure mode menu
Measurement Window
Tip measurement
via inner tips
Separately
for each pin
Center
measurement
Combined
windows
Tip measurement
via outer tips
Cancel Accept
GRID measure mode menu BALL measure mode menu
Measurement Evaluation
Number of Position
balls to be Fast and
measured existance
Robust
Quality
Cancel Accept
Cancel Accept
Fig. 6.6 - 8 Test component flow chart, LEAD, GRID, and BALL meas. modes
284
6.6.3 Select Package Form Menu
If you select the Test component option in the Main view menu, the following actions will occur: 6
The functions for the vision system are activated in the station computer
The Select package form menu will drop down.
The station computer will determine the package form numbers list with commentaries from
the set-up.
Fig. 6.6 - 9 Select package form menu
The menu allows you to choose between the following options, as the diagram shows: 6
Selection of the camera types (F machines only).
Load GF data
Save GF data
NOTE 6
285
The Load GF data button will, for example, only be active if you have previously clicked on a
package form in the lists field.
The Save GF data button will only be active if you have changed the package form parameters.
You can switch from the Test component menu to the Main menu at any time in order to start
actions such as "Fill track" etc. The settings in the Test component menu will be retained, which
means that the same conditions will be set up when you return to the Test component menu. 6
However, if you have changed the fiducial data or taught a new fiducial, and then switch from the
Main menu to the Test component, Single functions, SITEST or Continue placement menu,
the Save fiducial data selection box will appear when you leave the Teach fiducial option. You
can then either save the modified or new data or delete it. 6
By selecting the Save GF data option you cause the station computer to send the package form
data to the line computer, where it is saved. The modified package form data is updated in the
remaining stations as well. The next time a cluster is loaded the modified GF data is sent to all
stations in the line. 6
Fig. 6.6 - 10 Save GF data option box
286
6.6.3.1 Camera Type Option
NOTE 6
The buttons for selecting the different camera types can only be used with the F machines.
Fig. 6.6 - 11 Select package form menu, Camera type option
Select the camera type if the component is to be centered with another camera type, in addition
to the default camera.
6
287
6.6.3.2 Load GF data Option
NOTE 6
When you call the Load GF data option, first of all the Save GF data box will drop down, pro-
vided that you have already processed a package form (see Fig. 6.6 - 10).
Fig. 6.6 - 12 Select package form menu, Load GF data package
If you wish to save your data, the package form file will be transmitted to the line computer. Fol-
lowing this inquiry the component which has just been processed will be rejected and the package
form number list updated. 6
From the list field use the mouse pointer to select a particular package form. The selected
package form will appear against a cyan-colored bar.
Click on the Load GF data button. In the Package form display field the package form and the
package form will be displayed.
The station computer will request the package form data of the selected package form from the
line computer. The interpreter edits the data and generates the teaching command. With this com-
mand the edited package form data is loaded into the MVS system (vision analysis unit). 6
288
6.6.3.3 Save GF data Option
Using this option you can save package forms together with their changed parameters. The button
will only be active after you have modified the package form data. 6
Fig. 6.6 - 13 Select package form menu, Save GF data option
289
6.6.4 Test Component Menu
If you click on the Test component icon the corresponding menu will drop down. As the diagram
shows, the following options, organized by group, are available to you: 6
Component Edit GF data 6
Pick up Illumination
Display Package dimension
Test Pin dimension
Measure Ball illustration
Store image Transform
Evaluat. time Select component type (F machines only)
Measure mode 6
NOTE 6
If you have not yet loaded a package form all options will be inactive. 6
From the Select package form menu load a package form (see Section 6.6.3 on page 285).
The loaded package form will be displayed in the Package form display field with package
form number, package form name, and camera type. All options are accessible with the excep-
tion of Test, Measure, Store image and Evaluat. time. The Component type option is re-
served for the F machines only.
290
Fig. 6.6 - 14 Test component menu, options
291
6.6.4.1 Pick Up Component Option
NOTE 6
Before you can activate this option you must have already loaded a package form number. If this
is not the case, the button will remain inactive.
Fig. 6.6 - 15 Test component menu, Pick up component option
When this option is activated the following actions are started: 6
A component is picked up from a specific track.
If there already is a component beneath the component camera, it will be discarded.
The options Test and Measure can be clicked on.
292
6.6.4.2 Display Component Option
NOTE 6
Before you can activate this option you must have already loaded a package form number.
Fig. 6.6 - 16 Test component menu, Display component option
The teach command will be given.
The vision system generates the outside contours of the component from the synthetic descrip-
tion.
The video image with the real camera image and the model overlaid on it will be displayed on
the screen.
The header with commentaries is displayed.
The operator can now check the synthetic description visually against the real component. 6
293
Display component GF No. = 5
Fig. 6.6 - 17 Test component menu, Display component video image
Use Esc to end the function. The video image disappears and the Test component menu is
displayed once more.
294
6.6.4.3 Test Component Option
NOTE 6
This option can only be activated if you have already loaded a package form number and a com-
ponent has been picked up.
With this option you can check the centering procedure. Every time a measuring step has been
carried out the procedure is stopped for you to check the function individually. The measurement
results are displayed on the screen but not saved. 6
Fig. 6.6 - 18 Test component menu, Test component option
The measurement procedure is activated.
The video image appears on the screen.
The header and footers are displayed.
295
Test component GF no. = 5
RET: Test component
Fig. 6.6 - 19 Test component menu, Test component video image
With the Return key you can call all defined individual steps in the measurement procedure
one after the other. Each time you press the Return key another measurement step is carried
out and the results shown on the screen.
Use Esc to quit the option. The video image closes and the Test component menu reappears.
296
6.6.4.4 Measure Component Option
NOTE 6
This option can only be activated if you have already loaded a package form number and a com-
ponent has been picked up.
Fig. 6.6 - 20 Test component menu, Measure component option
The video image appears on the screen.
The measurement command is given, using the predefined parameters.
The MVS performs each component-specific measurement step in turn.
The measurement values are displayed in the video image.
297
Measure component GF No. = 5
P.dev.[mm] = Spacing[mm] =
No. of pins = ... Orthogon = ... Length[mm] = ... Width[mm] = ...
X offset = ... Y offset = ... Phi = ... Quality fact. = ...
RET: Measure component
Fig. 6.6 - 21 Test component menu, Measure component video image
Optical surveying of conventional components with lead connections 6

The crosshairs indicate the components center. The component outlines are emphasized in color. 6
The measured values represent the geometric component parameters such as 6
Lead skew
The value for lead skew will be indicated if you have selected the lead or ball measurement
mode.
Pitch
The value for pitch will be indicated if the corner measurement mode is active as the last mea-
surement step.
Number of leads
X / Y offset
Orthogonality
Dimensions of the component
Skew and
Factor for the quality of measurement.
298
Use Esc to quit this option. The video image disappears and the Test component menu is dis-
played once more on the screen. 6
Color overlays of the individual measurement steps during step mode 6

1. Size mode 6
See Section 6.6.4.14 on page 323 for a definition of the measuring methods. 6
You can recognize this measurement method by rotating windows around the component edges 6
Procedure: 6
(1) Inside the search window, profiles are created in the X and Y directions. With the aid of the
gradients thus formed and a geometric filter, the approximate position of the component is
determined.
(2) Windows rotate around the components edges. The profile and gradients are determined for
each window. The sum of the gradients is an indication of the agreement of the window angle
with the position of the component.
If the sum of the gradients reaches a maximum, the angular position of the component has
been determined.
(3) Under the angle determined in step (2) the first step (1) is repeated. Now it will be possible
to determine the position of the component in the X and Y-directions more accurately.
Rectangles:
green:X and Y- pick-up tolerances 6
orange:component dimensions and tolerances supplied by the station 6
blue: search area for position recognition 6
Comments 6
1. The position of the component as determined must be within the green rectangle
otherwise the component will not be placed. 6
Applies to all measurement steps! 6
2. The component must be located within the orange window. Otherwise the measurement
results will not be dependable. 6
3. The search areas should have the same alignment as the component and also be larger
than the component. 6
299
Lines: 6
red: Edges of the component detected 6
Comments: 6
The red lines may often be covered by others and thus possibly not detectable. 6
Overlay: 6
gray:Profile in the integration direction in question 6
blue: Gradients from the above profiles 6
yellow:Results from the geometric filter 6
red: Interpolation limits for position determination 6
light blue:Results of interpolation -> Position 6
Comments: 6
The results of interpolation should be found around the maximum of the geometric filter. 6
Cross: 6
white:Results of position recognition -> X and Y-angles 6
Diagram: 6
Results function of the angle search (rotating windows). 6
Comments: 6
The minimum (corresponds to the maximum of the sum of the gradients) indicates the non-
interpolated angular position. The final results (via interpolation) are indicated by a light blue
line. The precision of the diagram is limited by the resolution of the monitor. 6
2. Row mode
You can recognize this measurement method by the presence of windows around the central lead
of a row of leads. 6
Procedure: 6
(1) Position recognition takes place by creating a profile vertical to the direction of the rows. In
this way the edges of the component are determined.
(2) With two additional windows the angular position of the component can be determined.
6
300
Rectangles: 6
green:X and Y- pick-up tolerances 6
light blue:A. 2 to 4 search windows for position recognition. These are positioned
around the central lead of each row of leads.
B. 2 additional search windows for angular measurement. The two
windows are located on the same row of leads. 6
Star: 6
orange:Results of approximate search 6
Comments: 6
The star indicates the position in the direction of the leads. Depending on which measure-
ment algorithm has been selected the middle or the tip of the lead will be displayed. 6
Cross:
brown:Residual angle tolerance for subsequent measurement steps 6
Overlay: 6
light blue:Results of interpolation -> position 6
3. Corner Mode 6
This measurement method can be recognized by the windows around the entire row of leads. 6
Procedure: 6
Determine the position in the direction of the leads in the light blue window
Determine the position vertically to this in the dark blue window
Calculate the position of each lead group and thus of the component
6
301
Rectangles: 6
light blue:Search window for the position in the direction of the leads 6
dark blue:Search window for the position vertically to this 6
green:X and Y-tolerances 6
Star: 6
orange:Results: Location of the group in question 6
Comments: 6
Depending on which measurement algorithm was selected the middle or the end of the lead
group in the direction of the leads will be shown. 6
Cross: 6
white:Results of position recognition -> X and Y- angles 6
Overlays: 6
Comments: 6
The overlay will be provided for both the light blue and the dark blue search window. 6
4. Lead mode 6
This measurement method can be recognized by 6
either there being a window around a leads group (combined window, preset value)
or there being a window around every single lead (separate window). You can modify the win-
dow types separate or combined window in the Measure mode Lead menu.
Procedure: 6
Each lead will be measured in a way similar to corner mode or the entire leads group will be mea-
sured. 6
302
Rectangles: 6
dark blue:search window around the entire leads group or around every 6
light blue:search window around the first lead in a group 6
green:X and Y-tolerances 6
Cross: 6
white:Results of position recognition X and Y-angles 6
Overlay:
The gradients are only required and displayed for the profiles in the
direction of the leads. 6
Comments: 6
An overlay is available for both directions of interpolation. 6
Optical measurement of BGAs and flip-chips with the F placement machine 6

The crosshairs indicate the position of the component in the camera coordinates system. The
outline of the component will be emphasized by the use of color. 6
The measured values represent geometric component parameters such as 6
position in the camera coordinates system
rotation angle
maximum offset of the balls in X and Y-directions
factor for the quality of measurement
1. Grid mode 6
Grid mode works with preset pattern tolerances and is therefore to be regarded as the first mea-
surement step in the optical surveying of BGAs and flip-chips. To ascertain the approximate posi-
tion it will be adequate to measure just a few connections. 6
303
The number of balls to be measured and the pattern tolerances define the size of the search win-
dow. The rough position and the skew of the component are determined for each corner of the
component via a search window. This measurement method can be identified by 6
the synthetic model being shown in pixel resolution at the lefthand edge of the video image,
and
the 4 windows at the corners of the component.
Procedure: 6
The algorithm defines 4 dark blue corner windows on the basis of the pattern tolerances and
the balls defined in the package form file. The default search value is 5 balls.
A detection algorithm runs with the aim of detecting all balls corresponding to this type. Those
found will be marked with light blue crosses.
The balls defined in the package form file are determined by the search algorithm. The balls
found are marked with a white outline. If defined balls are not found an error message will ap-
pear on the screen.
From these data the rough position and the skew of the component are determined. The mea-
sured position of the component is marked with white crosshairs.
Rectangle: 6
dark blue:4 search windows, depending on the pattern tolerances and

the number of balls 6
Cross: 6
white:Ball model candidates found 6
Overlays: 6
white:Balls found which are defined in the package form file 6
Crosshairs: 6
Star: 6
white:Center of the component -> Position 6
Synthetic model representation at the lefthand edge of the video image: 6
Image: Model in pixel resolution 6
304
Points marked with red plus signs (+): 6
outside the circle:

Contrast < 0, ball is darker than the background 6
within the circle:

Contrast > 0, ball is lighter than the background 6
Points marked with yellow minus signs (-): 6
The difference between the plus and minus signs represents

the radial tolerance. 6
2. Ball mode 6
The method works with high precision and is thus suitable for precisely determining the position
of all defined balls. As a higher precision search, ball mode will follow grid mode. 6
This measurement method can be identified 6
by the synthetic model being shown in pixel resolution at the lefthand edge of the video image,
by there being a window around every ball (separate window) or
Procedure: 6
All of the balls defined in the package form file are surveyed. Geometric criteria are used here in
the selection of the window mode: 6
If the balls are relatively far apart the separate window mode will be selected. The default win-
dow mode is the separate window mode.
Window: 6
dark blue:Over a single ball in each case (separate window) 6
Over a row or over all balls (combined window) 6
Cross: 6
white:Measured ball candidates which are defined in the package form file. 6
Crosshairs: 6
Star: 6
white:Position of the component 6
305
Synthetic ball model representation 6
in pixel resolution on the lefthand edge of the video image 6
A description will be found in the Grid mode section. 6
6.6.4.5 Store image Option
NOTE 6
You cannot click on this option until a package form number has been loaded.
Fig. 6.6 - 22 Test component menu, Store image option
This menu is used to store the generated video image as a file on the hard disk of the machine
controller. The file name and path are preset to: 6
D:\TMP\MVSBILD.MVS 6
For further analysis at Siemens AG, copy the file from the hard disk of the MVS controller onto a
diskette and send it to the PL EA Service Department. 6
306
6.6.4.6 Evaluat. time Option
NOTE 6
You cannot click on this option until a package form number has been loaded.
Fig. 6.6 - 23 Test component menu, Evaluat. time option
This option is used to display the evaluation time for a selected component. Once you have acti-
vated the function, the following actions are started: 6
The measuring procedure is activated.
The video image appears on the screen
The evaluation time is overlaid.
307
Evaluation time GF No. = 5
Evaluation time [ms] =

RET: Measure component
Fig. 6.6 - 24 Test component menu, Evaluat. time video image
Press the RETURN key to start the measurement. Once the measuring procedure has ended,
the measuring time in msec is overlaid.
Press ESC to leave the option. The video image will disappear and the Test component menu
will appear once more.
6.6.4.7 Information on the Group of Edit GF Data Options
The following options belong to the Edit GF data group of options: 6
Lighting
Package dimensions
Lead dimensions
Ball illustration
Transformation table
Select component type (F machines only)
Measure mode
308
The GF or package form file is stored in the line computer. Basically it consists of two main parts:6
the geometric package form data and
the sensor-specific data.
The sensor-specific part contains 6
the measurement conditions for the component,
the type of lighting and
the transformation table data.
NOTE 6
The buttons of the options of the Test component menu will only be active if you have already
loaded a package form.
Fig. 6.6 - 25 Test component menu, options
309
This menu allows you to change 6
the lead dimensions,
the package dimensions,
the ball imaging parameters,
the illumination parameters and,
the transformation table.
Lead dimension parameters are
optical lead length in the X and Y-directions of the component
optically lead width in the X and Y-directions of the component
NOTE 6
The pitch and number of leads can only be changed in the line computer. 6
Package dimension parameters are
the outside dimensions of the component in millimeters in the X and Y-directions. Outside
dimensions means the optical dimensions of the component including the lead dimensions.
The geometric dimensions of the leads and component are stored in the GF file in the line
computer. Depending on the geometry of the component and on its illumination by the com-
ponent camera, it is possible that imaging errors may occur. The image does not reproduce
the life-size geometric dimensions but reduces them. This is what is called imaging reduc-
tion. For this reason one refers to the optical dimensions of the leads and component. Set
the component dimensions in a way that they match the visible component outline. The re-
duction factor is entered in the "Real-MA" file. 6
As regards defining the position of the origin of the coordinates system and defining regular and
irregular components, please refer to Section 6.3.3 on page 232. 6
Ball imaging parameters are
inner and outer radius type
inner and outer radius (usually not used)
contrast
ball model
310
Illumination parameters are
the contrast in the image
the X plane, flat, middle and steep illumination levels for illuminating the component
(brightness control).
Color representation parameters (5 sections)
10 parameter IN values
10 parameter OUT values
The parameters are stored in the GF file in the line computer. Upon request the GF file will be sent
to the station computer. Finally it will be converted and transferred to the MVS controller. 6
If you modify a parameter, it will be entered in the x.SST file. The x.SST file will be converted and
loaded into the MVS controller. 6
6.6.4.8 Illumination Option
When this option is selected the video image for checking and setting illumination will appear. 6
Illumination GF No. = 5
Illuminat. = flat/middle/steep Brightness = 0 ... 255 Field step =
RET: Test component : Brightness up Blank: step width

Tab: Illumination : Brightness down
Fig. 6.6 - 26 Test component menu, Illumination video image
311
You can use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the brightness of the rows of LEDs in the
component camera system which illuminate the component. The brightness can be set within
a range of 256 steps with 255 being the maximum value.
Use the spacebar to toggle the step size for changing the brightness from 1 to 10 m and back.
Use the tab key to move between the three illumination levels: steep (top row of LEDs), me-
dium (second row of LEDs) and flat (third row of LEDs) camera lighting.
Press the Return key to execute the individual measurement steps which are included in the
measurement conditions.
With Esc you can quit the option. You will then be returned to the Test component menu.
6
NOTE 6
Sections 6.7.6 and 6.7.7, from page 347 contain instructions for selecting the illumination param-
eters.
312
6.6.4.9 Package Dimension Option
There is potential for the occurrence of an effect called image reduction mainly with cylindrical
components, with PLCCs, BGAs and BGAs. The reduction is caused by the round features of
the components that deflect incident light away from the camera sensor. Typically, the round
edges then become invisible to the camera. To remedy this problem, use the Package Dimension
option to change the optical package width and length to accommodate for the loss. 6
Package dimension GF No. = 5
Pack. side = opt. l.[mm] = ... opt. w.[mm] = ...

RET: Test component : larger
Blank: Pack. side : smaller
Fig. 6.6 - 27 Test component menu, Package dimension video image
With the arrow keys you can change the length and width of the component. The current geo-
metric data will be displayed (see description on page 310).
Use the spacebar to select different sides of the component.
With the Return key you can trigger the individual measurement steps which are specified in
the measurement conditions.
Press Esc to quit the option.
313
6.6.4.10 Pin Dimension Option
Use this option to change the optical pin width and length. In addition, the pin contrast can be
changed if imaging reduction results in the pins not being dependably recognized. 6
Pin dimension GF No. = 5
Pin definition = 1..n opt. l. [mm] = ... opt. w. [mm] = ... Pin contrast =
Pin side =
RET: Test component Blank: pin side : larger + : contrast +

Tab: Pin model : smaller : contrast
Fig. 6.6 - 28 Test component menu, Pin dimension option
Use the tabulator key to select the pin model.

With the spacebar select the side of the pin.
Use the + and - keys to raise or lower the pin contrast.
The arrow keys are used for changing the pin width and length. The component will appear as
a silhouette on the screen together with the updated geometric pin data.
the measurement conditions for the specified component.
6
Press Esc to cancel the option, even if not all measurement steps have been carried out. You will
then be returned to the Test component menu. 6
314
6.6.4.11 Ball Image Option
With this option you can change the ball model description. 6
Ball image GF no. = 5
Rad. type: intern./extern. Rad. e.[mm] = 1.500 Contrast a. = 10

Ball model = 1 Rad. i.[mm] = 0.500 Contrast i. = 20
RET: Test comp. : larger + : Contrast + Blank: Radius type

Tab: Ball model : smaller - : Contrast -
Fig. 6.6 - 29 Test component menu, Ball image video image
Use the tabulator key to select the ball model.

With the spacebar select the radius type - inner or outer radius.
Use the arrow keys to enlarge or reduce the internal or external radius of the ball. The balls will
be displayed in their geometric dimensions as a pixel image on the lefthand edge of the video
image.
The value of the inner radius the ball shape:
If the inner radius is equal to 0, the ball will take the form of a circle.
If the inner radius is greater than 0, the ball will take the form of a doughnut (not frequently
used).
Use the + or - keys to increase or reduce the ball contrast.

Select ball contrast > 0, if the ball is lighter than the background.
Select ball contrast < 0, if the ball is darker than the background.
the measurement conditions for the specified component.
315
Press Esc to cancel the option, even if not all measurement steps have been carried out. You
will then be returned to the Test component menu.
6.6.4.12 Transform ... Option
When you activate this option, the Select contrast sensitivity option box will open. 6
Scroll bar
Scroll field
Fig. 6.6 - 30 Test component menu, Select contrast sensitivity option box
You can select the following parameters: 6
Number of sections which contain the transformation table: number between 1 and 5
Selection of value pairs: with 5 sections 10 pairs of values are permitted.
Layout of the Select contrast sensitivity option box: 6

Numerical presentation of the table 6
The numerical values are indicated in the upper part of the option box. These are: 6
Section: Number of sections 6
OUT Begin: OUT End: Ranges of values for the transformation of the individual sections 6
IN: Range limits of the individual sections 6
316
Graphic presentation of the table 6

In the diagram 6
the abscissae (X-axis) represent the input values range, subdivided into sections.
the ordinates (Y-axis) represent the output values with their color allocation.
Buttons 6
Accept
Click on the Accept button to save the settings. The option box will then close.
Cancel
With Cancel you can discard the settings. The option box will then close.
Help
With the Help button you can access explanatory material regarding the on-screen presenta-
tion.
Number input field
You can choose the number of sections
by entering the numerical value directly into the display field, or

by moving the scroll field in the scroll bar to the right or left using the mouse. In this way you
can run back and forth through the values range (1 - 5), or
by clicking on the lefthand or right-hand arrow on the scroll bar. In this way you can increase
or decrease the number of selections.
Programming the transformation table 6

Specifying the output values
Position the mouse pointer over the ends of the transformation lines of each section. The ends
are marked with small horizontal lines. A vertical double arrow will then appear on the screen.
Click on the lefthand mouse key and move the arrow upwards or downwards. This will move
the selected end of the transformation line and the numerical value will be displayed at OUT
Begin or OUT End.
Selecting the section limits
The graphical representation in Fig. 6.6 - 30 on page 316 shows section limits with the ranges
0 - 128, 129 - 255 and so on. You can change these section limits if you wish. However limits
0 and 255 are permanently allocated and cannot therefore be moved.
Position the mouse pointer on a section limit (but not 0 and 255). A horizontal double arrow will
appear on the screen. Hold down the lefthand mouse pointer and use it to drag the section limit
in the direction you want. The corresponding numerical value will be displayed at IN:.
Once you have programmed your transformation table you can quit the option box by clicking
on Accept or Cancel.
317
Notes on using the transformation tables to set the contrast sensitivity 6

Select up to 3 sections.
The range of values for the individual sections should be at least 75.
Program the ranges so that no jumps occur at the range limits.

Set the contrast sensitivity so that the shape of the curve roughly corresponds to one of the
three following examples:
Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures 6

Select the following settings to suppress the defective structures that can start from bases, la-
bels, the body of components and nozzles, for example.
6
Fig. 6.6 - 31 Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures
318
Setting the contrast sensitivity to intensify the contrast for low-contrast components 6
Select the following settings for low-contrast components in order to intensify the contrast:
6
Fig. 6.6 - 32 Setting the contrast sensitivity to intensify the contrast for low-contrast components
319
Setting the contrast sensitivity to suppress defective structures and intensify the contrast at
the same time 6
Select the following settings to suppress defective structures and at the same time to intensify
the contrast for low-contrast components:
6
to intensify the contrast at the same time
320
6.6.4.13 Measure Mode Option
NOTE 6
This option can only be activated when a GF number has been loaded.
In this menu you can manipulate the measurement conditions. The menu options are primarily in-
tended for the description of non-standard components. 6
This option allows you to 6
select and activate a particular measurement method or combination of several measurement

methods
deactivate individual measurement methods, and
change the parameters belonging to each measurement method.
6
The hex parameters for the individual measuring methods can be modified in two ways: 6
either indirectly, i.e. menu-driven

You will be guided by the package form manipulator by means of setting menus and explana-
tory text in order to obtain the desired measuring results quickly and accurately.
or directly, i.e. you enter the necessary hex parameters directly into the Measuring mode 2
input box.
NOTE 6
Please note that entering the hex values directly requires considerable knowledge of the
measuring method sequence.
If you intend to enter or modify hex values directly, please contact Siemens Service first and
do not enter the bit-coded hex values until you have spoken to the Service Department.
We recommend that you generally use the menu-driven package form manipulator. 6
321
Measuring mode menu 6

Click on the Measuring mode field to call up the Measuring mode menu. 6
Fig. 6.6 - 34 Test component menu, Meas. mode option
In the left column of the box, the desired measuring method can be activated or deactivated by
clicking with the mouse. A cross indicates that you have activated the measuring method. The
Setting' field for calling up the sub-menu changes from grey to black.
Use the Hex input field to call up the Measuring mode 2 input menu for directly entering hex
values. Please follow the instructions on page 321.
Select Accept to close the Measuring mode menu. The modified measuring conditions will
be entered into the package form file on the station computer.
Select Abort to interrupt the operation without transferring the data and to return to the Test
component menu.
322
6.6.4.14 Information on Measurement Modes
As far as conventional components with lead connections are concerned, component centering is
essentially based on four measurement methods used to determine the position (X and Y-coordi-
nates, = skew) of the component and the lead parameters: 6
Size mode
Row mode
Corner mode
Lead mode
For BGAs (Ball Grid Arrays) and flip-chips new algorithms have been implemented in order to de-
termine the position (X and Y-coordinates, = skew) of the component and the ball parameters
(see Section 6.6.4.4 on page 297 ): 6
Grid mode
Ball mode
In accordance with your specifications any measurement method can be omitted from this se-
quence. However, it is not possible to change the way this sequence runs. 6
Definition of the measuring methods 6

Size
This measurement method has been especially developed for small components. On the basis
of the information on dimension parameters the position and rotation of small components is
determined rapidly and reliably.
This method is very resistant to unwanted intrusive elements such as ink markings.
The size mode also employs profiling. You can have the profile formed along either the width
or the length of the component. You should make your choice within the options field. The de-
fault selection is for profiling along the longer side.
Row
This measurement method is based on information from one row of leads.
This method is very fast and supplies approximate values for the coordinates and rotational
angle of the component.
Corner (Component inspection)

The measurement results provide precise information on the coordinates and rotation of the
component, the number of leads, the pitch and the row offset.
This method is not sensitive to fluctuations in the lead dimensions.
Lead (Leads inspection)

This method is used to obtain information from an inspection of every single lead.
323
The following combinations of measurement methods are used: 6
Size Corner Lead (see table in Section 6.6.4.15) or

Row Corner Lead (see table in Section 6.6.4.15)
Grid (component inspection with the F machines)

The measurement results will provide information on the approximate coordinates and approx-
imate rotation of the component. In addition, you will be informed of the quality of measure-
ment.
Ball (determination of the ball position on F machines)

The measurement results will provide precise information on the approximate coordinates and
approximate rotation of the component. In addition, you will be informed of the maximum ball
offset and the quality of measurement.
6.6.4.15 Recommendations regarding the Optimum Sequence of Measurement Methods
The following table contains our recommendations for the optimum sequence of measurement
methods for particular components. The following abbreviations are used: 6
B= ball C = corner G= grid

L= lead R = row S= size
Measurement sequence
Component
S R G C L B
MELF S L
CHIP S L
SOT S C L
S L
SOJC6 S C
SOJC14 R C
LCC R C L
PLCC R C L
QFP R C L
TAB R C L *)
BGA, flip-chip S G B
Bare dies S
*)
L applies to irregularly shaped components with separate windows 6
324
6.6.4.16 Size measuring mode
Click on the Setting field for the Size measuring mode to overlay the Size measuring mode
menu on the screen. 6
6
Fig. 6.6 - 35 Measuring mode option, Size measuring mode menu
This menu is used to 6
vary the resolution the angle calculation.
specify the method for the rotation calculation and
vary the integration settings.
Resolution for the angle calculation 6

In this measuring mode, if the component rotation has been calculated incorrectly on account of
ambiguity, you can increase the angular resolution in order to determine the angle of rotation. The
following increments may be used in relation to the resolution in order to determine the angle of
the components: 6
Simple components:Low resolution:
Complex components:High resolution
325
Method for calculating the rotation 6

Here you must specify the number of rotation windows in order to determine the angle: 6
Automatic selection
The system selects the number of windows.
SWIN method (Single Window)

Selects a single window. This method is suitable for small and complex components or com-
ponents with fluctuating dimensions.
TWIN method (Two Windows)

Two windows are selected. This method is particularly suitable for rapid analysis, for PLCCs,
for example. However, this requires the structures to be investigated to lie in the center of the
window. If this is not the case, select just one window (SWIN method).
Integration settings 6
If you click on the 'Integration settings' field, the Integration settings of Size measuring mode
menu will appear on screen. 6
Fig. 6.6 - 36 Measuring mode option, Integration settings of Size measuring mode menu
326
This menu is used to select the 6
integration direction,
the resolution in the measuring direction and
the resolution in the integration direction.
Integration direction 6
In order to determine the angle, select the integration direction towards either the X or Y axis of
the component. We recommend that you select the longer edge. 6
Resolution in the measuring direction 6
Select this resolution in order to optimize the measuring times at the Collect&Place head. 6
Resolution in the integration direction 6
Select this resolution in order to optimize the measuring times at the Collect&Place head. 6
Resolution Resolution
in the measuring direction in the integration direction
Small components very high very high
Large components with another

measuring step to follow high medium
Tab. 6.6.1
327
6.6.4.17 Row measuring mode
Click on the Setting field in the Row measuring mode menu to call up the following menu: 6
Fig. 6.6 - 37 Measuring mode option, Row measuring mode menu
specify the lead measuring method.
use the package form edges for the rotation windows and/or translation windows.
Measurement 6
If the inner lead tips are mapped better than the outer tips, for example, if a shiny lead is bent up-
wards slightly, you can select one of the following options: 6
measuring the tips via the inner tips of the leads, for bases, for example
center of the lead, center measurement, for PLCC, SOJ, for example
measuring the tips via the outer tips of the leads, for QFP, SOT, SO, for example
328
Use package form edges 6

for rotation windows
The package form edges can be used to optimally position the rotation windows. However, to
do this, the package form edge must be visible and it must not contain a row of leads (eg white
plugs).
for translation windows

The package form edges can be used to optimally position the translation windows. However,
to do this, the package form edge must be visible and it must not contain a row of leads.
PLEASE NOTE:
Do not use measurement mode Row together with measurement mode Size. 6
Integration settings 6
Once you have clicked on the Integration settings field, the Row measuring mode integration
settings menu will appear on screen. 6
Fig. 6.6 - 38 Measuring mode option, Row measuring mode integration settings menu
329
Measuring times can be reduced by lowering the resolution in the measuring or integration direc-
tion. However, you must ensure that the structure to be analyzed has a sufficient number of pixels.
Otherwise, the measuring quality will be compromised. We recommend to choose a very high or
high resolution. 6
6.6.4.18 Corner measuring mode
Click on the Setting field in the Corner measuring mode to call up the Corner measuring mode
menu. 6
6
Fig. 6.6 - 39 Measuring mode option, Corner measuring mode menu
select the number of leads to be measured at each corner.
switch the angle measurement on or off.
330
Measurement 6
If the inner lead tips are mapped better than the outer tips, for example, if a shiny lead is bent up-
center of the lead, center measurement, for PLCC, SOI, for example
Number of leads to be measured at each corner 6

If the lead does no longer stand out well from the background, in the case of white plugs, for ex-
ample, use this option to specify the number of leads to be measured. However, to do this, the
component must be fully described in the line computer (FDC). 6
NOTE 6
This value should only be modified for special components and plugs. Deactivate lead measure-
ment for white plugs.
Angle measurement 6
For single-row components, the angle of rotation is not calculated correctly. Consequently it is bet-
ter to access calculation of the angle of rotation in Row measuring mode. Switch off the angle
measurement in this option. 6
331
6.6.4.19 Lead measuring mode
Click on the Setting field in the Lead measuring mode to call up the Lead measuring mode
menu. 6
6
Fig. 6.6 - 40 Measuring mode option, Lead measuring mode menu
to select the windows separately for each lead or a combined window for every lead to be mea-
sured.
Measurement 6
If the inner lead tips are mapped better than the outer tips, for example if a shiny lead is bent up-
center of the lead, center measurement, for PLCC, SOJ, for example
332
Windows 6
Separately for each lead
Here you define the window in the primary direction (dark blue) and secondary direction (light
blue) for measuring each standard lead for irregular components and special components.
Combined window
Used to define a common window for all the leads. This applies to four-sided, symmetrical
components only.
6.6.4.20 Grid measuring mode

Click on the Setting field in the Grid measuring mode to call up the Grid measuring mode
menu. 6
Fig. 6.6 - 41 Measuring mode option, Grid measuring mode menu
In this menu, enter the number of balls to be measured at each corner: 3 for single measurement
and 5 for multiple measurement 6
PLEASE NOTE: Measurement mode Grid can be speeded up, if measurement mode Size is car-
ried out beforehand. 6
333
6.6.4.21 Ball measuring mode
Click on the Settings button in Ball measuring mode to call up the Ball measuring mode menu.6
Fig. 6.6 - 42 Measuring mode option, Ball meas. mode menu
This menu can be used to 6
select the measuring methods listed under Measurement and
evaluate the position and presence of balls and carry out a quality analysis.
334
Measurement 6
You can choose between the following measuring methods: 6
the profile method for fast analysis or
the filter method for a more robust measuring method, although this will take longer.
The fast measuring method is generally sufficient. However, for critical components we recom-
mend the robust measuring method if the quality is insufficient, for example if the quality factor is
less than 50. 6
Analysis 6
This is used to analyze the position of the balls and to determine whether they are present. It can
also be used to determine the quality of the measurement. The quality of the measurement should
generally be better than 50. 6
If you are placing BGAs, BGAs or flip-chips with high reproducibility, i.e. if there is very little dif-
ference between the optical parameters of the components, we recommend the following settings
to guarantee fast placement: 6
Switch off the determination of position / presence for components with large balls and spacing.
The position of the components has already been adequately determined using the grid mea-
surement of 3 balls per corner, and the ball presence analysis is unnecessary.
Do not activate determination of the quality of the measurement unless you want to detect han-
dling or production errors.
Determination of the position is always necessary if the individual ball positions differ greatly from
the grid structure, i.e. if the individual ball positions are fairly scattered about the desired position.6
335
6.6.4.22 Set component type option (F4)
On the F machine, the Test component menu now includes the Set component type option. 6
Abb. 6.6.43 Test component menu, Set component type option (on F machines only)
336
The following button appears when this option is selected. 6
Abb. 6.6.44 Test component menu, Set component type option
Select this option if centering errors occur with standard lighting. These 4 selection
options enable you to match the illumination perfectly to the component to be placed. All these
options provide specific combinations of the flat, average, and steep methods of illumination. 6
Mouse functions 6
Use the mouse to highlight the component type.

Click on OK to confirm your input. The option box will close, and you will return to the Test
component menu.
Click on Cancel to leave the option box without making any changes.
6
337
6.7 Guidelines for Describing Package Forms Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
6.7 Guidelines for Describing Package Forms
6.7.1 Transfer of Package Form Data and the Package Form Interpreter
If a package form is transferred to the station without an .SST file, the package form interpreter
will make certain settings to enable the package form to be measured in accordance with the pack-
age form description. 6
LC Package form library

Describe package for & components
Assign nozzles
Select cameras
.OGF
SC
Hard disk
Package form interpreter

Automatic selection of meas. modes
Automatic lighting selection
GF manipulator
MVS
Fig. 6.7 - 1 Transfer of package form data without package form manipulation
In SIPLACE automatic placement machines, the package form interpreter is located in the ma-
chine controller. The communication module transfers the signals for controlling the lighting from
the MC to the cameras. 6
Tasks of the Package Form Interpreter 6

Automatic selection of suitable measuring modes
Automatic selection of the measuring parameters
Differentiation between cubic/not cubic
Automatic setting of the lighting
338
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.7 Guidelines for Describing Package Forms
The package form interpreter processes standard components and automatically identifies spe-
cial components. Under certain circumstances, other components have to be post-processed. If
the package form settings have to be manipulated, these changes will be stored in the .SST file
and transferred back to the line computer. 6
LC Package form library

Describe package form & components
Assign nozzles
Select cameras
.OGF
SC .SST
Hard disk
Package form interpreter

Automatic selection of meas. modes
Automatic lighting selection
GF manipulator
MVS
Important note:
Manipulation of components at the station must be the exception and not the rule
In general, only a few components have to be changed.
Fig. 6.7 - 2 Transfer of package form data with package form manipulation
If a package form is transferred to the station with the .SST file, then the settings for the .SST file
for measuring the package form will also be transferred. The package form interpreter will remain
inactive. 6
339
6.7.2 Flow Charts for Programming and Testing a Package Form (GF)
Components are optically centered in SIPLACE automatic placement systems. It is also neces-
sary to create the package form description for the component on the SIPLACE line computer first.
We recommend that you always take the package form definitions and dimensions from the data
sheet. 6
The package form settings can be modified at the station. There are different measuring methods.
This means that the lighting settings will also vary. Almost all components can be optically cen-
tered by combining all the setting options in the optimum manner. 6
You should note, however, that a great many package forms have already been defined as stan-
dard. This means that the manipulation of package forms at the station should be the exception,
rather than the rule. 6
We can also provide the package form definitions of special components and hard to center com-
ponents as an extra service. Contact us for further details of this application. 6
340
New component
Please note that when
standard package form
are used by TEST
GF file COMPONENT,
Yes
present? the component detection
may be changed (copy the
GF file [ _.SST file ] again,
No if necessary).
Program GF file with

No. > 1499
Program GF file with

Select package type No. > 1499
Partially defined Regular Irregular Ball Grid Array

Component Fully defined Comp. FDC
Enter Enter Enter Enter

user comment user comment user comment user comment
GF nominal dimensions GF nominal dimensions GF nominal dimensions GF nominal dimensions

and tolerances and tolerances and tolerances and tolerances
Body dimensions Body dimensions Body dimensions
Program Program Program

group of leads, group of leads, ball pitch,
lead model data lead model data lead model data
Editing data Editing data Editing data Editing data
Nozzle type (camera) Nozzle type (camera) Nozzle type (camera) Nozzle type (camera)
sensor system type, sensor system type, sensor system type, sensor system type,
vacuum checks/ vacuum checks/ vacuum checks/ vacuum checks/
editing parameters/ editing parameters/ editing parameters/ editing parameters/
reduction in acceleration reduction in acceleration reduction in acceleration reduction in acceleration
SAVE
Program additional file information
Continue programming at the station
Fig. 6.7 - 3 Flow chart Programming and testing a package form (GF), part - line computer
341
Send program and set-up with this package form to the station and set up
Modify package form as required in "Vision system and "Test component
Revolver head Pick&Place placement head

Pick-up GF (component) Pick up GF (component)
Display component Measure component
Check GF (component), press

Display component
Return for next meas. step
Check GF (component), press

Measure GF (component)
Repeat meas. process several

times (move component onto
Error message nozzle to simulate picking up
occurred?
No
different components)
and check results
Yes
1. Handling error: pick-up angle,
nozzle type, CO on nozzle etc.
No Always identical?
2. Display component
Yes
3. Modify lighting
Assemble component
several times
4. Modify measuring modes
and measuring parameters
5. Modify component dimension Important note:
The manipulation of
6. Modify pin/ball contrast components at the station
must remain the exception,
7. Modify pin/bal
rather than the rule.
dimensions In general, only a few
components have to be
8. Program contrast
changed.
(program table)
Fig. 6.7 - 4 Flow chart: Programming and testing a package form (GF), part 2 - station computer
342
6.7.3 Shapes and possible measuring methods for rough (G) and fine centering (F)
analysis windows
analysis windows
Lead : combined
Lead: separate
Result of the
CORNER
Design
last measuring step
GRID
ROW
BALL
SIZE
X, Y, (), Component
PDC without lead G/F
length, width, (quality)
PDC rounded image G/F F Angular tolerance
Small FDCs, e.g. X, Y, (), Component

G/F F
2 leads length, width, (quality)
Not Max. deviation from the

four-
FDC, regular with short four-
G F sided spacing: X, Y, ,
rows of PINs sided
F (quality)
F
Not Max. deviation from the

four-
FDC, regular with long four-
G F sided spacing: X, Y, (),
rows of PINs sided
F quality
F
X, Y, number of PINs
FDC irregular with
G (G) F F (quality), max. deviation
short rows of PINs
from the spacing
X, Y, number of PINs
FDC, irregular with
G (G) F F (quality), max. deviation
long rows of PINs
from the spacing
FDC, irregular with one X, Y, (), standardized

row of PINs, several lead deviation (quality)
G G F
PIN models or spac- Number of PINs, second-
ings ary offset
X, Y, (), standardized
FDCs with circular seg- lead deviation (quality)
ment PIN arrange- (G) G F
ments Number of PINs, second-
ary offset
X, Y, (), spacing,
BGA, flip-chip G G F
angle, quality)
Tab. 6.7.1
If one or more of the results are outside the tolerance, the component will not be placed. 6
343
If the component cannot be centered correctly, additional measuring methods may be omitted.
You should, however, carry out all the rough centering steps since these reduce the size of the
measuring window. 6
In the Test component menu, the components are optically centered in the individual measur-
ing steps, via the Check component function, but the results are not output.
In the Test component menu, the components are optically centered in the individual measur-
ing steps, via the Measure component function, but the results are not output.
If the components are larger than 32 mm x 32 mm, a multiple measurement will be carried out
automatically in the vision system.
344
6.7.4 Test Package Form - Visual Representation /

Programming Measurement Types
In the Test component menu, a component is picked up and then moved to the camera and
mapped in its 0 position. The component is displayed with respect to its placement angle at the
Collect&Place head. 6
Check component, press

Measure component
Repeat measurement
Error No
and check the results
Yes
1. Handling error: pick-up angle,
nozzle type, CO on nozzle etc.
No Are the results
constant?
2. Display component
Yes
3. Modify lighting
Assemble component
several times
4. Modify measuring modes
and measuring parameters
5. Modify component dimension Important note:
The manipulation of
6. Modify pin/ball contrast components at the station must
remain the exception, rather
than the rule.
7. Modify pin/ball In general, only a few
dimension components have to
be changed.
8. Program contrast
(program table)
Fig. 6.7 - 5 Order in which package forms are programmed at the station
345
6.7.5 Parameters for the Measuring Methods
Possible sequences of measuring methods
Ball,
PDC/ Flip- Bare
FDC FDC FDC FDC FDC Grid
FDC chips dies
array
Size Size Size Size Row Row Size Size Size
Lead Corner Corner Corner Corner Grid Grid
Lead Lead Ball Ball
It is also possible to program other sequences, such as corner followed by lead or lead only. Such
combinations are very unusual, however. If the component is defined in the package form editor,
then the measuring methods will be pre-assigned. However, in some cases it may be necessary
to modify the measuring methods at the station so that the component can also be optically cen-
tered. 6
The results from the last measurement are always saved. The previous measurement is used as
a rough centering step for the next measurement and thus helps to reduce the measuring window.6
The more measuring methods are used, the longer the entire measuring procedure will be. A large
number of measuring methods for a component can delay the head cycle. This applies to the Col-
lect&Place head in SIPLACE automatic placement machines, in particular. 6
346
Chip Tantalum Melf IC BGA, BGA

capacitor Flipchip
0402, SIZE Small Large BGA

General
0603, etc. LEAD SO,
SIZE SIZE outer tip QFP
high
LEAD SIZE
resolution
outer tip (depend.on
ROW
SIZE component
outer tip
size)
CORNER CORNER
outer tip outer tip GRID
LEAD LEAD
BALL
outer tip outer tip
Small Large Flip Chip

SOJ,
PLCC
PLCC
SIZE
(depend-
ROW ing on
SIZE component
lead center
size)
CORNER CORNER
lead center lead center GRID
LEAD LEAD
lead center lead center BALL
Fig. 6.7 - 6 Typical measuring modes with standard components
6.7.6 Setting the Components Illumination at the 12-Segment Collect&Place

Head Camera
6.7.6.1 General Information on Illumination Methods
The idea of illumination setting is to obtain an image of the leads of a component which is as high-
contrast as possible. At the same time it is also important to suppress representation of the body
of the component. 6
These instructions are intended to help you find the best possible illumination parameters. This,
however, does not imply that you rigidly comply with the values specified in these instructions. The
way you should proceed is first to follow these instructions and then to adjust the parameters your-
self where necessary. It may well be that you come across a component where the leads are better
illuminated using values different than the ones suggested in these instructions. 6
347
The illumination system consists of three different illumination levels. The intensities can be pro-
grammed individually. By using the individual illumination levels one at a time or in combination,
you can adapt the illumination to suit a wide range of components. 6
Flat illumination level 6

The flat illumination level is used for illuminating BGAs, BGAs, flip-chips, J-lead components
(PLCC), Melfs and components with convex-type leads. It tends to emphasize body and lead
edges. It is, however, less suitable for displaying bright component bodies and ceramic compo-
nents. 6
Middle illumination level 6

The middle illumination level can be used universally with a wide range of components. With bright
component bodies, ceramic components, BGAs and flip-chips it should, however, only be used
at lower intensity levels. 6
Steep illumination level 6

The main application for the steep illumination level is for reflective leads, ceramic components
and bright component bodies. It is less suitable for reflective component bodies, flip-chips or
BGAs. 6
NOTE 6
Most components will require a combination of these illumination levels to achieve optimum illu-
mination. Using one illumination level will only be successful in exceptional cases.
348
6.7.6.2 Pseudo color representation
The pseudo color representation provides a powerful and objective assessment of the illumina-
tion, by representing a brightness value in a color. 6
Color scale Brightness
white light
yellow
orange
red
brown
green
light blue
blue
violet
black dark
A contrast of at least 4 color scales between the lead and body is required for a measurement. In
the Illumination menu of the package form manipulator, components are displayed in the pseudo
color representation on the station computer monitor. 6
6.7.6.3 Settings for Illuminating Standard Components
The standard range of components includes chips (0402 to 2220), tantalum capacitors, Melf com-
ponents, PLCCs, QFPs, SOs, SOJs, TSOPs, ICs, power components, flip-chips, BGAs and
BGAs. 6
For the components which are listed below the GF interpreter in the station computer uses the
default illumination parameters listed in Fig. 6.7 - 7: 6
Chips (0402 to 2220)
Tantalum capacitors (component bodies, non-reflective)
Melf
PLCC, QFP, SO, SOJ, TSOP, ICs, power ICs
Flip-chips, BGAs, BGAs (not ceramic BGAs)
349
As a rule you will not need to change the illumination parameters for the standard components.
For all other components you will need to determine the illumination values and test them (see
Section 6.7.6.4 on page 350). 6
Diagram for adjusting the illumination of standard components
Tantalum Melf IC Power IC BGA, BGA

Chip
capacitor flip-chip
0402, flat: 255 Gullwing flat: 170 Ceramic

General
0603 middle: 90 SO, SOT, middle: 60 BGA
steep: 60 QFP, steep: 120
flat: 120 flat: 120 TSOP
middle: 100 middle: 40
steep: 120 steep: 170
Illumination Brightness
flat: 0
255 level flat: 170
middle: 50
middle: 50
steep: 255
steep: 120
Light
flat: 0
150 middle: 10
Contrast steep: 170
graduation J-Lead BGA,
BGA,
PLCC flip-chip
0805 and Reflective

larger body
flat: 80 flat: 255
flat: 70 flat: 255
steep: 120 steep: 0
Fig. 6.7 - 7 Illumination parameters for standard components

at the 12-segment Collect&Place head camera
6.7.6.4 Settings for Illuminating Other Components
Fig. 6.7 - 8 presents a list of the illumination settings for other components. 6
350
Adjusting the illumination of other components
Fig. 6.7 - 8
Dark and dull body Light and dull body
( white, yellow, red, brown, grey, Ceramic body Reflective body
( black, blue, green ) (independently of color and material)
metallic dull )
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
Gullwing leads ( SO, QFP) Gullwing leads ( SO, QFP ) Shiny leads Gullwing leads ( SO, QFP )
Visual separation between leads

Clear separation and body is not possible. Measure Clear separation Clear separation
between leads outline or lead tips. Leads are between leads between leads
and body. outside the body. and body. and body.
flat: 170 flat: 170 flat: 0 flat: 200

middle: 50 middle: 50 middle: 0 - 20 middle: 80
Collect&Place head camera

steep: 120 steep: 120 steep: 200 - 255 steep: 0 - 20
J-Lead ( PLCC ), convex-type leads J-Lead ( PLCC ), convex-type leads Dull leads J-Lead ( PLCC ), convex-type leads
Visual separation between leads Visual separation between leads

Clear separation and body is not possible. and body is not possible. Clear separation
between leads Illuminate body and leads equally. Illuminate body and leads equally. between leads
and body. Measure outline. Measure outline. and body.

middle: 40 middle: 40 middle: 60 middle: 80
steep: 120 steep: 120 steep: 150 steep: 0 - 20
Other lead shapes Other lead shapes Convex-type leads Other lead shapes
Shiny leads Shiny leads Visual separation between leads Shiny leads
and body is not generally possible.
Illuminate body and leads equally. 1. Illuminate body and leads equally.
Clear separation Clear separation Measure outline. Measure outline.
Illumination parameters for other components at the 12-segment

between leads between leads 2. Trick: Use flat and middle levels to
and body. and body. bring leads image to saturation.
flat: 70
middle: 60 Measure.
flat: 120 flat: 0 steep: 150 for variant 2: flat: 150 - 255
middle: 50 middle: 0 - 10 middle: 60 - 150
steep: 170 steep: 100 - 255 steep: 0 - 20
Dull leads Dull leads Dull leads

Illumination level Brightness
Clear separation Visual separation between leads
Clear separation
between leads and body is not generally possible.
between leads
and body. and body.
Measuring method:
Outline: Leads:
6 Vision functions
351
6
6.7.6.5 Testing Illumination Settings
You can set the illumination parameters by calling the Illumination option (see Section 6.6.4.8 on
page 311). Using the Measure Component Option on page 297 you can then measure the com-
ponent and check your settings with the aid of the measurement results. 6
Proceed as follows to test your illumination setting: 6
Using the illumination values suggested in Figures 6.7 - 7 or 6.7 - 8 carry out measurement.
Measurement should run through successfully.
For each level reduce the set brightness level by 50 %.
For each level raise the set brightness level by 50 %.
If you are not successful with the above procedure, proceed as follows: 6
Starting with the suggested illumination value, increase the brightness of each individual illu-
mination level for as long as measurement is still successful.
Find this upper limit value for each individual illumination level in turn.
Starting with the suggested illumination value, decrease the brightness of each individual illu-
mination level for as long as measurement is still successful. Find this lower limit value for each
individual illumination level in turn.
Determine the average value of the upper and lower limit values. This will be the optimum illu-
mination value.
Example of an illumination test: 6

Settings from the diagram:
flat: 170
middle: 60
steep: 120
Measure the component. Measurement is successful.
Reduce setting values by 50%.

flat: 85
middle: 30
steep: 60
Increase setting values by 50%.

flat: 255
middle: 90
steep: 180
352
Reset the settings to the suggested values:

flat: 170
middle: 60
steep: 120
optimum setting
NOTE 6
With respect to 0402 and 0603 components, avoid the nozzle being displayed during imaging. If
this seems likely, remove the component from the nozzle and use the Illumination Option (see
page 311 to see whether the nozzle did appear in the image.
6.7.6.6 General Information on Setting Illumination Values
As a rule it is better to overilluminate the component than to underilluminate it. A saturated im-
age is preferable to a low-contrast image.
Optimum illumination is attained when only the leads are imaged and the component body is
not shown.
If you cannot clearly separate the image of the component body from the leads, we recom-
mend to illuminate body and leads equally and then to measure the outline.
353
6.7.7 Setting the Component Illumination on the Fine Pitch Vision Module
6.7.7.1 General Information on Illumination Methods
The idea of illumination setting is to obtain an image of the leads of a component which is as high-
contrast as possible. At the same time it is also important to suppress representation of the body
of the component. 6
These instructions are intended to help you find the best possible illumination parameters. This,
however, does not imply that you rigidly comply with the values specified in these instructions. The
way you should proceed is first to follow these instructions and then to adjust the parameters your-
self where necessary. It may well be that you come across a component where the leads are better
illuminated using values different than the ones suggested in these instructions. 6
The illumination system consists of three different illumination levels. The intensities can be pro-
grammed individually. By using the individual illumination levels one at a time or in combination,
you can adapt the illumination to suit a wide range of components. 6
Flat illumination level 6

The flat illumination level is used for illuminating BGAs, J-lead components (PLCC) and compo-
nents with convex-type leads. It tends to emphasize body and lead edges. It is, however, less suit-
able for displaying bright component bodies and ceramic components. 6
Middle illumination level 6

The middle illumination level can be used universally with a wide range of components. With bright
component bodies, ceramic components, BGAs and flip-chips it should, however, only be used
at lower intensity levels. 6
Steep illumination level 6

The main application for the steep illumination level is for reflective leads, ceramic components
and bright component bodies. It is less suitable for reflective component bodies, flip-chips or
BGAs. 6
NOTE 6
Most components will require a combination of these illumination levels to achieve optimum illu-
mination. Using one illumination level will only be successful in exceptional cases.
354
6.7.7.2 Pseudo color representation
The pseudo color representation provides a powerful and objective assessment of the illumina-
tion, by representing a brightness value in a color. 6
Color scale Brightness
white light
yellow
orange
red
brown
green
light blue
blue
violet
black dark
A contrast of at least 4 color scales between the lead and body is required for a measurement. In
the Illumination menu of the package form manipulator, components are displayed in the pseudo
color representation on the station computer monitor. 6
6.7.7.3 Settings for Illuminating Standard Components
The standard range of components includes tantalum capacitors, PLCCs, QFPs, SOs, SOJs,
TSOPs, ICs, power components and BGAs. 6
For the components which are listed below the GF interpreter in the station computer uses the
default illumination parameters listed in Fig. 6.7 - 9: 6
Tantalum capacitors (component bodies, non-reflective)
PLCC, QFP, SO, SOJ, TSOP, ICs, power ICs
BGAs (not ceramic BGAs)
As a rule you will not need to change the illumination parameters for the standard components.
For all other components you will need to determine the illumination values and test them (see
Section 6.7.7.4 on page 350). 6
355
6
Diagram for adjusting the illumination of standard components
Tantalum Melf IC Power IC BGA, BGA

Chip
capacitor flip-chip
0402, flat: 255 Gullwing flat: 170 Ceramic

General
0603 middle: 90 SO, SOT, middle: 60 BGA
steep: 60 QFP, steep: 120
flat: 120 flat: 120 TSOP
Illumination Brightness
flat: 0
255 level flat: 170
middle: 50
middle: 50
steep: 255
steep: 120
Light
flat: 0
150 middle: 10
Contrast steep: 170
graduation J-Lead BGA,
BGA,
PLCC flip-chip
0805 and Reflective

larger body
flat: 80 flat: 255
flat: 70 flat: 255
steep: 120 steep: 0
Fig. 6.7 - 9 Illumination parameters for standard components on the fine pitch vision module
6.7.7.4 Settings for Illuminating Other Components
Fig. 6.7 - 10 presents a list of the illumination settings for other components. 6
356
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
Fig. 6.7 - 10
Adjusting the illumination of other components
Dark and dull body Light and dull body

( white, yellow, red, brown, grey, Ceramic body Reflective body
( black, blue, green ) (independently of color and material)
metallic dull )
Illumination parameters for other components on the fine pitch vision module
Gullwing leads ( SO, QFP) Gullwing leads ( SO, QFP ) Shiny leads Gullwing leads ( SO, QFP )
Visual separation between leads

Clear separation and body is not possible. Measure Clear separation Clear separation
between leads outline or lead tips. Leads are between leads between leads
and body. outside the body. and body. and body.

J-Lead ( PLCC ), convex-type leads J-Lead ( PLCC ), convex-type leads Dull leads J-Lead ( PLCC ), convex-type leads
Visual separation between leads Visual separation between leads

Clear separation and body is not possible. and body is not possible. Clear separation
between leads Illuminate body and leads equally. Illuminate body and leads equally. between leads
and body. Measure outline. Measure outline. and body.

middle: 40 middle: 40 middle: 60 middle: 80
steep: 120 steep: 120 steep: 150 steep: 0 - 20
Other lead shapes Other lead shapes Convex-type leads Other lead shapes
Shiny leads Shiny leads Visual separation between leads Shiny leads

and body is not generally possible.
Illuminate body and leads equally. 1. Illuminate body and leads equally.
Clear separation Clear separation Measure outline. Measure outline.
between leads between leads 2. Trick: Use flat and middle levels to
and body. and body. bring leads image to saturation.
flat: 70
middle: 60 Measure.
flat: 120 flat: 0 steep: 150 for variant 2: flat: 150 - 255
middle: 50 middle: 0 - 10 middle: 60 - 150
steep: 170 steep: 100 - 255 steep: 0 - 20
Dull leads Dull leads Dull leads

Illumination level Brightness
Clear separation Visual separation between leads
Clear separation
between leads and body is not generally possible.
between leads
6 Vision functions
and body. and body.
Measuring method:
Outline: Leads:
357
6
6.7.7.5 Testing Illumination Settings
You can set the illumination parameters by calling the Illumination option (see Section 6.6.4.8 on
page 311). Using the Measure Component Option on page 297 you can then measure the com-
ponent and check your settings with the aid of the measurement results. 6
Proceed as follows to test your illumination setting: 6
Using the illumination values suggested in Figures 6.7 - 9 or 6.7 - 10 carry out measurement.
For each level reduce the set brightness level by 50 %.
For each level raise the set brightness level by 50 %.
If you are not successful with the above procedure, proceed as follows: 6
Starting with the suggested illumination value, increase the brightness of each individual illu-
mination level for as long as measurement is still successful.
Find this upper limit value for each individual illumination level in turn.
Starting with the suggested illumination value, decrease the brightness of each individual illu-
mination level for as long as measurement is still successful. Find this lower limit value for each
individual illumination level in turn.
Determine the average value of the upper and lower limit values. This will be the optimum illu-
mination value.
Example of an illumination test: 6

Settings from the diagram:
flat: 170
middle: 60
steep: 5
Reduce setting values by 50%.

flat: 85
middle: 30
steep: 2
Increase setting values by 50%.

flat: 255
middle: 90
steep: 8
358
Reset the settings to the suggested values:

flat: 170
middle: 60
steep: 5
optimum setting
6
6.7.7.6 General Information on Setting Illumination Values
As a rule it is better to overilluminate the component than to underilluminate it. A saturated im-
age is preferable to a low-contrast image.
Optimum illumination is attained when only the leads are imaged and the component body is
not shown.
If you cannot clearly separate the image of the component body from the leads, we recom-
mend to illuminate body and leads equally and then to measure the outline.
359
6.8 Recommendation for visually centering components Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
6.8 Recommendation for visually centering compo-

nents
6.8.1 Visually centering flip-chips
6.8.1.1 Entering the data on the line computer
Describe the ball radius.

Select tolerances of between 10 % and 20 %.
6.8.1.2 Setting the parameters on the station computer
Under the Illumination Option in the Test Component Menu, select the flat illumination plane
and set the brightness values to between 200 and 255. Do NOT use transformation tables to
do this.
Select a positive ball contrast under the Ball Image Option (see page 315).
PLEASE NOTE 6
If a lot of non-ball structures are identified as ball structures (they can be recognized by the
small crosses), increase the ball contrast. The number of crosses can be estimated in the
Measure menu during the grid measurement. 6
6.8.1.3 Recommended sequence of measurements for visually centering flip-chips
Size measuring mode Grid measuring Ball measuring mode

mode
Resolution for calculat- For single measure- Standard

ing the angle: ment: ball detection:
low resolution 3 balls per corner Hex value P1 = 80
Resolution in the mea- For multiple mea- Fast

suring direction: surement: ball detection:
medium 5 balls per corner Hex value P1 = A0
Resolution Hex value P1 = 80 PLEASE NOTE:

in the integration Switch Ball mode off if it is not necessary
direction: to measure all the balls.
medium In this case, P1 must be set to 80 in Grid
mode.
Tab. 6.8.1 Recommended sequence of measurements for visually centering flip-chips
360
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.8 Recommendation for visually centering components
6.8.2 General recommendations for centering flip-chips, BGAs and screening

plates
6.8.2.1 Setting the ball contrast parameters
If you select a high value for the Ball image option in the Test component menu, this will reduce
the effect of any defective structures. It does mean, however, that there is a possibility that not
every ball will be detected. 6
Set a lower value to ensure that all the balls are detected. This will reduce the reject rate, but the
measurement will take longer.
6.8.2.2 Setting the ball radius parameters
Enter the ball radius on the line computer. This value is automatically reduced by 20 % since the
vision system will detect balls even if the specified dimensions are smaller then their actual phys-
ical dimensions. 6
So, set the ball radius on the station computer and then adjust the quality in the Measure menu.6
If no crosses are displayed on the ball, the radius is incorrect or the contrast is too high.
If several crosses are displayed on a ball, then the radius has been entered incorrectly in the
Measure menu.
PLEASE NOTE 6
We recommend that you select a radius on the line computer that is slightly larger than the
theoretical value and then adjust it in the Ball image menu. 6
6.8.2.3 Setting the case shape dimension parameters on the station computer
For high-contrast flip-chips and BGAs, you can reduce the physical case shape dimension to the
square surrounding the balls (Case dimension option). This will reduce the measuring time, al-
though it can only be used for single measurements. Size mode must also be active. 6
6.8.3 Visually centering flip-chips
6.8.3.1 Setting the parameters on the station computer
Under the Illumination Option in the Test Component Menu, select: 6
a value of around 50 for the medium illumination plane
a value of around 20 for the steep illumination plane
361
6.8.3.2 Recommended sequence of measurements for optically centering bare dies
Measuring mode Size Grid Ball

Resolution in measuring direction:

very high
Settings
Resolution in integration direction:

very high
Tab. 6.8.2 Recommended sequence of measurements for optically centering bare dies
6.8.4 Centering shielding plates using the vision system
PLEASE NOTE:
Do not describe shielding plates as BGAs unless they are larger than 32 mm x 32 mm in size. This
is the maximum permissible size for single measurements. If BGA mode is used to describe
shielding plates, the holes will be measured as well. 6
6.8.4.1 Data input on the line computer
Describe the radius of the holes.

Select a value between 10% and 20 % for the tolerance.
6.8.4.2 Setting parameters on the station computer
Select the Illumination option from the Test component menu, and then select the flat, aver-
age and steep illumination levels.
Select the Ball illustration option from the Test component menu, and then select a negative
ball contrast.
PLEASE NOTE:
Reduce the negative value if you find that a lot of non-ball structures are recognized as ball struc-
tures (which can be identified by the tiny cross marks). The number of crosses can be estimated
during the grid measurements by selecting the Measure menu. 6
362
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 6.8 Recommendation for visually centering components
6.8.4.3 Recommended sequence of measurements for > 32 mm x 32 mm

shielding plates
6
Grid measuring mode Ball measuring mode

Robust ball recognition:
Hex value P1 = 80
Multiple measurement:
Fast ball recognition:
5 balls per corner
Hex value P1 = A0
Hex values for smaller holes:
PLEASE NOTE:
P1 = 80 (full resolution)
Switch Ball mode off if it is not necessary to mea-
sure all the balls.
P1 must then be set to 80 in Grid mode.
Tab. 6.8 - 3 Recommended sequence of measurements for > 32 mm x 32 mm shielding plates
6
6.8.4.4 Optimizing the multiple measurement for shielding plates
Shielding plates that are larger than 32 mm x 32 mm in size are generally optically centered by
multiple measurement. The single measurement can be used, however, if you select a component
section that is smaller than 32 mm x 32 mm. If you do this, select a characteristic, non-repeating
ball sample in order to avoid placement errors. 6
Select the Package dimension option from the Test component menu, and then enter <
32 mm x 32 mm for the length and width of the component.
6
363
364
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 7 What should you do ...
7 What should you do ...
This chapter contains a number of subjects that are intended to help you during your daily work
on a SIPLACE line.
For example, you are provided with preventative measures that you can take to minimize the down
time on the machine to obtain the highest possible level of efficiency for the SIPLACE line during
production. 7
In addition, the tasks of the operator and of the line engineer are described in an operator and line
engineer profile, respectively, in this chapter. 7
365
7 What should you do ... SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
7.1 Switching on the SIPLACE line Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.1 Switching on the SIPLACE line
7.1.1 Switching on the line computer / starting the user interface of the line
computer program
Switch on the uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

The line computer software is uploaded.
The login dialog window appears on the screen after approximately 2 minutes.
Enter plr in the "login" box and confirm your entry by pressing the RETURN key.
Enter the password in the "Password" box and press the RETURN key. If no password is re-
quired, then just press the RETURN key
The desktop (starting window) will appear on screen after approximately 3 minutes with the
overlying login box.
Enter the user name defined for your user account in the "User" box, and enter the correspond-
ing password in the "Password" box.
Click on Ok to confirm. The functions of the line computer program can now be executed ac-
cording to your access rights.
7.1.2 What you should check before switching on the stations
ATTENTION
Carry out the steps described in the following before you switch on the stations. 7
Check to make sure that the stations are connected to power and to the compressed air supply.
Carry out a visual inspection of the stations. In particular, make sure that there are no obstruc-
tions in the traveling range of the gantries.
Make sure that the z-axes of all the heads are in the top end position.
Close the feeder covers and the protective covers.
Make sure that there is no diskette in the floppy drive of the station computer.
366
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.1 Switching on the SIPLACE line
7.1.3 Switching on the station/starting the user interface of the station computer
program
ATTENTION
Switch on the station only after the desktop is displayed on the line computer monitor. Otherwise,
communication problems may occur. 7
Switch on the station on the main switch and check to see if the manometer displays the re-
quired operating pressure after you have switched the station on.
The station computer software is uploaded. When the line computer is connected and commu-
nication is error-free, the Main view of the station computer user interface appears for the "Op-
erator" user class after approximately 2 minutes (see Fig. 7.1 - 1).
7
Fig. 7.1 - 1 Main view after loading the station computer software
367
7.1 Switching on the SIPLACE line Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
NOTE
The current state of the station is displayed in the status field in the "State" line, and the action you
are to execute is displayed in the "Action:" line (see Fig. 7.1 - 1). 7
Press one of the start keys (white) when prompted with "Press start key".
(The start keys are located on the input side and output side of the placement system.)
A reference sequence is executed on all axes. The station is ready for operation after the ref-
erence sequence has completed.
The symbol is displayed in the work area of the user interface.

7
7.1.4 "Switching on the SIPLACE line" flow chart
The following flow chart shows the actions executed be the line computer, station and operator
while the SIPLACE line is being switched on and started up. 7
368
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.1 Switching on the SIPLACE line
Station computer
Line computer tasks
Switch on
Make settings on the machine

Set-up generator appears
Check the set-up
(insert feeders)
Confirm the
set-up generator
Load cluster data
Wait for PCB

Introduce PCB
Nozzle check
Change nozzle
configuration, if necessary
Fiducials No
OK?
Yes Abort
placement
Reset tracks
Test set-up
Track
No errors
Yes Bold : To be carried out

by the operator
Italic : Carried out or

PCB onto output conveyor signaled by the
station
Fig. 7.1 - 2 "Switching on the SIPLACE line flow chart
369
7.2 Switching off the SIPLACE line Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.2 Switching off the SIPLACE line
ATTENTION
Before you switch off the line, ALWAYS make sure that:
All placement operations on the stations are completed.

The z-axis of all placement heads are in the top end position.
None of the placement heads still contain components.
All gantries have moved into the standby position.
The station computers have been properly shut down.
7.2.1 Switching off the line computer
CAUTION
NEVER just switch off the line computer on the power switch (of the UPS).
ALWAYS shut down the operating system of the line computer with "Shutdown". Otherwise you
will almost certainly lose a lot of data and may need to reinstall the line computer software.
Position the mouse at the right or lower edge of the screen.

The cursor will change into a cross.
Press and hold down the left mouse button. The main menu appears.
Move the mouse cursor onto the Shutdown menu item and then release the mouse button.
The following dialog box appears on screen:
really shutdown?
yes no
Click on yes. The dialog box closes and the operating system shuts down. This operation takes
around 1 minute. The following then appears:
** Safe to Power Off **

-or-
** Press Any Key to Reboot **
Switch off the UPS.
370
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.2 Switching off the SIPLACE line
7.2.2 Switching off the stations
ATTENTION
NEVER switch off the station during operation using just the main switch except in an emergency.
Shut down the operating system of the station with "Shut down computer..." before you switch off
the station. If you switch off the station during operation without properly shutting down the oper-
ating system beforehand, then the station computer may not start up the next time the station is
switched on. 7
Proceed as follows to switch off the station: 7
Terminate all placement operations.

Check to make sure that the z-axes of all placement heads are in the upper end position.
Check to see if there are still components in the placement heads and remove any components
found.
If necessary, move all gantries to the standby position with the help of the corresponding gantry
functions (see chapter 5, section 5.2.3.1).
NOTE
All gantries are normally moved to the standby position automatically. 7
Click on the menu function Shut down computer... in the Mode menu.
All station computer processes are terminated. After the operating system has shut down, a
message will appear on the screen stating that the computer can now be switched off.
Now switch off the station on the main switch.
371
7.2 Switching off the SIPLACE line Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.2.3 Starting stations that remain switched on after the line computer has been
shut down
If stations remain switched on after the line computer has been shut down and the line computer
is then restarted, the computer will not automatically establish connections with those stations.
The following error messages may appear on the line computer monitor: 7
No correct connection between line computer and station
The line computer was shut down and restarted, so the station must also be shut down and
restarted.
There are two ways of re-establishing the connection between the line computer and station after
the line computer has been shut down: 7
1st option 7
Disable the conveyor interface at the stations from the Machine options menu.
Run all the PCB feeders on the line until they are empty.
Switch the stations off and on again.
The stations will establish connections with the line computer.
Press the Start button when prompted. The reference point run will then be carried out.
Continue placement.
2nd option 7
Select the Line engineer access level (password required) from the Options menu.
Select the Stand-alone option from the Operating mode menu.
The PCB conveyor for the station will run on until empty.
Wait until you are prompted to press the Start button.
Select Line computer from the Operating mode option in the Options menu.
The station will automatically establish a connection with the line computer.
Press the Start button.
The reference point run will then be carried out.
Set the access level back to Operator.
Continue placement.
372
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.3 Changing jobs
7.3 Changing jobs
Interrupt the job defined for the station on the line computer using the function (Interrupt).
Enter the new job on the line computer using the function (Schedule).
Check the width of the conveyor belt.
Check the position of the magnetic supports and make sure that they cannot collide with com-
ponents on the bottom of the PCB.
Carry out the set-up check.
Make sure that the feeder modules are equipped with the correct components and that the
feeder modules are at the correct locations.
Check the nozzle configuration in the nozzle changer.
If no nozzle changer is installed, then you must change the nozzles manually.
NOTE
If you change the nozzle manually, ALWAYS make sure that you are using the correct nozzle
type and that the nozzle is seated correctly on the spindle. (The plunger pin must click into
place in the notch slot of the nozzle).
If you have not inserted a nozzle or have used the wrong nozzle type, then the station com-
puter program will prompt you to move the placement head to the service position and
change the nozzle. This error message will also appear if you have not inserted the nozzle
correctly.
If you insert the wrong nozzle or use the wrong nozzle type again, then the gantry will move to
the service position once more after the reference sequence. The station computer program
will continue to prompt for a nozzle change until you have obtained the correct configuration.
If you do not succeed, then proceed as follows:
Switch off the station and cancel the specified job on the line computer.
Rectify the nozzle error and restart the station.
373
7.3 Changing jobs Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
TIP
Have the nozzles ready in a separate nozzle box in which each compartment is labeled with the
type and color of the nozzle. This will help to prevent confusion. Do not save used plastic nozzles,
dispose of them immediately instead. 7
701 704 705 711

yellow orange red yellow
Fig. 7.3 - 1 Example of a nozzle box
374
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.4 When you change shift
7.4 When you change shift
Splice the tapes early enough so that the feeder modules do not have to be refilled as soon as
the new shift starts. This will prevent lead to pick-up errors and prolonged down times.
Inform the next operator of any important information when changing shifts when, for example,
something has been changed in the placement program or if errors have occurred more fre-
quently in certain feeder modules. Also read through the list of the descriptions of the steps to
take in section 7.6.
Carry out a set-up check.
Make sure that the feeder modules are equipped with the correct components and that they
are at the correct locations in the component table.
NOTE
Hand over the line in the same state that you would want to find it in when starting your shift.
This means that:
- The rejection containers are empty.
- The waste containers are empty.
- The conveyor areas have been cleaned with a vacuum cleaner.
- Defective feeder modules in the feeder area have been replaced. 7
375
7.5 When you, as an operator, carry out a walk-through inspection Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.5 When you, as an operator, carry out a walk-through

inspection
Make sure that the tape is correctly placed in the springs of the 8 mm S feeder module.
7
Fig. 7.5 - 1 Placing the tape in the springs of the 8 mm S feeder module
Check to ensure that the tape foil removal container for the 8 mm S feeder module is full.
If it is full, then pull out the foil and cut it off with scissors.
NOTE
Tearing the foil instead of cutting it can lead problems with the tape removal mechanism. 7
Check to ensure that the withdrawal space on the feeder module is the right size for the com-
ponent.
Check to see if tape guides are being used on the feeder modules that are intended for different
tape widths.
Check to see if the additional plastic guides are being used on the feeder modules that are in-
tended for tapes of different widths.
376
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.5 When you, as an operator, carry out a walk-through inspection
Check the position of the stopper on the PCB transport.

Always position the stopper so that it is not placed within any cut-outs or recesses in the PCB.
Check the magnetic supports on the lifting table. They must be arranged so that they do not
collide with components on the bottom of the PCBs.
NOTE
Splice the tapes early enough so that the feeder modules do not become empty or you will
experience prolonged down times.
However, do not splice the tapes too early because if you wind the end of the old tape onto
the new reel after splicing, the reel holding the new tape may become overfilled and the tape
will slip off the reel and become tangled up. This will again result in pick-up errors and pro-
longed down times. 7
Place insertable shafts into the tape container when using large tape reels.
Insert the dividing plates as shown in Fig. 7.5 - 2 and remember that the smallest division of the
tape container is a 2x division. This will help avoid placement errors.
7
377
7.5 When you, as an operator, carry out a walk-through inspection Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 7.5 - 2 Dividing plates in the tape container
Key to Fig. 7.5 - 2
(1) Tape container

(2) Dividing plate
(3) Guide rail for the dividing plates on the front of the container
(4) Guide rail for the dividing plates on the back of the container
(5) Supporting rod for the dividing plates
Steps for Fig. 7.5 - 2
A Insert the dividing plate with the nose under the guide rail on the front of the container.
B Push the dividing plate in direction (B).
C Engage the dividing plate on the supporting rod (5).
378
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.6 Preliminary set-up of the placement station
7.6 Preliminary set-up of the placement station
Carry out the following steps to complete the preliminary set-up of the placement station.
Remove the tapes from the feeder modules and vacuum the surfaces of the modules and the
area around the tape guide clean with the vacuum cleaner.
Remove the cover foil from the tape waste containers (item 2).
7
Fig. 7.6 - 1 Emptying the tape waste container
(1) Component changeover table, mobile (2) Waste tape container, extendible
7
Clean the supporting surfaces of the feeder modules with a cloth moistened with alcohol.
Apply a small amount of WD40 corrosion protection to the supporting surfaces with a lint-free
cloth.
Use a vacuum cleaner or use a brush with short bristles to remove loose components from the
component tables.
379
7.6 Preliminary set-up of the placement station Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
CAUTION
Avoid removing components from the magnetic rail of the component table with your fingers
or you may injure yourself with tiny splinters of metal. 7
NOTE
The compressed air distributor rail on the component tables is used to connect the bulk case
feeder modules. This rail runs parallel to the PCB transport and has nozzles with the open-
ings on the top. Make sure that the nozzles do not get dirty or come into contact with oil or
grease. Grease, oil and dirt can cause malfunctions in the feeder module or may cause the
components in the feeder module to become unusable! 7
Cover the nozzles on the distributor rail with electrical tape, for example.
Check the surface of the magnetic rail for irregularities or damage and smoothen with an oil-
stone when necessary.
Clean the magnetic rail with a cloth moistened with alcohol.
Apply a small amount of WD40 corrosion protection to the magnetic rail with a lint-free cloth.
Clean the supporting surfaces of the component tables with a cloth moistened with alcohol,
and then apply a small amount of WD40 corrosion protection with a lint-free cloth.
Clean the tape container with a vacuum cleaner.
Make sure that the feeder modules are divided up correctly.
Are all the plugs of the feeder module plugged in to the correct location?
Make sure that the spacing in the tape transport of the feeder is correct.
Shorten the used tape on the front of the feeder module to a length of 3 cm.
Check to see if the dividing plates in the tape container are inserted correctly (see Fig. 7.5 - 2).
Check the diameter of the component tape reels and insert a shaft for large reels.
Splice short tape ends together.
The personnel maintaining the preliminary set-up area is to have access to the same equipment
as the machine operators. You will find a list of such equipment in section 7.12.
NOTE
If the equipment is defective, then the machine operator is to inform the personnel in the prelimi-
nary set-up area verbally or in writing.
380
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.7 Changing the set-up
7.7 Changing the set-up
Before changing the set-up, print out the instructions regarding changing the set-up on the printer
of the line computer as described in chapter 14 of the UNIX line computer Users Manual. 7
7.7.1 What you should note when changing the feeder modules
Handle the feeder modules carefully when you insert them into or remove them from the com-
ponent table. Do not allow the supporting surfaces of the feeder modules to bang against the
edges of the component table.
Vacuum the supporting surfaces of the feeder modules and clean the surface of the component
table when necessary according to the instructions in the maintenance manual.
RISK OF INJURY
Avoid removing components from the magnetic rail of the component table with your fingers
because you may hurt yourself with tiny splinters of metal. 7
Remove loose components with a short-bristled brush.

7
381
7.8 Component table, mobile Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.8 Component table, mobile
7.8.1 Safety instructions for docking and undocking the mobile component table
WARNING 7
Never reach into the gap between the component tables and the placement system frame
while the machine is running (item 1).
or disconnecting the component table power cable at the socket on the placement system
(item 2).
NEVER connect the component table connecting cable to the socket on the placement system
and then operate the component table via the external compressed air control unit (item 3).
Fig. 7.8 - 1 Safety instructions for the mobile component table
382
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.8 Component table, mobile
7.8.2 Undocking the component table
Fig. 7.8 - 2 Undocking the mobile component
383
Key to Fig. 7.8 - 2
(1) Communication interface connector

(2) Power supply connector for the component table
(3) Compressed air connection
(4) Component table bed
(5) Button for raising and lowering the component table bed
(6) Actuating tube
(7) Fold-down bracket
(8) Holes for the centering pins
(9) Centering pins
(10) Contact surfaces for the slide rails of the component table
(11) Horizontal tensioners
Click on the STOP PROCESSING PCB icon in the MAIN VIEW menu.
The PCB in progress will be completed. The icons of the SINGLE FUNCTIONS menu will then
be activated.
Click on the desired SINGLE FUNCTIONS GANTRY icon.
Click on the GANTRY FUNCTIONS icon.
From this menu, click on the GO TO SET-UP POSITION button.
The selected placement head will move across the PCB transport to prevent it being damaged
when the component table is changed.
Open protective cover of the selected gantry.
Open the side screens.
Open the horizontal tensioners (item 11)
Pull the two actuating tubes (item 6) towards you at the same time and lift up the bracket (item
7) to lock the raised component table bed in its top end position.
Hold down the button (item 5) for raising the component table bed (item 4) until the component
table bed reaches its top end position.
Unplug the component table power cable (item 2).
Unplug the component table control cable (item 1).
Disconnect the compressed air supply (item 3).
Remove the component table.
384
7.8.3 Docking the component table
WARNING 7
Check that the placement head is outside the range of the component table. 7
CAUTION 7
When docking the component table, ensure that the table bed is in its top end position and the
bracket (item 7) is folded up. 7
Cut off the empty tapes for the feeder modules.

Make sure that the contact surface (item 10) for the component table bed is clean.
CAREFULLY push the component table into the placement system.
Connect the compressed air supply (item 3).
Plug in the control cable (item 1).
Plug in the power cable (item 2) for the component table.
Pull the two actuating tubes (item 6) towards you at the same time and then lower the bracket
(item 7) in order to be able to lower the component table bed.
Check that the centring holes in the component table bed lie precisely over the centering pins
of the placement system.
Hold down the button (item 5) until the component table bed reaches its top end position.
Release the button and the component table bed will descend.
Ensure that the centring pins engage in the centring holes in the component table bed and that
the component table bed is fully lowered.
Fold up the bracket (item 7) of the component table.
Lock the two horizontal tensioners (item 11).
Close the side screens and protective cover.
Press the Start button to start the placement system.
385
7.9 How to avoid track errors Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.9 How to avoid track errors
7.9.1 General information
Make sure that the areas around the feeder modules are clean and that there are no loose
components in the feeder area or under the feeder modules.
Ensure that the supporting surfaces of the feeder modules, and particularly the magnetic rails
of the component tables, are clean and level.
Refill promptly with components.
Splice the tapes promptly. This generally means that you are to prepare the splicing material
when there is still approximately 1.5 m of tape on the reel.
Handle the feeder modules carefully when you insert them into or remove them from the com-
ponent table as these are high-precision devices.
When you insert the feeder modules, make sure that you do not accidentally press one of the
program keys. If you do, you could change the advance from 4 mm to 2 mm on
8 mm S feeder modules, for example.
Close the flaps of the feeder modules because they can be easily damaged when open.
For 8 mm S feeder modules, make sure that the components are picked up from the correct
position, depending on their sizes (see the following example).
Example for 8mm S feeder modules 7
Pick-up position Pick-up position

for components for components
> 3 mm 3 mm
Width
Check to see if all the plugs of the feeder modules are plugged in to the correct sockets.
386
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.9 How to avoid track errors
7.9.2 ... on the 8 mm S tape feeder module
NEVER open the cover flap without first releasing the tension of the cover foil remover.
Set the pick-up position and the spacing of the tape according to the short instructions en-
closed with each tape feeder module.
Insert the tape material over the spring into the tape feeder module.
7.9.3 ... on the tape container
Insert the spacers correctly (see Fig. 7.5 - 2).

Use insertable shafts for large tape reels.
387
7.9 How to avoid track errors Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.9.4 Component coordinate system and pick-up angle

7
Fig. 7.9 - 1 Position of the component and its pick-up angle
388
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.10 What to note when refilling components
7.10 What to note when refilling components
The refilling of components with and without a barcode is described in chapter 4, section 4.1. 7
With tape feeder modules, make sure that you always splice on a new tape early enough so
that the feeder modules do not run out of components.
However, do not splice the tapes too early because if you wind the tape onto the new reel after
splicing the end of the old tape, the reel with the new tape may be over-filled. The tape could
then slip off the reel and become tangled. Under certain circumstances, this could cause pick-
up errors and prolonged down times.
Always insert shafts when using large tape reels and make sure that the dividing plates are
inserted correctly (see Fig. 7.5 - 2).
389
7.11 Tools for the operator Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.11 Tools for the operator
All operators are to be equipped with the tools listed in the following. It is recommended to store
the tools in an appropriate container to avoid being injured when removing the tools from the con-
tainer (i.e. by a pair of tweezers). 7
Every operator of the machine requires: 7
SMD tweezers
A brush with short bristles to clean the component tables
A set of small regular and Phillips-head screwdrivers
A tape splicing clamp and splicing materials
Scissors for splicing tape (do not use multi-purpose scissors or diagonal cutters)
Erasers or fiberglass pens to remove fiducials
Indelible pens for marking the tracks
Cleaning agents (ethyl alcohol, Plexiglass cleaner, cotton wool tips, lint-free cloths, pipe-clean-
ers)
WD40 corrosion protection
Vacuum cleaner
390
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 7.12 Operator profile
7.12 Operator profile
The operating personnel are to be assigned the following tasks:
Supplying the feeder module with sufficient components
Checking to make sure that the right components are placed in the feeder modules
Promptly refilling the components and splicing the tapes
Checking to make sure that the components are in their correct pick-up positions (see
Fig. 7.9 - 1)
Checking the flow of material to the PCBs on the input and output conveyor
Checking the quality of the PCBs
Random sampling of the PCBs before they enter the soldering furnace.
Observing the EGB regulations
Avoiding errors (see sections 7.7.1).
Noting error displays and messages on the station and notifying the line engineer, if necessary
Carrying out the maintenance work specified in the User Manual
391
7.13 Line engineer profile Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
7.13 Line engineer profile
The line engineers should normally have attended the SIPLACE basic training course and are to
be assigned the following tasks:
Acting as a contact for the operators
Maintaining the machine log book
Monitoring and carrying out maintenance at the specified intervals
Monitoring the workplace to ensure that it is clean and safe
Monitoring conformity with EGB regulations
Carrying out quality control
Following up and reporting fault messages
Making sure that errors have been eliminated
Providing all materials required to produce the job in a timely manner, such as
PCBs
Soldering paste
Components
Feeder modules, etc.
Setting up the station for a new production batch
Checking the settings of the feeder modules
Checking the management data
Asking the responsible programmers to modify placement programs
Ensuring a smooth flow of information between the individual groups
392
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 8 Error information and diagnostics
8 Error information and diagnostics
8.1 General
If errors occur during operations at the placement station, you can all up information concerning
the possible causes and ways of eliminating the error in question. To do this, you start the help
system for the station computer (see Chapter 9).
You call error information on the currently displayed error by clicking the "Error information"
button in the main view (see section 8.2.1).
You can call up information on an observed error of a specific type by clicking the "Error infor-
mation" button in the corresponding error display (see section 8.2.2).
393
8 Error information and diagnostics SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
8.2 Calling error information Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
8.2 Calling error information
If an error occurs during operation, a corresponding error message is displayed in the status bar
in the user interface. In main view, the Error information and Clear error buttons are active
(see Fig. 8.2 - 1).
8
1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 8.2 - 1 Main view with error message
Key to Fig. 8.2 - 1
(1) Type of error (track, machine, transport or general error)

(2) Error number (the error number assigned to the error)
(3) Error message (summary information on error)
(4) "Clear error" button (to acknowledge the error after error elimination)
(5) "Error information" button (to call up help on the current error)
394
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 8.2 Calling error information
8.2.1 Displaying information on the current error
In the main view, click the Error information button.

The main help system window is opened with error information on the current error (see
example in Fig. 8.2 - 3).
8.2.2 Displaying information on a selected error
Click the icon in the toolbar in main view.

The user interface switches to the error display for the last error type to be active. All the errors
of the current error type which have occurred are listed in the display area.
If necessary, use the corresponding toolbar icon to switch the view to the required error type
(see Chapter 4, Section 4.2).
The display area is switched to the selected error type (see example in Fig. 8.2 - 2).
8
Fig. 8.2 - 2 Example: Error type "transport error"
395
In the error table, select the entry for the error about which you want to be informed. The
selected line is displayed in light blue in the table. The "Error information" button is now active.
Click the Error information button.
The main help system window is opened with information on the currently selected error
(see Fig. 8.2 - 3).
8
Fig. 8.2 - 3 Example: Error information on the current error
396
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 8.2 Calling error information
8.2.2.1 Meaning of the colors in the error information display
Red text Error number and error message
Black text Possible cause(s) of the error
Blue text Instructions on how to eliminate the error
Green, underlined text Click to call up additional information on the cause of the error
and further instructions on how to handle the error
NOTE
In addition, the icon for the current error type is displayed to the right of the error message
(red text) (see Chapter 4, Section 4.2). 8
If necessary, click on a green, underlined text in order to call up special supplementary infor-
mation on the current error.
The display area switches to the information corresponding to the selected entry.
8
Fig. 8.2 - 4 Example: Additional information on the current error
397
8.2.2.2 Inserting or editing comments on errors
In all the error information views you are able to enter comments which you can then subsequently
edit if necessary. In this way, you can, for example, document the operations which you have
performed.
If a comment has been created in a view, this is indicated by the presence of a paper clip icon. 8
Inserting a comment
Click the Annotate button in the view in question.

The following dialog box is opened.
8
Enter the text of your comment in the edit field.

Click the Save button to confirm your input.
The dialog box is closed.
The paper clip icon is now displayed in the current help system view (see section 8.2 - 3).
Click this icon if you want to open a window in which you can edit this comment.
Deleting a comment
Click the paper clip symbol in the appropriate view.

The dialog box is opened with the stored comment.
Click the Delete button.
The dialog box is closed. The paper clip icon is no longer displayed in the current view.
398
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 8.3 Clearing errors
8.3 Clearing errors
Once an error has been eliminated, it must be cleared. This is not necessary in the case of errors
which cause a machine stoppage since they are automatically cleared when assembly is
resumed. 8
Once cleared, the error message is no longer displayed in the status bar. However, it is still
entered in the error table for the corresponding error type (see example in Fig. 8.2 - 2). 8
After eliminating the current error, click the Clear error button in main view. The error message
is removed from the status bar and assembly can be continued.
8
399
8.4 Diagnostics Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
8.4 Diagnostics
8.4.1 General comments
If errors occur while the board is being processed, a diagnostics program can be started for this
error. You can start this diagnostics facility either from the main view or from Display error. 8
This diagnostics facility will guide you as far as identifying a possible cause for the error and
suggesting a remedy. This is done by means of a series of questions. Information on the questions
asked can be accessed by pressing an information button. 8
8.4.2 Basic operation
If an error should occur during processing of the board, this error will be displayed in the status
window. 8
Fig. 8.4 - 1 Diagnostics for error message no. 101
400
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 8.4 Diagnostics
The diagnostics main screen is displayed on the station software screen.

Fig. 8.4 - 2 Diagnostics main screen
Key to Fig. 8.4 - 2
1 Information button 2 Finish diagnostics

3 Return to diagnostics main screen 4 Diagnostics buttons
8
NOTE
The symbol and status bars of the station software main menu remain displayed on the screen
and you can change to this view.
If you wish to return to diagnostics, press the Diagnostics button again. 8
401
8.4.2.1 Information button
If information is available on certain menus, the Information button will be displayed.
NOTE
This information must be complied with and can be displayed by pressing the information button. 8
Click on the Information button.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig. 8.4 - 3 Example of information display
Key to Fig. 8.4 - 3
1 Scroll back by window (if active) 2 Scroll down by window (if active)
3 Display additional information (if active) 4 Scroll up displayed window
5 Scroll down displayed window 6 Print displayed window
7 Return to previous window
402
8.4.2.2 Diagnostics buttons
You can select one of three different ways of starting the diagnostics facility. 8
Diagnostics with automatic takeover of the error message

By clicking on this button you can start diagnostics for the errors displayed in the status line. 8
Diagnostics with manual input of the error message 8
Click on this button.

Into the input field type the error number for which you wish to start diagnostics and confirm
this with Enter.
Fig. 8.4 - 4 Diagnostics with manual input of the error message
Key to Fig. 8.4 - 4
1 Input field
403
Diagnosis of an error without error message

By clicking on this button you can start diagnostics for errors for which there is no error message,
such as reduced placement performance, poor placement quality and so on. 8
Fig. 8.4 - 5 Diagnosis of an error without error message
404
8.4.3 Procedure
NOTE
The procedure is explained with the help of an example which uses Diagnostics with automatic
take-over of error message. The procedure is identical for all diagnostic methods and error
messages. 8
If an error occurs, the error message will be displayed on the status line in the main view
(see ). 8

Click on the Diagnostics with automatic take-over of error message button.
Click on the Information button; read and comply with this information.
NOTE
Always read and comply with the information when an Information button appears. 8
Fig. 8.4 - 6 Obtaining information on an error
405
Click on the OK button and answer the questions asked by clicking on the corresponding
buttons.

Fig. 8.4 - 7 Display window in the diagnostics menu
Key to Fig. 8.4 - 7
1 Action window 2 Error message display window

3 Diagnostic method display window
Action window
In the action window, you will be asked about the error in question and provided with a selection
of answers to choose from. If information is available on the action in question, the information
button will be displayed here. 8
Diagnostic method display window

A display window is opened here for every question which you answer for the diagnostics facility.
You can change over to this question by clicking on a display window. 8
Error message display window

The error number of the error which has occurred is displayed here. 8
406
Fig. 8.4 - 8 Example of a question
Answer the question asked by clicking on the appropriate button.
The following screen will be displayed:
407
408
The following screen will be displayed when the cause of the error has been determined by the
diagnostic method. 8
409

Fig. 8.4 - 11 Example of cause and remedy
1 Lower buttons bar 2 Page through additional information

3 Print window 4 Return to previous questions menu
5 Display window for cause and remedy
In the display window the possible cause of the error which has occurred is described and a
possible remedy is suggested. 8
If buttons on the lower buttons bar are active you can page through additional information on
error correction. Click on the corresponding button (see also )
410
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig. 8.4 - 12 Example of additional information
1 Scroll back in displayed window 2 Page through additional windows

3 Display additional information (if active) 4 Scroll up in displayed window
5 Scroll displayed window downwards 6 Print displayed window
7 Return to previous window
You can use the active buttons to call and scroll through all information in the windows.
8
411
412
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 9 Online help system
9 Online help system
9.1 General
The help system integrated in the station computer software allows you to call up online help on
the functions, menus and icons available in the station computers user interface as well as to
consult general station computer information.
The corresponding sections of this chapter contain more detailed information on the various help
system functions. 9
9.1.1 Functions in the "Help" menu
Click Help in the menu bar of the view which is currently active in the SC user interface.
The "Help" menu is opened.
This menu contains all the options which are necessary to call up help on the functions of the
SC user interface, general help on help system operation or information on the station
computer and the installed software. 9
413
9 Online help system SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
9.1.1.1 Displaying the contents of the help system
In the Help menu, click the Content item or press the key combination Ctrl + F1.
The main window of the station computer help system is opened (see Fig. 9.1 - 1).
All the topic areas present in this help system are listed in the windows display area.
9
Fig. 9.1 - 1 Contents of the help system
All topic area or topic entries are displayed in green and are underlined. When you click one
of these entries, the display area switches to the help information for the corresponding topic
or topic area (see Fig. 9.1 - 2). 9
414
9.1.1.2 Displaying help on a topic area
In the help systems "Contents" screen (see section 9.1 - 1), click the entry for the required
topic area (e.g. "Help About Help").
Help information on the selected topic area is now presented in the display area (see example in
Fig. 9.1 - 2).
9
Fig. 9.1 - 2 Example: Topic area "Help About Help"
415
9.1.1.3 Displaying help on the current view
In the Help menu, click the Help item or press the key combination Alt + F1.
The main help system window is opened.
The display area now displays help information on the functions of the view which is currently
active in the SC user interface (see example in Fig. 9.1 - 3).
9
Fig. 9.1 - 3 Example: Help on the current view "Empty Tracks"
Any entry which is linked to supplementary help information is displayed in green and under-
lined. When you click on such an entry, the display area switches to help on the corresponding
topic (see Fig. 9.1 - 4). 9
416
Fig. 9.1 - 4 Example: Help on the topic "Refilling Empty Tracks - Manually"
417
9.1.1.4 Calling help on use of the Windows help system
In the Help menu, click the Help About Help item.

The Windows help window is now displayed with the three tabs "Contents", "Index" and "Find".
Contents tab The help topics are displayed sorted by category.
Index tab A list of the index entries for the help topics is displayed.
Find tab You can search for words or expressions which are present in the
help topics.
For example, click the Index tab.

The topics relating to the use of the help system are displayed.
Select the required topic from the list (e.g. "Bookmark Define") or enter the first few characters
of the required topic name in the edit field (e.g. "Bookm"). The topic is now selected in the list.
Click the Display button.
Help on the selected topic is displayed in a separate window.
9
NOTE
For a detailed description of the functions of the Windows help system and how to use them, please
refer to the corresponding Windows manual or Windows online help. 9
418
9.1.1.5 Calling general station computer information
In the Help menu, click the About ... item.

The following window is opened.
This displays the version designations of the SC, MC and GEM software currently installed on
the station computer together with general station computer data
Fig. 9.1 - 5 Information on the station computer
419
9.1.1.6 Calling help on an object
Press the key combination Shift + F1 in the currently active view of the SC user interface. A
question mark is displayed next to the mouse pointer
Move the mouse pointer and question mark to the required object (e.g. to the "Display errors"
icon) and then click.
The main help system window is opened. The display area contains help information on the
selected object (see example in Fig. 9.1 - 6).
9
Fig. 9.1 - 6 Example: Help on the "Display errors" icon
420
9.1.2 Functions in the main help system window
9.1.2.1 Copying a help file
To make it possible to call up the topics present in the help system independently of the station
computer, it is possible to copy the associated help file to floppy disk so that it can be installed on
an external computer if required.
Open the main help system window (e.g. as described in section 9.1.1.3).
Insert a floppy disk in the station computers 31/2" floppy disk drive ("A:").
In the File menu, select the Copy function.
An MS-DOS window is opened. This displays the help file copy process.
NOTE
The help file that is copied is always the one relating to the currently configured language
version of the SC user interface (e.g. "Bo_eng.hlp" for "English"). 9
When the copy operation has been completed, the MS-DOS window is closed automatically.9
Remove the floppy disk from the drive.

If necessary, copy the help file from the floppy disk to the required computer.
9
9.1.2.2 Printing a help topic
The topic currently displayed in the main help system window can be output on the installed printer9
To do this, enter the File menu and select the function Print Topic ... or click the Print button
(below the menu bar).
The currently selected help topic is printed.
9
421
9.1.2.3 Searching for a help topic
The station computers help system allows you to search for specific help topics. 9
To do this, open the main help system window (e.g. as described in section 9.1.1.3).
In this window, click the Help Topics button (below the menu bar).
The "Help Topics" window is opened with the tabs "Index" and "Find".
9
Fig. 9.1 - 7 "Help Topics" window (Index)
Enter the first few letters of the required term in the edit field.
The first index entry that starts with the entered letters is selected in the list.
422
Click the Display button.

If there are no help topics associated with the selected index entry, the "Help Topics" window
closes and the corresponding topic is immediately displayed in the main help system window.
If further help topics are associated with the selected index entry, the following window is first
opened.
9
Select the entry for the required topic and click the Display button. Both windows are closed
and the selected topic is displayed in the main help system window.
9
NOTE
If you click the "Find" tab in the "Help Topics" window, the extended search functions are displayed
(see section 9.1 - 8). You can use these functions to search for words or composite expressions
which are present in the help topics.
By clicking the "?" button (top right of window), you can call up a description of or help on the
different objects in this window 9
423
Fig. 9.1 - 8 "Help Topics" window (Find)
424
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 10 Component handling
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.1 Overview
10 Component handling
10.1 Overview
The following feeder modules are currently available for supplying various component types to the
placement system: 10
8 mm SII module
3 x 8 mm S module
12/16 mm S module
12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model C/D
12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model E
24/32 mm S module
44 mm S module (80F4)
56 mm S module (80F4)
72 mm s module (80F4)
88 mm s module (80F4)
Linear vibratory feeder, type 3
bulk case feeder
These feeder modules can be used to process the latest package forms of all components, such
as bulk cases, stick steel magazines and taped components. 10
The most important feature of the modular component feeding system is its great flexibility. For
example, the feeding intervals can be set on the module. The tape feeder modules can handle
both paper and blister tapes. In this way, just a small selection of modules is sufficient for inserting
a wide range of component types. 10
The position detection (vision) system on the feeder modules enables the precise component
pick-up position to be determined. The position is determined automatically whenever the feeder
module or component table is changed. 10
Feeder modules can thus be changed quickly and easily, even by inexperienced personnel. 10
PLEASE NOTE 10
Detailed information on the feeder modules is contained in the component feeder module operat-
ing instructions. 10
425
10 Component handling SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
10.1 Overview Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
10.1.1 Safety instructions for processing capacitors based on powdered metal
There is a risk associated with processing capacitors based on powdered metal (e.g. tantalum). 10
The risk is that 10
An exothermic reaction, i.e. a sudden build-up of heat, may occur if these components are
damaged. If the ambient conditions are unfavorable, and depending on the capacitance, this
build-up of heat can cause damage.
This effect can occur when these components are cut.
Please contact your suppliers to clarify whether the components that you handle are affected. 10
In extremely rare cases, this risk can occur in the tape cutter of SIPLACE machines, with the re-
mote possibility of causing a smoldering fire in the waste tape. 10
The ambient conditions are unfavorable if: 10
(1) The components remain on the tape while the set tape cycle is checked (since the operator
can cycle the feeder onward without removing components during this check).
(2) The components remain on the tape, e.g. due to a tear in the cover foil.
(3) The components remain on the tape, and the components or tape do not conform to the
specification, thus increasing the pick-up error rate.
Please follow the instructions given below to minimize the risk when placing capacitors based on
powdered metal. 10
(1) If the component tape is cycled onward manually, the operator must remove any components
remaining in the tape pocket.
(2) If the cover foil tears, the operator must remove any components remaining on the tape.
(3) The waste tape container must be emptied regularly (recommended interval: every hour).
10
10
The feeders are labeled as shown

below:
10
CAUTION
Approved for
To avoid the risk, it is essential to use only feeders that have capacitors based on
been approved for placing such components, namely: metal-powder
Article no.: 00141117-01 Model E Freigegeben fr

Kondensatoren auf
Article no.: 00141118-01 Model C/D 10 Metallpulver-Basis
426
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.2 Technical data for the feeder modules
10.2 Technical data for the feeder modules
The following pages contain diagrams of all the feeder modules, technical data and the module
setting options on the placement system. 10
10.2.1 8 mm S II module
10
Fig. 10.2 - 1 8 mm S II module
Item no. 00141096-xx

Width 30 mm
Tracks per module 2
Maximum number of modules 2 x 20
Magazine capacity for 7" reels Approx. 10000
Reel diameter 7" - 15" (up to 381 mm)
Feeding stroke (variable) 2mm / 4mm
Cycle time 60 ms
Main power supply 30 VDC
427
10.2 Technical data for the feeder modules Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
10.2.2 3 x 8 mm S module
10
Fig. 10.2 - 2 3 x 8 mm S module

Width 30 mm
Tracks per module 3
Magazine capacity for 7" reels Approx. 10,000
Feeding stroke (variable) 2mm / 4mm
Cycle time 60 ms
LIMITED COMPONENT PICK-UP OPTIONS:

If the following combination of track, location and conveyor track is used, components cannot be
picked up from triple conveyors.
Location/Track Conveyor track
1/115 3
3/1 1 10
428
10.2.3 12/16 mm S module
10
Fig. 10.2 - 3 12/16 mm S module

Width 30 mm
Tracks per module 1
Feeding stroke (variable) 4 mm, 8 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm
Cycle time 60 ms 5 ms for a feeding interval of 8 mm
429
10.2.4 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model C/D
Fig. 10.2 - 4 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model C/D

Width 30 mm
Tracks per module 1
Maximum tape height 3,6 mm
Feeding stroke (variable) 4mm, 8mm, 12mm, 16mm
Cycle time 60 ms 5 ms (feeding stroke: 8 mm)
Vibrator time (waiting time) 100 ms
NOTE: 10
Using this feeder type you can adjust the height of the tape support at the pick-up position. 10
Approved for
capacitors based on
metal-powder
DANGER 10
Freigegeben fr
Use only feeders, labeled as shown above, when fee- Kondensatoren auf
Metallpulver-Basis
ding capacitors based on metal-powder (e.g. tanta-
lum). 10 Feeder label (enlarged)
430
10.2.5 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model E
Fig. 10.2 - 5 12 mm S module for capacitors based on powdered metal, model E

Width 30 mm
Tracks per module 1
Maximum tape height 3,6 mm
Feeding stroke (variable) 4mm, 8mm, 12mm, 16mm
Cycle time 60 ms 5 ms (feeding stroke: 8 mm)
Vibrator time (waiting time) 100 ms
Approved for
capacitors based on
metal-powder
DANGER 10
Freigegeben fr
Use only feeders, labeled as shown above, when Kondensatoren auf
feeding capacitors based on metal-powder (e.g. Metallpulver-Basis
tantalum). 10 Feeder label (enlarged)
431
10.2.6 24/32 mm S module
10
Fig. 10.2 - 6 24/32 mm S module

Width 45 mm
Tracks per module 1
Reel diameter Up to 381 mm
Feeding stroke (variable) 4 to 32 mm (in 4 mm increments)
432
10.2.7 Linear vibratory feeder, type 3
10
Fig. 10.2 - 7 Linear vibratory feeder, type 3

Width 30 mm
Tracks per module 1, 2, 3 or 6
Magazine capacity Up to 150 per stick steel magazine
depending on the component length
Stick steel magazine data 4.5 mm wide / x 6
9.5 mm wide / x 3
11 mm wide / x 2
15 mm wide / x 2
30 mm wide / x 1
Cycle time Depends on the component
433
10.2.8 Bulk case feeder (80F4)
10
Fig. 10.2 - 8 Bulk case feeder

Width 30 mm
Tracks per module 2
Magazine capacity Approx. 5000
Feeding rails 0603 / 0.45 mm high Item no. 00142321-xx
0603 / 0.80 mm high Item no. 00142322-xx
0805 / 0.45 mm high Item no. 00142323-xx
0805 / 0.60 mm high Item no. 00142324-xx
0805 / 0.85 mm high Item no. 00142325-xx
0805 / 1.25 mm high Item no. 00142326-xx
Minimelf Item no. 00142328-xx
Cycle time < 80 ms
Compressed air supply 2.0 bar + 0.3 bar
434
10.2.9 44 mm S module (80F4)
10
Fig. 10.2 - 9 44 mm S module

Width 60 mm
Tracks per module 1
Feeding stroke (variable) 4 to 44mm (in 4 mm increments)
435
10.2.10 56 mm S module (80F4)
10

Width 75 mm
Tracks per module 1
Maximum number of modules 2x8
Feeding stroke (variable) 4 to 56mm (in 4 mm increments)
436
10.2.11 72mm S module (80F4)
10

Width 90 mm
Tracks per module 1
437
10.2.12 88mm S module (80F4)
10

Width 98,6 mm
Tracks per module 1
438
10.2.13 Component disposal module (80F4)
10
Fig. 10.2 - 13 Component disposal module
10
Article number 00141200-xx

Width 54mm
Tracks per module 1
Feeder locations occupied 2
Component range up to 27mmx27mm for a 30mmx30mm pocket size
up to 13mmx13mm for a 15mmx30mm pocket size
Maximum component height 14mm
Transport distance (adjustable) 20mm for a 15mmx30mm pocket size
36mm for a 30mmx30mm pocket size
Power supply 30 V-
439
The component disposal module has essentially the same structure as a feeder. The only differ-
ence is that it has an empty tape, rather than a component tape. Faulty components can be placed
in the pockets of this empty tape without damaging them. This means that these components can
subsequently be manually checked, repaired and thus reused. The advantage of the disposal con-
veyor is that the operator can remove the separated components without having to interrupt the
placement process. Once all the pockets on the conveyor belt are full, a message appears on the
monitor, prompting the operator to remove the components. 10
10.2.13.2 System requirements
The following system requirements must be fulfilled in order to use the component disposal mod-
ule: 10
Line software version 501.01 or later

Station software version 405.01 or later
Feeder table software version 3.09 or later
PLEASE NOTE:
The component disposal module must be configured on the line computer and activated on the
station computer. 10
10.2.13.3 Conditions for disposal of components using the component disposal module
A component is placed on the disposal conveyor if the following conditions are fulfilled: 10
10
The component type to be disposed of must be included in the set-up on the line computer.
The component must be identified for return.
Components to be disposed of from a carrier tray must already have been wetted with flux in
the dip fluxer. If this is not the case, they will be returned to the tray.
10
10
440
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.3 Setting up the feeder modules
10.3 Setting up the feeder modules
10.3.1 Preparing the component table and module for set-up
Select the setting range for the feeder module to be used

(see Vibrator configuration).
Move the placement head to the waiting position and press the emergency stop button.
Open the protective covers.
Clean the contact surface for the feeder modules and the contact surface for the feeder mod-
ules on the component table.
Place the feeder module on the previously selected track on the component table (see Vibrator
configuration).
10.3.2 Inserting the module
Insert the module so that the back of the module is held by the centering ball and the front is
fixed in place by the corresponding centering pin on the component table. Make sure that the
module is placed on the component table in the correct position for its width.
Check that the module is firmly seated on the component table.
Connect the module plug to the socket beneath the location.
PLEASE NOTE 10
When you connect the module, make sure that you use the right socket for the location since
the module receives the control pulse via this socket. The feeder module may not work cor-
rectly if it is not connected to the right socket. 10
Close the protective covers and switch the control on again.

Carry out a refill check if necessary.
Continue placement.
441
10.3 Setting up the feeder modules Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
10
Fig. 10.3 - 1 Inserting 30 or 45 mm wide feeder modules on the component table
(1) Feeder module, 30 mm wide

442
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.4 Tape container
10.4 Tape container
10.4.1 Overview
Reels up to 15" in diameter may be used, although for 15" reels you should use spindles as well.
Insert the spindles into the partitions as shown in Fig. 10.4 - 1. 10
PLEASE NOTE 10
We recommend that you use spindles if the tape reel diameter exceeds 5". This will ensure that
the feeder modules operate reliably. 10
Fig. 10.4 - 1 Component table and tape container
(1) Component changeover table (2) Spindle
(3) Waste tape container (4) Partition

(5) Tape container 10
443
10.5 Used tape cutter Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
10.5 Used tape cutter
10.5.1 General
The placement system has a used tape cutter at each of the two component table locations. It is
used to cut off the waste tape. The cut pieces of tape drop into the waste tape container in the
component table. 10
Empty the waste tape container every day.
Fig. 10.5 - 1 Used tape cutter
(1) Stationary cutting blade

(2) Retainer
(3) Moving cutting blade
(4) Electronic control unit
(5) Short stroke cylinder
444
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.5 Used tape cutter
10.5.2 Inserting the tape into the tape cutter
10
Fig. 10.5 - 2 Inserting the tape into the tape cutter
(1) Used tape channel (2) Used tape

(3) Tape feeder module (4) To used tape cutter
445
10.5 Used tape cutter Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
PLEASE NOTE
On SIPLACE automatic placement systems, only use the tape feeder modules specified for these
machines. The used tape channel which removes the used tape is located upstream of the feeder
modules. 10
Insert the tape into the feeder as described in the corresponding section.
Guide the used tape into the used tape channel of the cutter as described in Fig. 10.5 - 2
The used tape guide channels are located upstream of the feeder modules
(see pos. 1 in fig. 10.5 - 2). They are positioned directly above the used tape cutters (see pos. 3
in fig. 10.5 - 2). 10
The tape is automatically guided through the used tape guide channel into the used tape cutter
below. There, the tape is shredded by the pneumatically-actuated cutting blade. The waste tape
then passes via the waste tape chute into the waste container. 10
10
Fig. 10.5 - 3 Used tape container in the component changeover table, withdrawable
(1) Component changeover table

(2) Used tape container, withdrawable
446
10.6 Component table, mobile
10.6.1 Safety instructions for docking and undocking the mobile component table
WARNING 10
Never reach into the gap between the component tables and the placement system frame
while the machine is running (item 1).
or disconnecting the component table power cable at the socket on the placement system
(item 2).
NEVER connect the component table connecting cable to the socket on the placement system
and then operate the component table via the external compressed air control unit (item 3).
Fig. 10.6 - 1 Safety instructions for the mobile component table
447
10.6.2 Undocking the component table
10
Fig. 10.6 - 2 Undocking the mobile component
448
(1) Communication interface connector

(2) Power supply connector for the component table
(3) Compressed air connection
(4) Component table bed
(5) Button for raising and lowering the component table bed
(6) Actuating tube
(7) Fold-down bracket
(8) Holes for the centering pins
(9) Centering pins
(10) Contact surfaces for the slide rails of the component table
(11) Horizontal tensioners
Click on the STOP PROCESSING PCB icon in the MAIN VIEW menu.
The PCB in progress will be completed. The icons of the SINGLE FUNCTIONS menu will then
be activated.
Click on the desired SINGLE FUNCTIONS GANTRY icon.
Click on the GANTRY FUNCTIONS icon.
From this menu, click on the GO TO SET-UP POSITION button.
The selected placement head will move across the PCB transport to prevent it being damaged
when the component table is changed.
Open protective cover of the selected gantry.
Open the side screens.
Open the horizontal tensioners (item 11)
Pull the two actuating tubes (item 6) towards you at the same time and lift up the bracket (item
7) to lock the raised component table bed in its top end position.
Hold down the button (item 5) for raising the component table bed (item 4) until the component
table bed reaches its top end position.
Unplug the component table power cable (item 2).
Unplug the component table control cable (item 1).
Disconnect the compressed air supply (item 3).
Remove the component table.
449
10.6.3 Docking the component table
WARNING 10
Check that the placement head is outside the range of the component table. 10
CAUTION 10
When docking the component table, ensure that the table bed is in its top end position and the
bracket (item 7) is folded up. 10
Cut off the empty tapes for the feeder modules.

Make sure that the contact surface (item 10) for the component table bed is clean.
CAREFULLY push the component table into the placement system.
Connect the compressed air supply (item 3).
Plug in the control cable (item 1).
Plug in the power cable (item 2) for the component table.
Pull the two actuating tubes (item 6) towards you at the same time and then lower the bracket
(item 7) in order to be able to lower the component table bed.
Check that the centring holes in the component table bed lie precisely over the centering pins
of the placement system.
Hold down the button (item 5) until the component table bed reaches its top end position.
Release the button and the component table bed will descend.
Ensure that the centring pins engage in the centring holes in the component table bed and that
the component table bed is fully lowered.
Fold up the bracket (item 7) of the component table.
Lock the two horizontal tensioners (item 11).
Close the side screens and protective cover.
Press the Start button to start the placement system.
10
450
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.7 Wafflepack Changer (80F4)
10.7 Wafflepack Changer (80F4)
10.7.1 Overview
10
Fig. 10.7 - 1 Wafflepack changer on SIPLACE F
10
(1) Wafflepack changer on location 1

(2) Pick&Place head
(3) Collect&Place head
10
10
451
10.7 Wafflepack Changer (80F4) Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
10.7.2 General Information
The use of flatpack ICs is gaining more and more importance in the manufacture of printed circuit
boards. These components have now reached the point where they are almost always delivered
on trays (wafflepack magazines). 10
The space taken up by magazine trays is however relatively high when compared with the com-
ponent density. In addition, due to their low holding capacity, the wafflepack magazines must fre-
quently be changed and if this has to be done by hand this necessarily involves interrupting the
placement process. 10
But when a wafflepack changer is used there is no time lost unnecessarily in the storing and au-
tomatic changing of the wafflepack magazines. Programmed access to up to 28 freely selectable
wafflepack magazines also increases the range of available components. 10
NOTE
The wafflepack changer is located on the lefthand side of the SIPLACE F table.
The wafflepack changer does not require the entire width of the component table. On this side of
the table 10 locations remain free which can be used for the 20 x 8 mm tape module, for example.10
452
10.7.3 Principle of the Wafflepack Changer
With the wafflepack changer on the SIPLACE F it is possible to hold up to 28 wafflepack maga-
zines and to change these fully automatically. The trays (level) for the wafflepack magazines are
numbered in sequence from bottom to top, with the lowest number at the bottom (1 - 28).
The magazine storage unit travels vertically until the level selected lies with in the travel range of
the horizontal axis. The horizontal axis then removes the tray from the level and transfers it into
the access area of the placement head.
The following Fig. 10.7 - 1 shows the basic principle behind the wafflepack changer.
Fig. 10.7.2 Principle of the wafflepack changer
(1) Magazine storage unit

(2) Lift
(3) Horizontal axis
453
10.7.3.1 Functional Sequence
Requirements 10
Flatpack magazines with the corresponding components are defined in the set-up.
After set-up conversion the magazine storage unit will make a reference run.
The PCB camera approaches the fiducials which are marked on a strip (see Fig. 10.7.2). 10
Fig. 10.7 - 3 Functional sequence
(1) The selected level of the magazine storage unit is positioned on the feeder axis (horizontal).
(2) The tray is transferred to the access area of the placement head.
(3) The components are removed.
(4) The tray is returned again.
10
The lift in the magazine storage unit brings the tray from the selected level into position on the
horizontal feeder axis.
The tray with the flatpack magazine is brought into the placement head's access area.
Once the desired components have been removed by the placement head, the magazine is
returned in the reverse sequence of operations.
454
NOTE
If the placement sequence is interrupted with the wafflepack changer being switched off, the set-
up and the current fill level will remain saved in memory. 10
If the placement sequence is restarted using the set-up which was being used when the se-
quence was aborted, the placement machine will be able to pick up the next component from
the point where it picked up the previous one.
The position of the trays in the flatpack magazine storage unit and the components they are
filled with is added to the set-up. The wafflepack changer is defined as Location 1. In this con-
nection see UNIX line computer user manual, under 'Station editor'.
10.7.4 Inserting the Trays
The trays are monitored to make sure they are in the correct position in the magazine storage 10
Fig. 10.7.4 Position of the trays - viewed from the top
(1) Transport direction

(2) Driver notch
(3) Magazine storage unit
(4) Check notch
(5) Driver notch
455
It should be noted here that the driver notches in the magazine carriers are inserted forwards with
respect to the direction of transport (see Fig. 10.7.4). The check notches of the individual maga-
zine carriers must be positioned one above the other and point in the direction of the magazine
storage unit. 10
10.7.5 Display and Operating Elements
The wafflepack changer has an EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-button and a switch
for changing the speed. These two control elements are located on the machine base at the rear
of the wafflepack changer. 10
Key - slow 10
With flatpack magazines carrying small components which could fall out of their pockets if the flat-
pack magazine moves quickly, it is possible to reduce the speed for the flatpack magazine.
Press the Slow key.
All flatpack magazines will now travel at a slower speed. 10
EMERGENCY STOP button 10

Press the EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-button. The power supply will be switched
off and the entire system shut down. 10
10.7.6 Safety Devices
EMERGENCY STOP mushroom-head push-button 10

The entire system with, for example, SIPLACE F and wafflepack changer is immediately stopped.
At this point placement can be continued or aborted. Make sure that all boards have been com-
pletely assembled. 10
Safety panel 10
Once the safety panels are opened the wafflepack changer is switched into a de-energized state
and the wafflepack changers operational sequence stopped. Upon the safety panel being closed
the wafflepack changer resumes operations. 10
CAUTION
The wafflepack changer safety door should not be opened while a component is being picked up
from the wafflepack changer. 10
456
10.7.7 Refilling the Wafflepack Changer
NOTE
The trays with the item numbers 00132110-04 (old) or 00116 431-xx (new) can both be used. How-
ever the two types cannot be used together: in other words, only trays of exactly the same type
can be used at one time in the set-up. 10
The wafflepack changer can be refilled without the machine having to stop.
It is possible to approach and quit the filling position of the wafflepack changer even while
placement is in progress. In this connection see also Section 4.3.5 of this users manual.
In the Feeders menu and in its submenu "Wafflepack changer" those functions are described
which can be performed using the wafflepack changer.
If a wafflepack changer is physically installed and wired up to the corresponding location it will
be possible to approach and quit under Single functions even when there is no corresponding
set-up. It is not possible to input the fill level.
If refilling is carried out with a different set-up during the course of placement, the fill levels will
have to be communicated to the station afterwards (after transmission of the corresponding
set-up).
Checking the magazine carrier assignments after quitting the refill position will be carried out
against the current set-up obtaining at the station. If refilling has already been carried out for a
subsequent set-up, the information in response to the request may not agree with the future
set-up.
10.7.8 System Behavior in Fault Situations
If the refill position is selected during pick-up or when a magazine carrier is being changed, the
request will be rejected with the message "Wafflepack changer currently being processed".
Once the pick-up has been completed it will still be necessary to reselect the menu item Go to
refill position.
If the placement head accesses the wafflepack changer while it is in the refill position, the
placement sequence will be suspended until after the status message 'Waiting for wafflepack
changer refill position to be quit' has been issued and refilling of the wafflepack changer has
been finished by the operator.
If the operator selects any other wafflepack changer function, apart from Quit refill position,
while the changer is still in the refill position, the request will be refused with the message Waf-
flepack changer in refill position. The same will apply with Quit refill position if the changer is
not actually in the refill position.
If a wafflepack changer function is selected for a location where there is no wafflepack changer
then this will be refused after a 10 sec timeout with the message "No wafflepack changer at
this location".
457
10.7.9 Fitting the Wafflepack Changer
Before moving the WPC into the machine, remove the upper part of the camera of the compo-
nent vision module.
NOTE
The wafflepack changer can be moved into and out of the machine on its wheels, but it should be
noted that these wheels are not suitable for moving the wafflepack changer over longer distances.
DANGER OF OVERTURNING! In such cases use the suitable lift truck (from item no. 00123141-
01). 10
Move the wafflepack changer carefully into the desired location in the machine.The docking
pins of the wafflepack changer must be located above the docking slots of the SIPLACE ma-
chine.
Check the dimension (87 0.5 mm) between lower edge of tray and top of component table
(see Fig. 10.7 - 5).
458
10
Fig. 10.7 - 5 Aligning the wafflepack changer
(1) With socket wrench UP/DOWN

(2) Clamping screw
(3) Stroke
(4) Docking pin
(5) Upper edge of the magnetic bar of the component table
(6) Lower edge of tray
(7) Nominal stroke (459 mm)
(8) Refill position (470 mm)
Undo the clamping screws at the feet (see Fig. 10.7 - 5) and using a 10 mm ball socket wrench
rotate the wafflepack changer downwards until the docking pin engages. The wafflepack
changer must at this point be aligned using the machine spirit level fitted to the wafflepack
changer.
Tighten up the clamping screws and check the machine spirit level again.
Reinstall the upper part of the camera on the component vision module.
459
10.7.10 Technical Data
10
Wafflepack changer
Length approx. 1475 mm
Width approx. 620 mm
Height approx. 1355 mm
Weight approx. 240 kg
Magazine size 238 mm x 338 mm
Vertical stroke 470 mm
Horizontal stroke 730 mm
Pitch 17 mm
Storage unit capacity 28 trays for holding flatpack magazines
Tray 260 mm x 360 mm
Max. weight of storage unit 50 kg
Floor load < 25N/cm
Max. magazine size 240 mm x 340 mm
Magazine height 15 mm, including component
Max. number of component types 200 per wafflepack changer
Changeover time (magazine/magazine) 3 sec.
460
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.8 Support for Flatpack Magazine 80F4 (Manual Tray Rest)
10.8 Support for Flatpack Magazine 80F4 (Manual Tray

Rest)
PLEASE NOTE
The manual tray holder must only be placed on the right side of the SIPLACE F. The tray holder
can only be positioned so that the right edge covers no more than track 73. 10
10.8.1 General Information
With the support for flatpack magazines components can be picked up from individual flatpack
magazines. The flatpack magazines are changed by hand. 10
The support for flatpack magazines is positioned on the component table like a feeder. 10
There are two different versions of the support which differ in their width. 10
Support for large flatpack magazine (260 mm) iitem No. 00116430-01 10
Support for small flatpack magazine (136 mm) item No. 00116432-01 10
10.8.2 Installation
Insert the front side of the manual tray rest into the associated centering pin (B in Fig. 10.8 - 1).
Position the rear of the manual tray rest into the spherical cap on the component table (A in
Fig. 10.8 - 1).
Make sure the manual tray rest is resting securely on the component table.
Position one side of the flatpack tray in the mounting (C in Fig. 10.8 - 1) and then press the
other side into the mounting (D in Fig. 10.8 - 1).
Slide the flatpack magazine up against the stop (E in Fig. 10.8 - 1).
Secure the flatpack magazine carrier by pressing the clamp downwards (F in Fig. 10.8 - 1).
To remove the flatpack magazine carrier press the clamp once more.
NOTE
With the "mounting for small flatpack magazine" (136 mm) a flatpack magazine (JEDEC or CEN-
ELEC flatpack magazines) can be fitted directly to the mounting, in other words, without a flatpack
magazine carrier being used.The clamp will however need changing. 10
461
10.8 Support for Flatpack Magazine 80F4 (Manual Tray Rest) Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
10.8.3 Changing the Retainer
Hold the retainer firmly (G in Fig. 10.8 - 1). Press the clamp (F in Fig. 10.8 - 1) downwards and
remove the retainer by pressing it out sideways.
Fig. 10.8 - 1 Installation/Removal
(1) Centering pins

(2) Magnetic rail
(3) Spherical caps
10.8.4 Data Input
Define the flatpack magazines as described in the SIPLACE UNIX line computer UNIX users 10
manual.
10
10
462
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 10.9 Placing of Components With a Height Clearance of up to 21 mm (80F4)
10.9 Placing of Components With a Height Clearance of

up to 21 mm (80F4)
10.9.1 Defining the Height Clearance
Height clearance means the distance between the upper transport edge of the PCB and the upper
edge of the component, i.e. 10
10
Height clearance = PCB height + component height
10
In other words, the height clearance specifies the height that a placement head needs in order to
avoid the risk of a head crash when holding a component. 10
10.9.2 How to Verify a Height Clearance of 21 mm with the Pick&Place Head
In the past, the height clearance for a 6x or 12x Collect&Place head when holding a component
was limited to 11.5 mm in order to prevent the risk of a head crash when inserting tall components.10
10
A recently implemented function now enables components with a height clearance of up to 21 mm

to be inserted with the IC head. To do this, the nozzle is removed from the Collect&Place head for
the entire duration of the program for a segment. During placement by the IC head, the segment
is rotated into the bottom star position without a nozzle. 10
10
In order to insert a component with a height clearance of more than 11.5 mm, the line computer
generates a nozzle configuration without a nozzle for the 6x or 12x Collect&Place head. A mes-
sage also appears on screen to inform the operator that 5 or 11 nozzles are in use. Before the
placement program starts, the Collect&Place head sets down the extra nozzle in the nozzle
changer. If no nozzle changer is installed, the operator is prompted to remove the nozzle manually.10
WARNING
The extended height clearance function is only suitable use with 12 - 72 mm tape feeder modules.
It is not intended for use with wafflepack changers, manual trays and linear conveyors. 10
10
463
10.9 Placing of Components With a Height Clearance of up to 21 mm (80F4) Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
464
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 11 Station extensions /Hardware
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.1 Nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head
11 Station extensions /Hardware
11.1 Nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place

head
11.1.1 Overview
S-20 11
The placement system is supplied as standard with two Collect&Place heads. As an option, a noz-
zle changer can be installed for each Collect&Place head. 11
F4 11
A nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head can be installed, without loss of feeder
locations, to the left of the PCB conveyor. 11
This enables the nozzle configuration to be changed quickly, thus allowing the Collect&Place head
to be quickly adapted to the needs of the placement process. 11
The nozzle changer consists of at least one and up to seven magazines, each with twelve nozzle
holders (see Fig. 11.1 - 1). The magazines are mounted on a common WPC tray.Each magazine
is centered using two parallel pins, and fixed in place with a screw. 11
11
11.1.2 Technical data - Nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head
11
Nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head
Dimensions (length x width x height) 560 mm x 60 mm x 46 mm

Number of nozzle holders min.12 / max. 84
Nozzle types 7xx
Time required to open and close the locking plate < 200 ms
Capacity of the reject bin approx. 50 nozzles
Pneumatic system 5.3 bar air line
465
11 Station extensions /Hardware SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
11.1 Nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11
Fig. 11.1 - 1 Overview of the nozzle changer for the 12-segment Collect&Place head
(1) Magazine (2) Reject device for nozzles
(3) Collecting bin for rejected nozzles (4) Nozzle changer, base unit
(5) Nozzle changer, support 11
11.1.3 Basic principles
The nozzles are seated in nozzle holders, and are fixed in place by a movable locking plate. The
locking plate can be moved up to 6 mm by a pneumatic cylinder. All the nozzles are either clamped
or released, depending on the position of this plate. The locking plate is always left in the closed
position if no nozzle exchange is taking place. 11
All the nozzle changer magazines have a position fiducial for position recognition purposes. The
magazine locations on the nozzle changer are identified by numbers 1 to 7. The nozzle holders in
the magazines are numbered consecutively from 1 to 12 (see Fig. 11.1 - 3). 11
466
PLEASE NOTE 11
Special magazines are available upon request, and are given a special identification. Please con-
tact Siemens PL EA 1E to discuss. 11
Picking up a nozzle 11
The Collect&Place head Z-axis moves down.
The locking plate (item 3 in Fig. 11.1 - 2) opens and releases the nozzles.
The nozzle is picked up from the sleeve of the Collect&Place head.
The Z-axis moves up.
Returning a nozzle 11
The locking plate (item 3 in Fig. 11.1 - 2) opens and releases the nozzles.
The Collect&Place head Z-axis moves down and releases the nozzle.
The locking plate closes.
The Collect&Place head Z-axis moves up.
Rejecting defective nozzles 11

At the reject device (item 2 in Fig. 11.1 - 1), the Collect&Place head Z-axis moves down 14 mm,
and thus feeds the defective nozzle into the hole in the reject device.
The Z-axis moves up again, and the nozzle is removed from the sleeve by spring wires.
The nozzle drops into the collecting tray of the empty tape track (item 3 in Fig. 11.1 - 1).
467
11
Fig. 11.1 - 2 Magazine and nozzle holders
11
(1) Position fiducial

(2) Locking plate
(3) Nozzle holder
(4) Hole for the parallel pin (7) for centering the magazines
(5) Hole for the parallel pin of the moving mechanism
(6) Slot for the parallel pin (7) for centering the magazines
(7) Parallel pin for centering the magazines
(8) Parallel pins for opening and closing the locking plate
(9) Magazines
468
11.1.4 Notes on operation
When you fill a magazine with a certain nozzle type for the first time, mark the magazine with
an adhesive label.
PLEASE NOTE 11
Only one nozzle type must be used in each magazine.
Fill the magazines off the machine, and always replace complete magazines. 11
Open the locking plate, and insert the nozzles into the nozzle holders.
Close the locking plate so that the nozzles cannot drop out of the magazines.
CAUTION 11
The magazines must not be filled until all the nozzles on the Collect&Place head have been
returned to their magazines. 11
See the UNIX line computer user manual for instructions on programming the nozzle changer
on the line computer.
PLEASE NOTE 11
Be careful not to drop components onto the magazines, since they could cause the locking
plate to jam.
Also avoid dropping components onto free feeder locations, since the components will stick to
the magnetic bar. The work flow may be interrupted if the feeders are not placed on the com-
ponent feeder table correctly. You should therefore regularly clean the magazines and free
locations.
469
11.1.5 Position recognition
Every magazine has a position fiducial for position recognition purposes. 11
11
Fig. 11.1 - 3 Nozzle changer - position recognition
11
(1) Position fiducial

(2) Nozzle position in the magazine with respect to the position fiducial
11
See chapter 6 Vision functions for information on fiducial handling. 11
470
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.2 Component barcode
11.2 Component barcode
11.2.1 General
The placement machine allows the track assignment to be checked using a barcode reader, and
the component data to be read from the component reels. 11
Fig. 11.2 - 1 Component barcode reader
(1) Barcode reader
Track allocation 11
There are four-digit barcode strips on the lateral protective covers in order to identify the track al-
location. The first digit is used to identify the component feeder table (1 or 2). The other three digits
indicate the track number. Return barcodes are provided at both ends of the barcode strip. The
barcode strips are numbered consecutively in intervals of two (1, 3, 5, 7, ), and each strip is used
for 2 tracks (barcode 1 = track 1 and 2). 11
471
11.2 Component barcode Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Components 11
Data is read from the component reels in order to compare the stock of components with the quan-
tity required in the set-up file (refill check), for example. 11
An audible signal is given to confirm that each dataset has been read successfully. 11
PLEASE NOTE 11
The component barcode reader option must be configured on the line computer.
Barcodes that start with number 1 or 2, and are less than 5 characters long, are interpreted as
track barcodes. All other barcodes (that do not start with number 1 or 2, and are more than 5 char-
acters long) are interpreted as component barcodes. 11
11.2.2 Notes on operation
The barcode reader must be connected.
The barcode must be entered on the line computer for every component.
To do this, select the Set-up check with barcode function from the Machine options menu.
Fig. 11.2 - 2 Set-up check with barcode
472
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.2 Component barcode
PLEASE NOTE: 11
If one of the barcode digits is assigned a wild card (star *), this digit will not be evaluated. This filter
is used to suppress certain data in the barcode, such as the date or company name. 11
Once you have activated the component barcode on the line computer, and selected Set-up
check with barcode from the machine options at the station, Refill location and Refill track
with barcode functions can no longer be used manually.
A manual Refill can still be used on tracks with components without barcodes, even if the refill
check is switched on.
Procedure if the barcode cannot be read: 11

Switch off the refill check in the machine options.
Enter the barcode manually.
11
11
11.2.3 Operation
Select the Empty tracks view from the Set-up menu.

Use the barcode reader to read the desired track barcode.
If the track is present in the set-up, and the component has a barcode, the Set-up check with
barcode dialog will appear, specifying the track concerned.
PLEASE NOTE 11
You can open the dialog by clicking on the desired track or by clicking on the Set-up check
with barcode button. 11
Once the return barcode has been compared and read successfully, the track can be refilled. 11
473
11.2 Component barcode Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.2.4 Technical data
Connection Station computer

Data entry Via barcode scanner or keyboard
Number of characters Up to 40
Barcode starts with number 1 or 2, and is less than
Not permissible
5 characters long
Number of barcodes Up to 6 per component
Filter for suppressing data Up to 1 per barcode
Code 39 (standard or ASCII)
Code 2 of 5, interleaved and normal
Preset code types
Code 128, UPC/EAN/JAN codes
474
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.3 Dual conveyor
11.3 Dual conveyor
11.3.1 Structure of the dual conveyor
The conveyor belts are driven by DC motors. Each center conveyor has a lifting table for clamping
the PCBs. The width of the PCB conveyor can be adjusted, either using the menu or from the line
computer. 11
11
Fig. 11.3 - 1 Structure of the dual conveyor
(1) Input conveyor (2) Center conveyor

(3) Output conveyor (4) Lifting table
T1 Transport track 1 11 T2 Transport track 2 11
11.3.2 General
As the name suggests, the dual conveyor has two tracks. These are independent of one another,
both electrically and mechanically. As standard, the fixed transport side is on the right, although
there is another variant in which the fixed transport side is on the left. 11
475
11.3 Dual conveyor Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
The transport type can be set to either synchronous dual conveyor or asynchronous dual con-
veyor. To do this, enter the transport type in the machine data (CONFIG.MA). 11
11.3.3 Definition of the transport tracks
The right-hand transport track (viewed in the transport direction) is designated transport 1, and
the left-hand track as transport 2 (see Fig. 11.3 - 1). 11
11.3.4 Changing the transport type
Transport type Entry in CONFIG.MA
Single conveyor 0
Synchronous dual conveyor 1
Asynchronous dual conveyor 2
11.3.5 Asynchronous transport type
11.3.6 Description
In asynchronous mode, one PCB is processed on one transport track, while another PCB on the
second transport track is moved into the placement position. This saves the full transport time,
greatly increasing output, particularly for PCBs with a short cycle time. 11
11.3.7 Function
If the machine is supplied with job data (cluster, set-up), at any given time during placement the
PCBs on the input conveyors are transported onto the center conveyor (if it is free). The placement
sequence starts as soon as a PCB has been transported onto the center conveyor concerned. The
PCBs are processed one after another. 11
PLEASE NOTE 11
The components to be placed, and the width of the PCBs on transport tracks 1 and 2 must be iden-
tical. 11
If the placement sequence is interrupted, the transport interface will be disabled, and the PCBs
currently on the center conveyors will be completed. 11
The transport interface is enabled or disabled for both transport tracks at the same time. 11
476
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.3 Dual conveyor
11.3.8 Synchronous transport type
11.3.8.1 Description
In synchronous mode, two PCBs of the same size are moved into the placement position together.
These PCBs must be processed as a common cluster. 11
This enables the topside and underside of a PCB to be processed on the same line. As a result,
it takes less time to transport the PCBs since two PCBs are always moved at the same time. 11
11.3.8.2 Function
PCBs on transport tracks 1 and 2 are moved synchronously onto the transport sections (i.e. the
conveyors are controlled synchronously, but independently of one another). The components to
be placed for transport tracks 1 and 2 must be organized into a cluster via two subpanels. (See
the user manual for the line computer). 11
If only one transport track (or center conveyor) is full when the placement sequence starts, the
subpanel on this section will be identified as not for placement. 11
11.3.9 Controlling the dual conveyor using the Single Functions menu
Control of the dual conveyor and the Single Functions menu are described in chapter 4 of this user
manual. 11
11.3.9.1 Automatic width adjustment on the dual conveyor
PLEASE NOTE 11
The desired conveyor width relates to both conveyors. When the command is received, the con-
veyors are set to the desired width one after another.
Automatic width adjustment is deactivated if synchronous transport is selected. 11
477
11.3 Dual conveyor Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.3.10 Technical data for the dual conveyor
50 mm x 50 mm to 460 mm x 216,5 mm
PCB format
2" x 2" to 18" x 8.5"
PCB thickness 0.3 mm to 4.5 mm
On top: 4.5 mm - PCB thickness
Max. PCB warpage
On bottom: 0.3 mm + PCB thickness
Clearance on PCB underside 25 mm (standard), 40 mm (option)
830 15 mm (standard)
900 15 mm (option)
930 15 mm (option)
950 15 mm (SMEMA option)
Type of interface Siemens (standard), SMEMA (option)
Component-free handling edge 3 mm
Fixed conveyor edge Right (standard), left (option)
Components on each conveyor Synchronous: same or different, asynchronous: same
PCB width on each conveyor Synchronous: different, asynchronous: same
Ink spot recognition Synchronous: not possible, asynchronous: possible
Automatic width adjustment Synchronous: not possible, asynchronous: possible
11.3.11 Maintenance
Maintenance for the individual conveyors and the additional lifting table is exactly the same as for
the standard conveyor. Each conveyor belt must be maintained as described in the maintenance
instructions. 11
478
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.4 PCB barcode
11.4 PCB barcode
11.4.1 Overview
The PCB barcode reader is used to automatically record and decode barcodes on PCBs. The
PCB barcode reader sends the read data via its serial interface to the machine controller for fur-
ther processing. 11
The PCB barcode readers are installed on the input side of the placement machine, above and
below the PCB conveyor, so that barcode labels on the topside and underside of the PCBs can
be read.
One or two PCB barcode readers may be retrofitted in order to read the topside and underside of
the PCB on the transport track. 11
Fig. 11.4 - 1 Position of the modules on the input side of the placement machine
(1) Barcode reading head

(2) Profiled rail for underside PCB barcode reader
(3) Profiled rail for topside PCB barcode reader
479
11.4 PCB barcode Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
The PCB barcode readers are fixed to the top and bottom profiled rail using retainers. These can
be positioned as required on the profiled rails, and aligned with respect to the barcode labels. De-
pending on the position of the barcode strips, the barcode reader can be attached in a few simple
steps so that the strips can be read parallel to or across the PCB transport direction. 11
11.4.2 Laser safety instructions
Laser radiation 11
The radiation from the laser diode (infrared or IR

light) of the PCB barcode reader is harmful to the
human eye, 11
so you should never look into the laser beam.

Never direct the PCB barcode reader into other
peoples eyes.
When installing the barcode reader, make sure
that the laser beam cannot be not reflected during
ATTENTION
use.
LASER RADIATION If you open the housing during use, the scanning cy-
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE BEAM
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT cle will continue, and the laser diode will continue to
EN 60825 1991 switch on. 11
Max. output radiation: 1.0 mW
Wavelength: 670 nm The laser beam output at the barcode template win-
dow does not exceed 1.0 mW. The PCB barcode
reader thus conforms to protection class 2. 11
Fig. 11.4 - 2 Laser safety instructions for the PCB barcode reader
11.4.3 Functional description
11.4.3.1 PCB barcode reader for the single conveyor
The SIPLACE PCB barcode reader supports the flexible manufacture of SMD products, and in-
creases placement reliability. It recognizes all the code types conventionally used in industrial ap-
plications. 11
The laser scanner reads the barcode label on the topside or underside of each incoming PCB as
they are transported onto the input conveyor. The barcode data enables the line computer to au-
tomatically select the correct barcode allocation list from the previously created barcode assign-
ment list, and sends it to the station. If a barcode filter was defined, only the data that is identified
as relevant will be compared in the barcode. This procedure is carried out time neutrally during
placement of the PCB already in the machine. If several PCBs with the same barcode enter in
succession, the program is only transferred the first time. The following requirements apply to all
products to be produced using the PCB barcode: 11
480
The component set-up must be identical on all the machines on the line
All PCBs must be of the same width
11.4.3.2 PCB barcode reader for the dual conveyor
On the dual conveyor, the PCB barcode is only used to transfer the barcode via the GEM interface.
This is absolutely essential since the placement program cannot be supplied automatically. 11
Max. component sizes for the single con- Standard: (L x W) up to 460 mm x 460 mm
veyor Option: (L x W) up to 508 mm x 460 mm
(same width for all the jobs in a sequence)
Label dimensions Stroke width B: 0.19 < B 0.3 mm
(corresponds to high and medium density)
Stroke length: 4 mm*
Length of the barcode template window 90 mm
Label alignment on the PCB ** Parallel or perpendicular with respect to the
PCB transport direction, as close as possible to the fixed
transport side.
Label colors (contrast ratio > 70% to DIN Coding: black, dark green, dark blue
66236) Background: white, beige, yellow, orange
Code types Code 39, Code 128 / EAN 128,
Codabar, 2/5 IATA 2/5 industrial,
2/5 interleaved, UPC, EAN,
Pharma Code, EAN Addendum
Complete barcode up to 25 digits (a barcode filter can also be defined)
Laser scanner safety Laser diode 670 nm (red) / 1 mW
Laser protection class 2, type of protection IP65
Station and line software Version 405.xx or later
Read in / evaluation duration time neutral (T 1 s), since it is carried out in parallel to
placement of the previous PCB
* This value can only be achieved if the barcode label on the PCB passes through the scanner
perpendicular to the machines transport direction. 11
** The position of the barcode scanner on the input conveyor can be easily adjusted, depending
on where the barcode labels are located on the PCBs. 11
481
11.4.5 Assembly options for the PCB barcode reader
Front view 11 Side view 11
PCB barcode
Assembly for reader topside
PCB barcode on
the PCB topside
Assembly for
PCB barcode on
the PCB underside
Profiled rail
Profiled rail
PCB barcode
reader underside
Plan view 11
Position of the PCB barcode

reader if the barcode strip
Position of the PCB barcode
is aligned perpendicular to
reader if the barcode strip
the PCB transport direction.
is aligned parallel to
the PCB transport direction.
Fig. 11.4 - 3 Assembly options for the PCB barcode reader
482
11.4.6 Configuring the PCB barcode reader
The PCB barcode reader is configured using barcode labels. The retrofit kit contains the program
for defining these labels. 11
11.4.7 Displaying the PCB barcode
This menu is used to display in a list box the last barcode to be read by the PCB barcode reader.11
The box also indicates if the barcode was read incorrectly, a start signal was received, the wrong
format was identified or no data was available. 11
Select the PCB barcode submenu under Options from the menu bar.
. 11
111 2 11
Fig. 11.4 - 4 Displaying the PCB barcode
(1) List box

(2) Status display
To delete the list, click on the Delete list button.
483
The barcode mode operating state is shown in the status display of the menu window. This op-
erating state is activated and deactivated by the line computer.
PLEASE NOTE
This menu is only active if the PCB barcode option is installed, and has been activated in the ma-
chine options. 11
484
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.5 Ceramic substrate centering
11.5 Ceramic substrate centering
11.5.1 General
The ceramic substrate can be centered either mechanically or optically. 11
With optical centering, the fiducials can be detected with either normal or oblique lighting. 11
11.5.2 Possible centering types
The following centering types for ceramic substrates can be entered in the transport type machine
data (REAL.MA). 11
Transport type Centering

4 Mechanical substrate centering with normal lighting
5 Oblique lighting only with Y axis PCB clamping unit
6 Mechanical substrate centering with oblique lighting
11.5.3 Mechanical centering
11.5.3.1 General
Mechanical substrate centering is used to lock ceramic substrates firmly in position in the X and
Y directions in such a way that the material is not damaged. Ceramic substrates can also be
placed right up to the edge. 11
11.5.3.2 Changing the ceramic substrate on the PCB
Disconnect the air line and power cable (see point 1 in Fig. 11.5 - 1).
Remove the ceramic substrate centering (see point 2 in Fig. 11.5 - 1).
Detach the base of the ceramic substrate centering unit (see point 3 in Fig. 11.5 - 2).
Remove the three clamping parts (see point 4 in Fig. 11.5 - 1), and fit the standard guide at this
point.
Fit the hold-down bracket (see point 5a and 5b in Fig. 11.5 - 1).
Adjust the size of the PCB (see point 6 in Fig. 11.5 - 1).
Use the SITEST program to edit the transport type (see table in 11.5.2) in the machine data.
See also Section 5.3.1.1 of this user manual for use of the Single functions.
485
11.5 Ceramic substrate centering Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Fig. 11.5 - 1 General overview (plan view)
486
11
Fig. 11.5 - 2 Ceramic substrate centering (side view)
(1) Connecting nozzle

(2) Ceramic substrate centering sensor
(3) Base
11.5.3.3 Maintenance
Clean and grease the ball race in the X-axis centering unit.
If necessary, check that the pneumatic driving mechanism is running smoothly.
The conveyor should be maintained as described in the maintenance instructions.
487
Substrate format 50 mm x 50 mm to 100 mm x 180 mm

Substrate thickness 0.5 mm to 1.5 mm
Substrate model unscribed (without problems)
scribed (requires testing)
Support on the conveyor 2.5 mm
Optical centering: field of view of the PCB vision module 5.7 mm x 5.7 mm
Type of illumination for light pastes: PCB vision module (standard)
Type of illumination for dark pastes and close spacing to
adjacent structures (> 1 mm) Oblique lighting (option)
Fiducial criteria See PCB vision module position recog-
nition
Mechanical centering:
X/Y centering accuracy 0.07 mm / 4 sigma
PCB underside clearance 12 mm
Compressed air connection 5.5 bar
11.5.5 Optical centering with oblique lighting
11.5.5.1 General
For optical centering, the special features of the ceramic substrate must be taken into account.
The contrast depends very much on the paste used for the adjustment structure, the clear area
surrounding the adjustment structure, and the type of illumination. 11
The oblique lighting unit is located on the front part of the sub-gantry camera. 11
Fig. 11.5 - 3 Oblique lighting unit for the sub-gantry camera
11
Oblique lighting may be switched on instead of the existing lighting (see table in Section 11.5.2).11
488
PLEASE NOTE
Oblique lighting can only be used on the sub-gantry camera. 11
11.5.5.2 Fiducial mark recommendation for ceramic substrates
The contrast between the carrier package material and the circuit-board conductor layer is gener-
ally very small with ceramic substrates. The fiducials must therefore be selected with regard to
certain criteria concerning the fiducial shape and structure. Recommended fiducial shapes and
structures are given below. 11
Fiducial shape 11
We recommend a rectangle or square with an edge length of > 1 mm, and a clearance
of > 0.5 mm. 11
11
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
Fig. 11.5 - 4 Recommended fiducial shape
PLEASE NOTE
Single crosses are also suitable, but they take up more space. 11
489
Fiducial structure 11
Recommendation 1
Fiducial structure Black resistive paste as the background, with conductive paste printed on it as
the fiducial.
Recommendation Background 0.75 mm larger than the fiducial on all sides.
Method of illumination Normal light
Advantage Good contrast, good sharpness;
Reference Circuit-board conductor layer
Assessment This combination gives the best results. Highly recommended.
Recommendation 2
Fiducial structure Fiducial made from circuit-board conductor material, e.g. 6119, and overprinted
with passivated glass 4330.
Method of illumination Oblique light
Advantage No additional steps required
Assessment Fiducials are less sharp than for recommendation 1. Recommended.
Recommendation 3
Fiducial structure Fiducials made from circuit-board conductor layer against a free ceramic back-
ground.
Method of illumination Oblique or normal light (depending on the paste)
Advantage No additional steps required
Note Fiducials are less sharp than for recommendation 2.
The fiducial image depends on the surrounding free surface. It may be neces-
sary to teach every circuit separately.
Assessment Recommended under certain conditions.
490
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.6 Nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head
11.6 Nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head
11.6.1 Overview
11
Fig. 11.6 - 1 Mounting position of the nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head
(1) Magazine for 5 nozzles

(2) Reject bin
(3) Mounting plate
491
11.6 Nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
The SIPLACE F machine is equipped as standard with a nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head.
The scope of delivery includes a nozzle magazine for five nozzles, e.g. four standard nozzles from
the 4xx series, and one special nozzle. Three additional nozzle magazines can be retrofitted, if
required, thus providing up to 20 nozzles. 11
The nozzle magazines (see point 1 in Fig. 11.9 - 8) are each centered with two parallel pins, and
fixed to the mounting plate with a countersunk bolt (see point 3 in Fig. 11.9 - 8). Nozzles are ex-
changed automatically during the placement process. 11
11.6.2 Technical data -Nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head
Nozzle types All nozzles from the 4xx series, special nozzle (optional)
Capacity 1 to 4 magazines each with 5 nozzles, can be configured as required
Nozzle exchange time Approx. 2 seconds per nozzle
Fig. 11.6 - 2 Overview of the nozzle changer
492
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.6 Nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head
(1) Position fiducial (2) Nozzle holder
(3) Reject bin (4) Magazine 1 (standard)
(5) Magazine 2 to 4 (optional) 11
All the magazines have a position fiducial (item 1 in Fig. 11.6 - 2) for position recognition pur-
poses.
The individual magazine locations are numbered consecutively from 1 to 4.
The individual nozzle holders are numbered consecutively from 1 to 5 in each magazine.
The nozzles are fixed in place in the holders by sprung hooks. The nozzles are either clamped
or released, depending on the direction of rotation of the Pick&Place head axis.
11.6.4 Notes on operation and maintenance
Use the nozzle removal tool (see point 1 in Fig. 11.6 - 3) to insert or exchange the nozzles
(point 2 in Fig. 11.6 - 3).
Clean the nozzle changer as described in the maintenance instructions.
Fig. 11.6 - 3 Removing the nozzle from the nozzle changer
493
11.7 Flip-chip vision module for the Pick & Place head Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.7 Flip-chip vision module for the Pick & Place head
11
Fig. 11.7 - 1 Vision module for the Pick&Place head
(1) Fine-pitch vision module for the Pick &Place head

(2) Flip-chip vision module for the Pick&Place head
494
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.7 Flip-chip vision module for the Pick & Place head
The flip-chip vision module increases the capability for processing fine-pitch and flip-chip compo-
nents with extremely fine lead pitches. This add-on module for the fine-pitch vision module in-
creases the resolution many times. The lighting layout is fundamentally different. At optimal
illumination, the images of bumps are as large as possible, and disruptive orthogonal structures
(as can occur on chip printed conductor tracks, for example) are suppressed. With less pro-
nounced disruptive structures, enhanced illumination intensity can be achieved by combining
lighting fixtures, resulting in high recognition reliability, even with the generally square connection
surfaces of bumped flip-chips as used in conductive adhesive technology. Special search algo-
rithms are used to recognize the bumps in environments subject to disruption. 11
11.7.2 Safety instructions for the component vision modules on Fx machines
DANGER
NEVER modify or bypass safety devices on the Fx machine, or on the fine-pitch or flip-chip mod-
ule. 11
The optical radiation from the fine-pitch or flip-chip vision module conforms to laser class 1, pro-
vided that the module is permanently installed in the placement machine, and the protective hoods
are closed (EN 60825-1 and IEC 825). 11
Laser Class 1
495
11.7 Flip-chip vision module for the Pick & Place head Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
Flip-chip size 1x1mm

with single measurement up to 7x9mm
with multiple measurement up to 20mmx20mm
Dimension < 3mmx6mm Special nozzle, feeding tolerance < 0.2 mm edge length
Minimum bump diameter 80m
Placement cycle minimum 2sec (depending on the number of bumps)
IC grid:
Lead pitch 0.25mm
Bump pitch 0.15mm
Field of view 9mmx11.5mm
11
496
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.8 Coplanarity laser module (80F4)
11.8 Coplanarity laser module (80F4)
The coplanarity laser module is used to measure vertical bending of the leads. The lead length is
measured without contact using the laser triangulation principle. 11
The placement head picks up the component to be checked, centers it optically using the IC cam-
era, and moves all four sides one after another over the fixed laser beam of the coplanarity laser
module. In this way, every lead is scanned from below by the laser beam. The laser light scattered
by the underside of the lead is recorded by a sensor, and is then used to calculate the exact po-
sition of the lead with respect to the PCB. The position values thus calculated are compared
against the limit value specified by the user. If they exceed this value, the component is disposed
of or reworked. 11
Fig. 11.8 - 1 Principle of laser triangulation
(1) Receiver lens (2) Detector

(3) Measuring signal (4) Time t
(5) Laser (6) Transmitter lens
(7) Travel direction 11
497
11.8 Coplanarity laser module (80F4) Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
The coplanarity laser module is combined with optical component centering, and is used in a
vision module. Components with bent or missing leads are detected and disposed of, if necessary.11
Component range: Can be used for gull wing components, pitch 0.3
The component size and lead pitch are limited by the
component position recognition system,
i.e. max. size 43.0 mm x 43.0mm x 11.0 mm.
Measuring principle:
Contact-free measurement by laser triangulation
Algorithm functions: JEDEC standard calculation of the placement plane, all
deviations are determined in relation to this plane. If the
component is angled with respect to the vacuum nozzle, as can
happen if an adapter is used, then it will have no influence over
the choice between good and bad.
Output: < 5 mW
Measuring range: 2.5 mm
Laser focus: elliptical, 50 m x 95 m
Thermal stability: 1 m/K
Wavelength: 670 nm
Resolution: 0.25 m
Scanning frequency: 10 kHz
Weight: 500 g
Operating temperature: 0C ... 40
Humidity: 5 - 95 % non-condensing
Ambient pressure: Atmospheric pressure
Vibration: to IEC 68-2-6
Mechanical shock: to IEC 68-2-27
EMC: to EN 50081-2 emitted interference
to EN 50082-2 immunity to interference
Degree of protection: IP 64
Mech. dimensions: 118 mm x 30 mm x 125.5 mm
Permissible ambient light: 30,000 lx
Safety: The coplanarity laser module conforms to laser class 1
when installed in the machine. The module will not work when
off the machine unless further devices are installed or
the protective functions are modified. If the protective functions
on the device are bypassed, the machine automatically conforms
to laser class 3B Risk of injury to eyes and skin -
and thus requires protective measures to VBG 93.
498
11.8.3 Safety instructions
DANGER
NEVER modify or bypass safety devices on the coplanarity laser module. 11
11
With no protective measures, the coplanarity

laser module conforms to laser class 3B.
This means there is a risk of injury to eyes
and skin.
For this reason, you should NEVER
bypass the safety
devices. 11
11
11
11
Invisible laser radiation
Do not expose the beam
Class 3 B Laser Product
11
1mW max., 670 nm; n. IEC 825-1(1993)
11
Fig. 11.8 - 2 Identification for laser class 3B
11
The following safety devices must be installed on the machine if the laser module is to be operated
in laser class 1 without risk to the eyes and skin. 11
11
The interlock line is connected in series with

the switches for the protective hood. This pro-
tective function is maintained even if the key
Class 1 Laser Product switch is turned to bypass the protection. This
means that the laser module can only be
used if the machine is closed. 11
499
DANGER
The safety guarantee is automatically invalidated if safety devices are modified or bypassed.
The user must also conform to the guidelines issued by the umbrella organization of employers
liability insurance associations VBG 93 i.e.:
- Registration with the employers liability insurance association
- Appointment of a laser protection officer
Drawing up guidelines for use of the module 11
11.8.4 Overview
11.8.4.1 Vision evaluation unit
The coplanarity laser module consists of two components: the vision evaluation unit with its control
section, and the laser module. The vision evaluation unit is located in the control unit (see Fig. 11.8
- 4). The operating state is indicated by three green LEDs on the front panel of the vision evalua-
tion unit. 11
LED (see 11.8 - 4) On Off

1 green 5V operating voltage No voltage
2 green 12V operating voltage No voltage
3 green Laser module in use Laser module switched off
Press the RESET key to initialize the coplanarity laser module. 11
11.8.4.2 Laser module
The laser module is fixed to a supporting frame on the right-hand side of the machine (see Fig.
11.8 - 5).
Two red LEDs and one green LED signal the operating states of the laser module. 11
LED (see Fig. 11.8 - 5) On Off

4 red OUT OF RANGE
(outside the measuring range)
5 red POOR TARGET
(component is insufficiently reflective)
6 green Laser module in use Laser module switched off
11
500
Fig. 11.8 - 4 Overview of the coplanarity laser module
(1) Green LED: 5V operating voltage

(2) Green LED: 12V operating voltage
(3) Green LED: Laser module switched on
(4) RESET key
(5) SUB-D connector, 9-pin, COM2: to the machine controller
(6) SUB-D connector, 15-pin: to the laser module
(7) Vision evaluation unit with control section
(8) Control unit
501
Fig. 11.8 - 5 Coplanarity laser module
(1) Laser module

(2) Connecting cable
(3) Supporting frame
(4) Red LED: OUT OF RANGE
(5) Red LED: POOR TARGET
(6) Green LED: LASER ON
(7) Class 3 B Laser Product, see Fig. 11.8 - 2
502
11.8.5 Data entry
Enter the coplanarity measurement under Handling data in the package form editor (see sec-
tion 5.4.4 of the SIPLACE UNIX line computer user manual).
Enter the maximum deviation from coplanarity (see max. component height tolerance, section
5.2.5 NU editor functions of the SIPLACE UNIX line computer user manual).
PLEASE NOTE
You can activate or deactivate the coplanarity laser module from the "Options" menu (see section
3.3.2.3 of this user manual). The coplanarity measurement can be switched off or on for those
components for which the coplanarity measurement is set in the package form data. 11
503
11.9 Flux dispenser unit Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.9 Flux dispenser unit
11.9.1 Overview
Reliable processing of flip-chip components requires a flux to be applied before the component is
placed. This ensures that the subsequent soldering process will be successful. 11
Once the Pick&Place head has picked up the flip-chip component, and a position measurement
has been carried out, the flux is dispensed at the placement position on the PCB. The volume of
flux to be dispensed can be entered for specific package forms. 11
The Pick&Place head inserts the flip-chip component as soon as the flux has been dispensed.
The Pick&Place head hold the flip-chip component in position on the PCB for a programmable,
package form-specific time. This causes the component to dry onto the flux, thus preventing it
from floating away. 11
Once all the flip-chip components have been placed, the PCB conveyor is activated after a pro-
grammable waiting time in order to remove the PCB. 11
Dispensing volume 2 l - 100 l

Smallest dosing increment 1 l
Syringe volume 1 ml
Tank volume 100 ml
Volume to be dispensed at the mounting location Depends on the flip-chip size, and the wetting prop-
erties of both flux and substrate material.
Flip-chip holding time after placement 0 to 5 sec
Holding time increment 0.01 sec
Minimum waiting time before PCB is transported 0 to 40 sec
Waiting time increment 1 sec
Dispensing cycle time 1.5 sec, including positioning
Rinse cycle 1 to 10 x syringe content
Filling level 1 Warning
Filling level 2 Empty, i.e. machine stopped
Positioning accuracy of the dispensing needle 0.05 mm
11
504
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.9 Flux dispenser unit
The centrifugal tube (3) is used as a reservoir, and is filled with flux. A pump sucks the flux via the
valve (2) up into the syringe (1). The syringe (1) then dispenses the set volume of flux, via the
valve and the tip of the dispensing needle (6), onto the placement position. 11
11
Fig. 11.9 - 1 Fluxing overview
(1) Syringe (2) Valve
(3) Cover of reservoir (4) Reservoir (centrifugal tube)
(5) Centering nozzle (6) Tip of dispensing needle
(7) Press-fit cap (8) Retainer
505
CAUTION
If the flux dispenser is likely to be out of service for any time (more than 1 hour), the press-fit cap
must be pulled over the centering nozzle. This will prevent the flux from crystallizing, and thus
sealing the centering nozzle. 11
The flip-chip component is inserted at the placement position, and held in position for a pre-set
time to allow the flux to dry. 11
111
Fig. 11.9 - 2 Principle of a component with flux
(1) The flux charge runs to the leads

11
The PCB then remains in the machine for a variable period to ensure that the flux has dried fully. 11
The procedure for entering the required parameters is described in Section 11.9.7.1 Package form
list and parameters. 11
11.9.4 Refilling the flux
A warning is output at the station computer when the flux has to be refilled. It is possible to con-
tinue placement for a short period, but the reservoir should not be allowed to run dry in order to
avoid unwanted periods of stoppage. 11
PLEASE NOTE
The reservoir must be refilled off the machine to prevent flux being dropped into the machine. 11
Move the fluxer head into the refill position. See Section 11.9.7.4 Single functions
Pull the reservoir up and out of its retainer, and turn the lid to remove it from the tank. See Fig.
11.9 - 1 "Fluxing overview".
506
Refill the flux, replace the lid, and return the reservoir to its retainer. See Fig. 11.9 - 1 "Fluxing
overview". Make sure that the reservoir is firmly seated in the retainer.
Use the Single Functions to flush the fluxer head until the hose and syringe are free of air, and
the flux emerges continuously. See Section 11.9.7.4 Single functions.
PLEASE NOTE
Always make sure that there are no air bubbles anywhere in the dispensing needle. 11
507
11.9.5 Changing the syringe
It is not necessary to change the syringe during normal operation. During servicing work, however,
it may be necessary to dismantle or change the syringe. 11
Fig. 11.9 - 3 Changing the syringe
(1) Knurled screw

(2) Syringe piston
(3) Syringe
(4) Unscrew the retaining nut
Use the Single Functions to move the fluxer head into the refill position. See section 11.9.7.4
Single functions. The syringe piston will move down.
Loosen the knurled screw on the syringe piston.
Push the syringe piston up. This will empty the syringe, and the flux will be pushed back into
the reservoir.
Remove the retaining nut together with the syringe.
508
11.9.6 Replacing the complete dispensing needle and centering nozzle
If the centering nozzle is defective, it can be replaced on its own. The dispensing needle is a com-
plete module, however. It may be necessary to change the complete dispensing needle if it or the
hose becomes clogged due to crystallization of the flux. In this case, the complete module must
be replaced. 11
11
Fig. 11.9 - 4 Changing the dispensing hose (tube blunt 29")
(1) Tip of dispensing needle (2) Centering nozzle
(3) Clamping parts (4) Lid of cylinder

(5) Complete dispensing needle (6) Valve
(7) Cylinder 11
509
CAUTION
When you unscrew the centering nozzle, make sure that you do not lose the two clamping parts
that hold the dispensing needle in the cylinder. 11
Loosen the centering nozzle.

Pull the cylinder lid away from the cylinder, and pull the complete dispensing needle out of the
cylinder.
Disconnect the dispensing needle hose from the valve of the dispensing pump.
Thread the new dispensing needle through the cylinder lid, through the cylinder and into the
centering nozzle. The tip of the dispensing needle must protrude approximately 3 mm from the
centering nozzle.
Tighten the centering nozzle once more.
Press the lid onto the cylinder.
Check the distance between the dispensing needle and the PCB. Press the down on the piston
the distance must now be approximately 1 mm.
If this is not the case, you will have to reset the distance.
510
11.9.6.1 Setting the distance between the dispensing needle and the PCB
11
Fig. 11.9 - 5 Setting the distance between the dispensing needle and the PCB
(1) Rear panel with four fixing screws
(2) Two fixing screws for the flux dispenser
(3) Lifting piston
(4) Set a distance of 1 mm with respect to the PCB
(5) Press the flux dispenser right down against the stop
11
Loosen the 4 fixing screws for the rear panel of the flux dispenser, and remove the panel.
Loosen the two fixing screws in the slots.
Press down on the lifting piston, and adjust the flux dispenser so that the distance between the
tip of the dispensing needle and the PCB is 1 mm.
511
Push the flux dispenser against the side stop, and tighten the fixing screws.
Attach the rear panel.
11.9.7 User interface
PLEASE NOTE
Before the flip-chip component can be placed and the flux can be applied, a placement program
with flip-chip component must be created on the line computer and sent to the station computers
(see the UNIX user manual).
The Fluxing option must have been activated in the machine options on the station computer.
See Section 3.3.2.3 "Options" menu of the user manual. 11
11.9.7.1 Package form list and parameters

Before the flux can be applied to a PCB for placing flip-chips, process data about the flip-chip must
be entered in a list, and general parameters about the flux dispenser must be entered on the sta-
tion computer. 11
Select the Fluxing submenu from the Options menu in the menu bar.
Fig. 11.9 - 6 Fluxing option
512
11.9.7.2 Editing the package form list
Select the Package form list menu in order to edit the data for the flip-chip component to be
placed.
You can use this menu to add and edit flip-chip components together with their GF no. See Fig.
11.9 - 7 and 11.9 - 8.
111 211
Fig. 11.9 - 7 Fluxing package form list
(1) Add button

(2) Input boxes
11
Click on the Add button in order to describe a new component for fluxing, and enter the data
in the input boxes.
Enter the following data:
GF no: 11
The package form number of the component
Package form numbers from 1 to 32000 can be used.
513
Volume: 11
The volume of flux to be applied for the current component in (l).
You can enter flux volumes from 1 l to 100 l.
We recommend the following values as a guideline:

6 mm x 6 mm component => 8 l flux
10 mm x 10 mm component => 10-15 l flux
Holding time: 11
The time for which the component must be held in the flux after placement.
This may be set to 0 to 500/100 sec, which corresponds to 0 to 5 seconds.
Comment: 11
Here you can enter a comment about the component.
11
Click on OK to confirm your input.

Click on Accept to save the edited package form list.
PLEASE NOTE
You can enter up to 25 package forms on the station computer. 11
To edit a component, simply highlight the line containing that component (see Fig. 11.9 - 8).
Click on the Edit button in order to edit an existing package form.
514
11
111 211 311
Fig. 11.9 - 8 Editing the fluxing package form list
(1) Highlight the line

(2) Edit button
(3) Input boxes
11
Edit the data as described for Add.

Click on OK to confirm your input.
Click on Accept to save the edited package form list.
11
515
11.9.7.3 Editing the flux parameters
Select the Parameters menu to enter data for the fluxing process.
11
Fig. 11.9 - 9 Editing the flux parameters
11
Waiting time for the PCB conveyor 11
The time for which the PCB remains in the station until it undergoes further placement. This
ensures that the flux dries reliably, and the component cannot float away.
This time is measured from the last flip-chip component to be placed,
and can be set to between 0 and 40 seconds.
PLEASE NOTE
Setting this waiting time can have a detrimental effect on line utilization. 11
11
516
11
Fig. 11.9 - 10 Rinsing / brushing station with rinsing tank
(1) Brush with retainer

(2) Rinsing / brushing station
(3) Brushing / rinsing tank
11
11
Automatic rinsing after: 11
To prevent the centering nozzle and dispensing needle from crystallizing after a long break
between flux applications, a time can be set after which the rinse cycle starts. This means
that the preset rinse cycle is carried out immediately before the next flip-chip is placed, ac-
cording on the selected placement sequence.
A rinse cycle is carried out automatically when the machine is switched on, regardless of
the set rinsing time.
517
The rinse cycle is carried out via the rinsing station, in a rinsing tank provided for this pur-
pose (see Fig. 11.9 - 10).
The time can be set to between 0 and 600 minutes.
Number of rinse cycles: 11
If you have set a time for automatic rinsing, then you can also set the number of rinse cy-
cles.
This can be set to between 1 and 10 rinse cycles.
11
Automatic brushing after 11
A time can be set for activating the brushing cycle, in order to clean the centering nozzle
and dispensing needle. During this cycle, the fluxer head moves over the rinsing tank to
which a brush is attached.
A brushing cycle is carried out automatically when the machine is switched on, regardless
of the set brushing time.
The brushing cycle is carried out via the rinsing station, in the rinsing tank provided.
(see Fig. 11.9 - 10).
The time can be set to between 0 and 120 minutes.
11
Number of brushing cycles 11
If you have set a time for automatic brushing, then you can also set the number of brushing
cycles.
This can be set to between 1 and 10 brushing cycles.
11
Flux application during the test run: (this function is only to be used by trained person-
nel) 11
Flux dots can be applied to a PCB but not component placed in order to check the dots, and
find the optimum setting.
Select the Processing off option from the Software options menu.
Check the Apply flux during test run check box [X].
Flux dots will now be applied, but no components will be placed.
The machine can also be run continuously without fluxing and without placing.
Select the Processing off option from the Software options menu.
Uncheck the Apply flux during test run check box [ ].
518
11.9.7.4 Single functions
There are a number of Single Functions that allow you to operate the fluxing head independently
of the placement program. 11
Click on the Gantry functions icon from the main view.

11
Fig. 11.9 - 11 Single Functions - gantry
Click on the Gantry functions button from the Gantry functions view.
(See Fig. 11.9 - 12).
519
11
Fig. 11.9 - 12 Gantry functions
(1) Buttons for the fluxing single functions (flux)
Go to refill position: 11
To change the syringe, you must first move the syringe piston to its bottom position, and move the
machine into a suitable position (refill position). 11
Click on the Go to refill position button. The fluxer head will move to the refill position, and
the syringe piston will move down. The syringe can then be changed. See Section 11.9.5
Changing the syringe.
The fluxer head must be moved to the refill position before any work is carried out on it. The flux
must be refilled in this position. 11
Click on the Go to refill position button, and press the Start button. The fluxer head will move
to the refill position.
520
Rinse fluxer head: 11

The fluxer head can be rinsed to remove flux residues or air bubbles from the dispensing hose,
for example. This will prevent the dispensing hose and centering nozzle from hardening, or air
bubbles causing fluxing errors. 11
Click on the Rinse fluxer head button, and press the Start button. The fluxer head will move
over the rinsing tank, and dispense the syringe contents into the rinsing tank.
The rinsing tank is beside the component reject bin (see Fig. 11.9 - 10).
Initialize fluxer head: 11

It is possible to carry out a fluxer head reference run. 11
Click on the Init. fluxer head button, and press the Start button. The fluxer head will carry out
a reference run.
521
11.10 PCB data transfer Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.10 PCB data transfer
The PCB data transfer option has been included in the Machine options menu. The aim of this
function is to increase the line performance of your placement system by fully measuring a PCB
at the first placement machine, determining the associated fiducial, subpanel, ink spot, etc, data,
saving this data and then sending it to the next machine. At the next machine, it is then only nec-
essary to determine the data for two fiducial positions. These two fiducial positions are then used
to correct the position of each subsequent machine for the PCB to be placed. It is thus not neces-
sary to measure the entire PCB, together with its subpanels, ink dots, etc. 11
Fig. 11.10 - 1 Machine option: PCB data transfer
PLEASE NOTE: The PCB data transfer function can only be used if a PCB barcode reader is in-
stalled. 11
522
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.10 PCB data transfer
11.10.2 Activating the PCB data transfer option
Click on the Machine options button from the main view.

The Machine options window will appear.
Select the PCB data transfer option from the Options box at the machine concerned.
Click on the Accept button. The PCB data transfer option is now active.
523
11.11 Feeder position recognition Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.11 Feeder position recognition
11.11.1 General
A feeder can be measured if it is equipped with position fiducials. 11
This function can also be used with the waffle tray holder (manual tray) if it has position fiducials. 11
If the Feeder position recognition function is selected on the line computer, this function will ap-
pear in the machine options. 11
You can then activate or deactivate feeder position recognition at each station from the machine
options. 11
.
Fig. 11.11 - 1 Feeder position recognition
PLEASE NOTE:
The feeder position recognition function is always inactive when the station is switched on. 11
524
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.11 Feeder position recognition
If the cluster data contains an entry for a track, the PCB camera on the feeder moves to the posi-
tion of the centering fiducial. Any centering fiducial offset determined by measurement is allocated
to this track, and added to the pick-up position during the pick-up process. 11
11.11.1.1 Restrictions
Feeder position recognition cannot be used for WPC trays that are set up in the wafflepack
changer.
Up to three fiducial positions can be defined for each feeder.
Feeder fiducials on the right-hand side of the table (viewed in the transport direction) cannot
be measured on the 80F.
PLEASE NOTE:
This restriction does not apply to machines with a sub-gantry camera. 11
If there is a feeder at location 118, and the fiducial position of the outer pick-up division is closer
to the X-axis travel range limit than the pick-up position, then the 8 mm S tape and bulk case
feeder cannot be scanned.
11
525
11.12 Fine calibration Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.12 Fine calibration
11.12.1 Overview
Fine calibration involves measuring the machines placement offset and determining the required
correction from this value. The Fine calibration measuring program is integrated into the SITEST
program, and a detailed description of the measuring procedure is given in the Fine calibration
instructions (article no. 00191655-01). 11
CAUTION
The SITEST program is password-protected. It must only be called up and used by Siemens en-
gineers or appropriately trained personnel. 11
11.12.2 System requirements
The following system requirements must be fulfilled in order to use the fine calibration program:11
Machine type S-20/F4

Station computer software version 406.xx or later
SITEST version 406.xx or later
11.12.3 Measuring equipment and tools
The following are supplied as standard: 11
Mapping plate (glass plate in a metal frame)
Double-sided transparent adhesive film
Lighting unit
Magazine with glass components for the collect&place head and pick&place head with fine-
pitch vision module.
11
The following items must be ordered: 11
Manual tray (waffle tray holder) to hold the magazine for the glass components
(article number 00116430-xx)
11
11
526
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 11.12 Fine calibration
The following parts may be ordered if required: 11
Magazine with glass components for the collect&place head and pick&place head with flip-chip
vision module (article number 00343704-xx)
First select the placement program for fine calibration by selecting the Cluster for fine calibration
option from the Options pull-down menu. Then process the mapping plate with the glass compo-
nents from a magazine on the manual tray. 11
After placement, start the SITEST program and start the Fine calibration measuring program.
The placement head (collect&place head or pick&place head) will measure the current placement
positions of the glass components and compare these positions with the circular fiducials on the
mapping plate. The results are used to calculate the offset values. 11
The offset values are used to determine corrected values, which are then entered in the machines
machine data. 11
11
11
527
11.13 Vacuum tooling Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
11.13 Vacuum tooling
Vacuum tooling is another module that is used to increase the placement accuracy for concave
PCBs. The vacuum surface of this device picks up concave PCBs during processing and aligns
them so they are flat. 11
The vacuum tooling module can be used on both single and dual conveyors, and is fitted to the
lifting tables. 11
11.13.1 Description of the functions
The PCB is fed to the processing belt, where it is stopped. The lifting table moves up and the vac-
uum circuit for the vacuum tooling device is opened. The PCB is then held in place by the vacuum
tooling device, which is pressed with a spring action against the PCB by the lifting table. This
causes the suction cups of the tooling device to press against the PCB and hold it firmly in position.11
The vacuum channels are vented after placement. The lifting table is lowered, the PCB is re-
leased, and can then be moved on. 11
11
11
528
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 12 Station extensions / software
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 12.1 Remote support
12 Station extensions / software
12.1 Remote support
12.1.1 General comments
The "Remote Support" (Remote Service) option enables service personnel in Munich, Singapore
and Norcross to access system data on the line computer, station computer, machine controller
or a GEM computer, if there is one, on the customers SIPLACE line or SIPLACE station.
This allows the service engineers to localize and correct software and data problems in the cus-
tomers systems online. This feature also makes for better problem-oriented planning of any ser-
vice visits to the customer, thereby keeping servicing time to a minimum. 12
12.1.2 Safety information
DANGER
If movements of machine components are initiated at a customers machine via the "Remote
Support", a trained line engineer must be present at the machine. In addition, this line engineer
must be able to communicate by telephone with the engineer who is performing the "Remote
Support".
When performing these operations; it is essential to observe the general safety information pre-
sented in Chapter 2 of this Users Manual. 12
12.1.2.1 Data security
The machine or system can only be accessed when this is specifically desired by the customer
and when he allows this to be done via the requisite communications PC (Router). 12
The service engineer will be working in a lockable room in the service center. Only authorized per-
sons will have access to this room. 12
529
12 Station extensions / software SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
12.1 Remote support Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
12.1.3 Requirements
To enable a connection to be set up between the service center and the customers system, both
routers (communications computers) must be able to communicate via a suitable ISDN connec-
tion. 12
12
12.1.3.1 Specifications of the ISDN connection
Equipment
Network Terminator (NT) with S0 interface which must be accessible via an RJ 45 Western
plug
Features
File transfer
ISDN call number forwarding
Charging information during the call
530
12.1.4 Functions
The following components can be accessed remotely from the service centers in Munich, Sin-
gapore and Norcross. When this is done, the corresponding functions are operated and moni-
tored. 12
Line computer (SCO UNIX)
"Remote" log-in
Chat
Sending commands to the customers line computer
Starting and stopping programs at the customers line computer
"Remote" editing
File transfer
12
Station computer
"Remote" log-in
"Remote" operation of programs (user interface, SITEST, diagnostics)
Sending messages to the customers station computer ("chat mode)
File transfer
"Remote" editing
12
Machine controller
"Remote" log-in
File transfer
531
12.1 Remote support Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
12.1.5 Overview
The following configurations are possible for the customers placement line: 12
Connection of the ISDN router to the local SIPLACE-LAN
Connection of the ISDN router to the customers site LAN
12.1.5.1 Connecting the ISDN router to the local SIPLACE-LAN
This possibility is used when there is no site LAN available at the customers premises.
The customer will not need to implement any additional data security measures. 12
12
= LAN card
Line computer Line computer
Router Router
ISDN
network
Customers placement line Service center
LAN LAN
Station
Station Machine computer
computer controller
SIPLACE
Fig. 12.1 - 1 Connection of ISDN router to the local SIPLACE-LAN
532
12.1.5.2 Connecting the ISDN router to the customers site LAN
The advantage of this alternative is that several placement lines can be addressed via a single
router. 12
12
= LAN card
Router
Line computer Line computer
(LC) (LC)
Router
ISDN
Customers central site network network
Service center
Customers placement line
LAN
LAN
Station Station
Machine computer
computer
controller
SIPLACE
Fig. 12.1 - 2 Connection to the customers site LAN
12.1.6 Procedure and operation
Contact our service center (Munich, Norcross or Singapore).

Follow the instructions given by the engineer.
12
533
12.2 GEM interface Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
12.2 GEM interface
12.2.1 General
Explanation of terms:
GEM => Generic Equipment Model 12
SECS-II => Semiconductor Equipment Communication Standard, Part 2 12
Host computer => Communications computer 12
WIth the GEM/SECS-II interface, it is possible to control a SIPLACE station using any host com-
puter which is compatible with GEM. However, the station computer at the SIPLACE station must
be left connected to the line computer to allow the machine, set-up and cluster data to be pro-
grammed and loaded into the station computer. The station computer packs this data in a place-
ment program and makes this available to the host computer for uploading. During operation, and
depending on the control mode, the host or line computer provides the SIPLACE station with the
necessary machine, set-up and cluster data or with the placement program. 12
12
Host
GEM
Customers LAN
GEM GEM
SIPLACE 80 F4
SIPLACE S-23 HM Line computer
SIPLACE 80 F5/
F5 HM
LAN LAN LAN
SIPLACE LAN
Fig. 12.2 - 1 Overall structure
12
534
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 12.2 GEM interface
The figure below presents the "Options" menu which is present in the menu bar of the user inter-
face. This menu contains the options for the GEM interface settings. 12
12
Menu options for the GEM interface: 12

Control mode...
This opens a dialog box which is used to set the control mode at the GEM computer.
GEM-Defaults ...
This opens the window used to specify the default settings for the GEM interface.
Controls and indicators in the GEM interface 12

12
12
This button switches the user interface to "State view" mode. (Load placement program, send/re-
ceive message) 12
12
The current control mode is displayed in a separate area in the user interfaces information bar.12
12
The icon displayed in the user interfaces status area (on the right-hand side) indicates the current
status of the connection to the GEM computer. 12
12
535
12.2.2 Operation
12.2.2.1 Setting the control mode
The control mode specifies how the station is supplied with the necessary placement data. 12
In the main view, select the Options menu and then choose the Control mode... option.
The following selection box appears.
Possible settings: 12
Stand alone 12
(This control mode is used for test purposes only)
If a cluster is specified at the station, all necessary data will be loaded from the hard disk of the
station computer.
The data must be located on the station computers hard disk. 12
GEM Host 12
In this control mode only the host computer can specify the placement programs.
The data must be located on the host computers hard disk. 12
NOTE
This setting must be activated if you wish to download placement programs from the GEM
computer to the station computer. See also section 12.2.2.6. 12
Line Computer 12
If a cluster is specified at the station, all necessary data will be loaded from the line computer. The
data must be located on the line computers hard disk. 12
536
SIPLACE Pro 12
When a cluster is specified at the station, all the data required for this are loaded from the com-
puter specified in the configuration of the SIPLACE Pro connection. The data must be located on
the hard disk of this computer. 12
12
Select the button for the required control mode.

Click OK to confirm and activate this setting.
12.2.2.2 Defining the GEM default settings
You use the "GEM default settings..." menu option to make various settings which will be used at
power-up as default parameters for the station. 12
In the main view select the Options menu and then select the option GEM default settings....
The following window is displayed.
12
Fig. 12.2 - 2 "GEM-Defaults" window
537
Connect at power-up 12
(See also section 12.2.2.5) 12
Yes
When the station is switched on, the station computer attempts to connect to the host com-
puter.
No
When the station is switched on, no connection to the host computer is made. However, the
operator can establish the connection manually in the "State view" (see also section 12.2.2.5).
Control 12
Off-line
It is not possible to send or receive messages.
Local
In the "Placement Program" view, the user can "upload" placement programs from the station
computer to the host computer (See also section 12.2.2.6).
No placement programs can be downloaded from the host computer to the station computer.
Remote
In the "Placement Program" view, the user can upload placement programs from the station
computer to the host computer and "download" from the host computer to the station computer.
Spooling 12
Yes
If the connection to the host computer is lost, the station will collect in a spooling file all mes-
sages intended for the host computer. Once the connection is re-established, the host can pick
up these messages from the station. The quantity of messages which can be stored is limited
by the size of the spooling file (20 MB).
No
If the connection to the host computer is lost, all messages intended for the host computer will
be lost.
538
Spool full action 12

Overwrite
If there is no more space available in the spooling file, the oldest, stored message is overwritten
by the latest, current message.
Ignore message
If there is no more space available in the spooling file, all new incoming messages will be dis-
carded
Limit monitoring
Not currently relevant.
12
Click the Accept button to save the settings.

Click the SECS Parameters... button if you want to modify the SECS parameters (see also
section 12.2.2.3).
539
12.2.2.3 Setting the GEM/SECS parameters
CAUTION
The parameters illustrated in the figure below have been tested and are recommended.
They must be set as defaults in order to optimize transfer from the host computer to the line com-
puter. 12
NOTES
Changing the parameters has the following effects on the day-to-day operation of the
GEM interface:
When a timeout value or the TCP/IP port number is changed, the GEM link to the host computer
is briefly interrupted. The GEM software is closed down when the IP address or IP screen is
changed. The GEM software cannot be used until the station is switched on again. 12
12
Fig. 12.2 - 3 "GEM/SECS parameters" window
540
T3: Reply timeout 12

When a primary message is sent to the host computer, the station waits for up to the number of
seconds specified for T3 for the secondary message from the host computer.
Range of values: 1 - 120 seconds 12
T5: Connect separation timeout 12

This parameter determines the waiting time between successive attempts to establish a connec-
tion. This is only important if the station has been configured as the ACTIVE ENTITY.
T6: Control transaction timeout 12

After sending the message "Connect.req" or "Linktest.req" to the host computer, the station waits
for up to the number of seconds specified for T6 for the "Connect.rsp" or "Linktest.rsp" message.
The TCP/IP link is then interrupted.
T7: NOT SELECTED timeout 12

Once the TCP/IP connection has been established, the station configured as the PASSIVE EN-
TITY waits for up to the number of seconds specified for T7 for the "Select.req" message from the
host computer. The TCP/IP link is then interrupted. A successful exchange of "Select.req" and
"Select.rsp" forms the basis for the conversion of the TCP/IP connection into an HSMS connection.
T8: Network intercharacter timeout 12

Reception of an individual HSMS message must take no longer than the number of seconds spec-
ified for T8. Otherwise the TCP/IP link will be interrupted.
CE: Connection establishment timeout 12

After sending a TCP/IP connect command, a station which has been configured as an ACTIVE
ENTITY waits for up to the number of seconds specified for CE for a connection to be established
successfully or for a status message. After this time, it is assumed that the command was not re-
ceived correctly. 12
541
CA: Circuit assurance 12

This parameter determines the waiting time between sending successive "Linktest.req" mes-
sages. These messages check that the HSMS connection is working correctly. If the value 0 has
been entered for CA, no "Linktest.req" messages are sent. 12
TG: Grace period 12

While a SECS-II connection is being established, the SDR component of the GEM interface buff-
ers all the messages to be sent to the host computer. If the SECS-II connection cannot be estab-
lished within the number of seconds specified for TG, these buffered messages will be sent to the
host computer. Otherwise they are rejected by the SDR component and have the status F_DELV.12
MS: Memory stall 12

The SDR component of the GEM interface tolerates the status that all internal buffers are full and
that the host is attempting to send further data packets for up to the number of seconds specified
for MS. The TCP/IP connection is then ended to prevent the network becoming overloaded. 12
WS: Write stall 12

The SDR component of the GEM interface tolerates the status that data packets to be sent are
not received by the TCP/IP connection for up to the number of seconds specified for WS seconds.
The TCP/IP connection is then ended. 12
IP address: 12
IP address for the connection to the customers LAN 12
IP screen: 12
IP screen address for the connection to the customers LAN 12
Port: 12
TCP/IP port number for the GEM connection to the host computer 12
12
12
542
12.2.2.4 GEM connection statuses
The status window of the user interface keeps the operator informed of the status of the connec-
tion to the host computer. The various statuses are indicated by the changing background color
of the GEM icon. 12
12
Status of the host computer connection 12

(GEM icon red, yellow or green) 12
Meaning of the colors:
Red No connection
Yellow Setting up connection
Green Connection established
12
In addition to displaying the status of the host computer connection, the status window also shows
whether messages have been received from the host computer. The current status is indicated by
the changing background color of the envelope part of the GEM icon. 12
Statuses: 12
no messages present 12
(envelope icon light) 12
messages present 12
(envelope icon dark) 12
12
543
12.2.2.5 GEM state view
12
Click the button in the main view.

The user interface switches to "State view"
12
Fig. 12.2 - 4 "State" view
12
The windows display area is subdivided into a number of display fields containing the correspond-
ing buttons for executing the functions for the GEM connection. 12
The meaning and function of the individual display fields and the toolbar buttons are described
below. 12
544
Display fields: 12
Spooling 12
In this display section, the current spooling status is displayed to the right of the "State:" item. 12
Active: The connection to the host computer has been interrupted.

Messages are being collected.
Inactive: The connection to the host computer is OK.

Messages are being sent to the host computer.
The "Spool Load:" item indicates whether the spooling file storage area is full or whether there is
still capacity in the spooling file. 12
SECS connection 12
This display field contains the buttons described below. The current status of the connection is dis-
played above the buttons. 12
Connect
The connection between the station computer and the host computer will be set up.
Disconnect
The connection between the station computer and the host computer will be terminated.
Control 12
This display field contains the buttons described below. The current status of the connection is dis-
played above the buttons. 12
Local
Placement programs can be uploaded from the station computer to the host computer or down-
loaded from the host computer to the station computer.
Remote
Placement programs can be uploaded from the station computer to the host computer.
No placement programs can be downloaded from the host computer to the station computer.
Off-line
It is not possible to send or receive messages. However, the connection is retained.
NOTE
If the host computer drops the control connection, the connection goes into the status Off-line.
Only the host computer can re-establish the connection. At the station, this status can only be quit
by clicking the Off-line button. Only then are the functions Remote and Local available again.12
Click the button corresponding to the required function.
545
Toolbar: 12
You can use the buttons in the toolbar to switch the user interface between the following views:12
12
Main view 12
(see Chapter 3) 12
12
"State" view 12
(see Figure 12.2 - 4) 12
12
"Placement program" view 12

You can use the functions available in this view to load a placement program which is present on
the host computer or station computer (see section 12.2.2.6). 12
12
"Messages" 12
You can use the functions available in this view to read messages sent by the host computer and
send messages to the host computer (see section 12.2.2.7). 12
12
Click the required button in order to switch to the required view.
546
12.2.2.6 Loading placement programs
12
In the "State" view, click the button.

The user interface switches to the following view.
12
Fig. 12.2 - 5 "Placement program" view"
12
You can use the buttons in the display area to perform the following actions: 12
Upload
The placement program whose name is entered in the text box is uploaded from the station
computer to the host computer.
Download
The placement program whose name is entered in the text box is downloaded from the host
computer to the station computer.
12
12
547
NOTE
Depending on the selected action, the corresponding placement program must be available at the
station computer or the host computer.
To download a placement program, the control mode must be set to "GEM Host" (see section
12.2.2.1). 12
Enter the name of the required placement program in the box "Placement Program ID:".
Click the corresponding button to "upload" or "download" the corresponding placement pro-
gram.
The action is performed and the current status of the action is displayed above the buttons.
12.2.2.7 Messages
In the "State" view, click the button.

The user interface switches to the following view.
12
Fig. 12.2 - 6 "Messages" view
12
548
The display area is subdivided into separate fields which contain the tools necessary to perform
the actions described below. 12
"Host message" display field 12

This display field displays the messages received from the host computer.
The last message to be received appears at the bottom of the message list. 12
Once you have read the message, click the Acknowledge button. Confirmation is then sent
to the host computer that the message has arrived and been read.
"Operator message" display field 12

In this field you can enter the messages which are to be sent to the host computer. 12
Enter the required message (max. 160 characters).

Click the Send button.
The message is now sent to the host computer.
NOTE
The last message to have been written and sent to the host computer is always displayed in the
text box. 12
549
550
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual 13 Software installation
Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition 13.1 General definitions
13 Software installation
13.1 General definitions
13.1.1 Initial installation
This is the term used to describe the first time the station software is installed on the computer
system of the 6,3/$&(6). During this installation, sample machine data is installed on
the station computers hard disk in addition to the individual "SC" (station computer) and "MC"
(machine controller) software components. 13
13.1.2 Update
If an initial installation has already been performed and a more recent release of the station
software has to be installed, this is known as an "update". When an update is performed, the
stored machine data is not overwritten!
The release is identified by the last two digits of the software version designation.
Example
SR.407.01 SR = system component 407 = version number 01 = release

(station computer)
NOTE
Software versions with recent releases are debugged versions.
They are NOT functionally different from software versions with older releases and are generally
compatible with them.
551
13 Software installation SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
13.2 Installation of the 407.xx station software Software version SR.407.xx 01/2001 US Edition
13.1.3 Upgrade
The installation of a software version with a higher version number than an already installed
software version is known as an "upgrade".
When an upgrade is performed, the machine data is retained and automatically converted to the
new data format if necessary.
The functionality of the station software is identified by the three-digit number (version number)
of the complete software version designation.
Example
SR.407.xx 407 = version number This identifies the functionality of the software.
13.2 Installation of the 407.xx station software
For the procedure for the installation of the station software, please refer to the software version
description for the corresponding version. 13
NOTE
The software version description is supplied with the software package for the station software.13
13
13.3 Installation of the software for "Remote Service"

(option)
For the procedure for the installation of the "ReachOut" software which is used for the "Remote
Service", please refer to the software version description for the corresponding version. 13
NOTE
The software version description is supplied with the software package for the "ReachOut"
software. 13
13
552
SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual Index
01/2001 US Edition
Index
Numerics Action window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Actuate clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12 mm S module for capacitors based Actuate DP-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
on powdered metal, model C/D . . . . . . . . .430 Actuate stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12 mm S module for capacitors based Add button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
on powdered metal, model E . . . . . . . . . . .431 Additional data security measures . . . . . . . . . 532
12/16 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
12-segment Collect&Place head . . 35, 38, 39, 212, adequately trained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
214 Adjusting the conveyor width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
angular accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39 adjustment structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
component illumination control board . . . . .214 affected employees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
component vision module . . . . . . . . . . 57, 213 ambient factors, permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
component vision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 analysis of the fiducial shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 angular position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
gantry 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 approximate position of the component . . . . . 299
gantry 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 asynchronous transport type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
motor for "Reject" valve adjustment drive . . .57 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
placement accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
star motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 atmospheric humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
star with 12 sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 authorized employees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 automatic rinsing after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 61 automatic selection of
turning station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 measuring parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
with component vision module . . . . . . . . . . .36 automatic selection of
with component vision module (gantry 1) . . .33 suitable measuring modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
with component vision module (gantry 2) . . .33 automatic setting of the lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Z axis driving mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
1-D pattern search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 B
24/32 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
24x24 component camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 324
24x24 component vision module analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
2-D pattern search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Ball image option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
3 x 8 mm S module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ball imaging parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
44 mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Ball measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
56 mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Ball mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
72 mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Barcode comparison, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8 mm S II module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Barcodes do not match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
88 mm S module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Barcodes match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
bare dies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
A brightness value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
brush with retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Abort processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 brushing / rinsing tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Acceptable barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 bulk case feeder (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241, 275, 317
553
Index SIPLACE 80S-20/F4 User Manual
01/2001 US Edition
C Clearing errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Close magazine locking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Calling error information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Cluster name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Calling help on an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 CO camera, gantry 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
camera connections CO camera, gantry 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
CO camera, 12-segment C&P head . . . . . 218 Collect&Place principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fine-Pitch-Visionmodul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 color overlays of the individual
Flip-Chip-Pitch-Visionmodul . . . . . . . . . . . 218 measurement steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
PCB camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Colors in the error info display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
camera field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 communications connection for
Camera Type option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 changeover table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cancel processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Communications PC (Router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Caption bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Comparing possible barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cause/remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 component
CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 angular position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CCD camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 approximate position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
center conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
center of gravity coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 component barcode
center of gravity of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Center option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
centering fiducial offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 track allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
centering nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505, 517 component barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . 51, 52, 53
defective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 connected to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
centering pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 filter for suppressing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
centering types, possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 number of barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
centrifugal tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 number of characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Ceramic substrate centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 preset code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ceramic substrate centering component barcode reader, technical data . . . . 53
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 component barcode, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
general overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 component changeover table, mobile . . . . . . . 379
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 component counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50, 99
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 component disposal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
change fiducial name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 component handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Changeover position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 component handling, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
changing existing fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 component illumination
changing feeder modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 on the fine pitch vision module, setting . . . 354
changing jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 component illumination, 12-segment
Changing set-up nozzle changer . . . . . . 196, 200 Collect&Place head camera . . . . . . . . . . . 347
changing shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 component outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
changing the ceramic substrate on the PCB . . 485 component range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39
changing the retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 component shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
changing the set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 component supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39
changing the syringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 component table, preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
changing the transport type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Component verification with barcode . . . . . . . 151
Charging info during the call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 component vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 for the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Check the zero pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
554
01/2001 US Edition
component vision module for the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Pick&Place head control unit, test socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 controlling the dual conveyor
with fine pitch vision module . . . . . . . . . . . .230 using the Single Functions menu . . . . . . 477
with flip-chip vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
component vision module controls on the input and output
on the 12-segment C&P head . . . . . . 61, 213 conveyor sides of the machine . . . . . . . . . . 52
component vision modules controls, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 controls, ergonomic arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . 51
component vision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 controls, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 conventions of hazard symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
on the 12-segment Collect&Place head . . .229 Conveyor width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Conveyor width adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
component, irregular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 coplanarity laser module
component, regular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
components floating away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Components of the user interface . . . . . . . . . . .125 laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
compressed air conditions in the machine overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
after switching off at the main switch . . . . .109 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
compressed air connection for the technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
changeover table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 vision evaluation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
compressed air consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 coplanarity laser module (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . 497
compressed air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Copying a help file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
compressed air specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
compressed air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 47 angle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
compressed air unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 100, 108 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Configure SIPLACE connection . . . . . . . . . . . .133 number of leads to be measured
configuring the PCB barcode reader . . . . . . . . .483 at each corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Confirm nozzle change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Connect at power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Corner measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Connect ISDN router to Corner mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
customers site LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 corner test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Connect ISDN router to cover and guard on the output conveyor . . . . . . 96
local SIPLACE-LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 cover of reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Connection established . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 crosshairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 303
connection for compressed air line . . . . . . . . . . .41 Current error type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
console on the central cross-beam . . . . . . . . . . .51 Cycle mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Contents of the help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Contents tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 D
Continue processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 132
DANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
contrast difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
data entry
contrast of the fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
coplanarity laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Contrast sensitivity menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Data Security, Remote Support . . . . . . . . . . . 529
contrast sensitivity transform 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
define new fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
definition
Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 536
Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
control pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
555
01/2001 US Edition
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 E
Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 edge line markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Edit button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
definition of the measuring methods . . . . . . . . 323 Edit GF data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
definition of the transport tracks . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Editing "Remote" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Deleting a comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Editing comments on errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
description of the 12-segment C&P head . . . . . 58 efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
description of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 electrical and pneumatic connection
description of the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . 60 points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
desktop model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 electromagnetic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Diagnostic method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 EMERGENCY STOP
Display window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 push-button . . . . . . . . . 49, 50, 52, 97, 99, 100
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 employee training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Empty tracks list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 EN 60204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 108
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 EN 60950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
diameter of the component tape reels . . . . . . . 380 energy efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
differentiation between cubic/not cubic . . . . . . 338 energy state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
dimensions of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 enter password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
disabling the compressed air supply . . . . . . . . 107 Entries in the setup table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
discharge times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Entries in the table "Empty tracks" . . . . . . . . . 165
discharge times of electrolytic capacitors . . . . 106 Entries in the table for "General Errors" . . . . . 162
discharging the pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Entries in the table for "Machine Errors" . . . . . 160
dispatching ESD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ergonomic arrangement of the controls . . . . . . . 51
Display Component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Error display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Display window Error information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 error information and diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
displaying the PCB barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Error message
dividing plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Automatic takeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
dividing plates in the tape container . . . . . . . . 378 Display window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
docking the component table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Manual input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
docking the mobile CO table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Error number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
docking the mobile comp. table . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Error types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
double cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ESD guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Download placement program . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 ESD modules, dispatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 ESD modules, handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
asynchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 ESD modules, measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 ESD modules, modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Evaluat. time option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Explan. of Terms, GEM interface . . . . . . . . . . 534
dual conveyor option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36
F
dual conveyor, technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Dual transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Fault indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
dummy feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
feeder capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
556
01/2001 US Edition
feeder capacity, feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 flip-chip vision module for the

feeder fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
feeder modules flow chart
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Teach fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Test component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
feeder modules, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 flow chart, switching on the SIPLACE line . . . 369
feeder position recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 flow charts for programming and
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 testing a package form (GF) . . . . . . . . . . . 340
restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 flux application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
feeder position recognition, restrictions . . . . . .525 flux application during the test run . . . . . . . . . 518
fiducial flux dispenser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 flux dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
line thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 flux parameters, editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
minimum dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 flux placement position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 flux residues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 flux storage tank
fiducial dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
single and double cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 fluxer head
Fiducial error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
fiducial location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 reference run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
fiducial mark recommendation for ceramic substra- rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
tes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 fluxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
fiducial shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 fluxing, functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
fiducial structure parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Forced air on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
fiducial structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 functional description
fiducial surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 coplanarity laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
fiducial types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 SIPLACE 80F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
field of view SIPLACE 80S-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
PCB module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Functions for the GEM connection . . . . . . . . . 544
File transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Find tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
fine calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 G
functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
gantry 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
measuring equipment and tools . . . . . . . . .526
gantry 1 with PCB vison module . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
gantry 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
gantry 2 with PCB vision module . . . . . . . . . . . 33
fine pitch vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 230
Gantry axes travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Gantry functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
fine pitch vision module, technical data . . . . . . .62
Gantry reference run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
flatpack magazine
gantry with PCB vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
support (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
gantry, overview of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
flip-chip vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 494
gantry, position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Gantry, single functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 496
GEM Connection Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
GEM connection, TCP/IP port number . . . . . . 542
557
01/2001 US Edition
GEM default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Help on the current view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

GEM Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Help on use of the Windows help . . . . . . . . . . 418
GEM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Help topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
GEM state view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 High speed, conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
GEM/SECS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Holding circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 holding time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
general information on the user manual . . . . . . 23 hole for power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
General operating statuses hole for the parallel pin (7) for
main fault indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 centering the magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
General station computer info, display . . . . . . 419 hole for the parallel pin of the
Generic Equipment Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 moving mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Go to refill position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Host message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Go to service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 how to avoid track errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Go to set-up position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Go to waiting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 I
Go to zero pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
IC-head functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
graphic presentation of the table . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Icons in the working or display area . . . . . . . . 127
Graphic user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
illumination level
gray-scale value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 354
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
middle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 354
Grid measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
steep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 354
Grid mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
illumination method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12-segment Collect&Place head camera . 347
guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Illumination option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
illumination parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
illumination settings
safety bar (fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 356
slots for adjusting the height . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
for std. components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 355
guard for 1 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
illumination test, example . . . . . . . . . . . . 352, 358
guard for 11 to 20 locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
important measures to protect against
guard for 6 to 10 locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
static charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
guard on the component table locations . . . . . 104
important notes on operational safety . . . . . . . . 68
guide rail for the dividing plates . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Incremental adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
guidelines for describing package forms . . . . . 338
Incremental encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
H Index tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
HALE method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Info bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
handling ESD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402, 405
hazard symbols, conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Information on a selected error . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Head reference run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 184 Information on the current error . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
height clearance of 21 mm Initial installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
with the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Initial password allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
height clearance, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 initialize fluxer head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
height with warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 input boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 275, 513, 515
Help menu, functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 input conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 63
Help on a topic area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Inserting a comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Help on an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 inserting the feeder modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
558
01/2001 US Edition
inserting the tape into the tape cutter . . . . . . . .445 line concept, technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation "ReachOut" software . . . . . . . . . . .552 line engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installation station software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 line engineer profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
interrupt the job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 line thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Linear feeder, view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
introduction and basic terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 linear vibratory feeder, type 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
inventory level Load cluster for fine calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 load fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Load GF data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 288
IP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 load per unit area on mounting feet . . . . . . . . . 44
irregular components, components . . . . . . . . . .233 Load table program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ISDN call number forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Loading placement programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
ISO 9241-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 location 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
location 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
J location of the fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
locking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
JEDEC or CENELEC flatpack magazines . . . .461
loose components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
K
M
key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50, 52, 100
machine concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
machine connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39
open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Machine displays and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
position 0 for normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Machine error gantry 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
position I for service purposes . . . . . . . . . . .99
Machine errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 52
Machine options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
keyboard with trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
machine options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
knurled screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
machine overview, technical data of the 80S-20 35
L machine overview, technical data of the F4 . . . 39
Machine switches and buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
LAN supply in control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 machine, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
large tape reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Main fault indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Main help system window, functions . . . . . . . . 421
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 main power filter Z1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 109
lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
lead dimension parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 49, 50, 52
Lead measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 main switch Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109
Lead mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Manual input of comp. barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . 154
lead skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 manual tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
lifting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Limit monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 manual tray rest (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
limit value for quality measurement . . . . . . . . .234 max. placement rate
Line Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . 35, 39
line computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Line Computer, control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Maximum number of nozzles . . . . . . . . . 196, 200
line computer, switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 maximum oil content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
line concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 MCM 1405 ND monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
559
01/2001 US Edition
Measure Component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 12/16 mm S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Measure conveyor width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 24/32 mm S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Measure forced air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 3 x 8 mm S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Measure the height of nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 44 mm S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Measure vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 56 mm S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
measurement methods 72mm S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437, 438
optimum sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 8 mm S II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Measurement mode option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 bulk case feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
measurement modes, information . . . . . . . . . . 323 component disposal module (80F4) . . . . . 439
measurement, ESD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 linear vibratory feeder, type 3 . . . . . . . . . . 433
measuring mode monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 52
Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 moxels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 MVS motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 N
Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Network Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
New cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
measuring unit, servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
new inventory level
mechanical centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
menu
No connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Contrast sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
No messages present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Select fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
noise emission, max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Select Package Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Teach fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
normal lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Test Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
notes on using the transformation tables . . . . 318
Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
nozzle
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
picking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
returning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Messages from the host computer . . . . . . . . . 549
nozzle box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Messages present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
nozzle changer
Messages sent to the host computer . . . . . . . 549
12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . 465
Messages view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
basic principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
mode
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Nozzle changer config. RV head . . . . . . . 195, 199
Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
nozzle changer for the Pick&Place head . . . . . 491
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Nozzle configuration error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Nozzle configuration RV head . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
nozzle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Nozzle offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
nozzle position in the magazine
Modification of a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
with respect to the position fiducial . . . . . . 470
modifications to ESD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
nozzle removal tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
modules
Nozzle, replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
12 mm S for capacitors based on
number of brushing cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
powdered metal, model C/D . . . . . . . . . . . 430
number of fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
12 mm S for capacitors based on
number of rinse cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
powdered metal, model E . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
560
01/2001 US Edition
O Test Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Test fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
oblique lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Transform ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Omit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 option boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 275
Omitted components with alternate tracks . . . .169 Options for the GEM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 orthogonality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Operating indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 output conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 63
operating panel overview
on the PCB input conveyor side . . . . . . . . . .51 coplanarity laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
on the PCB output conveyor side . . . . . . . . .51 overview of the modules - controls . . . . . . . . . . 49
operating pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 overview of the modules - gantry . . . . . . . . . . . 54
operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39 overview of the modules - PCB conveyor . . . . . 63
operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 overview of the modules - placement heads . . . 57
operational safety, important notes . . . . . . . . . . .68 overview of the modules - vision systems . . . . . 61
operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 overview, component handling . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Operator message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 overview, line concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
operator panel, input conveyor side . . . . . . . . . .49 overview, tape container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
operator panel, output conveyor side . . . . . . . . .49 overview, wafflepack changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
operator profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
optical centering with oblique lighting . . . . . . . .488 P
Optical measurement of BGAs and
flip-chips with the F placement machine . .303 package dimension option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
optical PCB position detection system . . . . . . .220 package dimension parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 310
option package form interpreter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ball image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 package form list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Camera Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 package form number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Change fiducial name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 parallel pin for centering the magazines . . . . . 468
Define new fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 parallel pins for opening and closing
Display Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 the locking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Display component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 parameters
Evaluation time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ball imaging parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 fluxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Load GF data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Measure component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 lead dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Measure mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 of fiducial structure field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Package dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 of the search field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Pick Up Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 package dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Pickup component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 parameters for the measuring method . . . . . . 346
Pin dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Program transform 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 pattern search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Save GF data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Pause processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Search area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 PCB barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 479
Set component type (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 assembly options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Standard values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Store image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Template, high, middle and low res. . . . . . .257 laser safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
561
01/2001 US Edition
single conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 placement functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

PCB camera, gantry 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 placement heads, overview of the modules . . . 57
PCB camera, gantry 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Placement program ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
PCB conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 placement system switched off at the
dual conveyor option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 main switch, but still connected ... . . . . . . 109
PCB conveyor width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 placement system switched off at
PCB conveyor, overview of the modules . . . . . 63 the main switch and disconnected ... . . . . 109
PCB conveyor, structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 placement system, warning signs . . . . . . . . . . . 70
PCB data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 placing of components with a height clearance
functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 of up to 21 mm (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
option, activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 PLEASE NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PCB format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39 polygon wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
PCB position detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 position fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468, 470
PCB to output conv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 position fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
PCB to processing conv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 position measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
PCB transport direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 position of the compressed air unit . . . . . . . . . 107
PCB vision module, technical data . . . . . . . . . . 62 position of the gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
PCB vision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 position of the stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Position of the switches and buttons . . . . . . . . 119
periods of stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 position recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Possible cause(s) of the error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
permissible ambient factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Possible settings, control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
permissible load per unit area on foundation . . 44 potentially lethal voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
personnel, qualified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pick Up Component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Pick up nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 power supply connection for changeover table . 41
pick up nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 power supply for control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 38, 39 preliminary set-up of the placement station . . . 379
angular accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 preparing the component table . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
component vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 preparing the module for set-up . . . . . . . . . . . 441
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 press-fit cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
DR axis driving mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 pressure dewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fine pitch vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 pressure gauge for the PCB stopper working pres-
placement accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 sure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Printing a help topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Processing PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 programming the transformation table . . . . . . 317
Z axis driving mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 protective contactor combination K1 . . . . . . . . 100
picking up a nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 protective contactor combination K2 . . . . . . . . 100
pick-up angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pick-up circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 protective cover switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 100
pick-up position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 input conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
pin contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pin dimension option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 output conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
pitch deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 protective covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
pixels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
562
01/2001 US Edition
Q rinse cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
qualified personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 67 Rinse fluxer head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
quality factor, fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 rinsing / brushing station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
quality of the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 rinsing station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Questions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 rinsing tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
rinsing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
R
RISK OF CRUSHING HANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ratings, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 room temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Read in component barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 rotational offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
recommendation Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 integration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
reference fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
reference run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 use package form edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
fluxer head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Row measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
reference run for all head axes . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Row mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Refill magazine with nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 RV head indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 193
Refill track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
S
Refilling an empty track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
refilling of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
refilling the flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 safety equipment
regular components, criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Reject circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
rejecting defective nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 protective covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Remote Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Safety Information, Remote Support . . . . . . . . 529
Remote Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Remove nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 coplanarity laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
removing cover foil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 coupling and uncoupling the mobile changeover
removing loose components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Replace nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 for opening the protective covers . . . . . . . . 91
replacing the complete dispensing needle for processing capacitors
and centering nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 based on powdered metal . . . . . . . . . 95, 426
Requirements, Remote Support . . . . . . . . . . . .530 for the component vision modules on
reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Fx machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
residual voltage after emerg. stop . . . . . . . . . . .106 for the component
residual voltage when main switch is off . . . . . .106 vision modules (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
residual voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 for the coplanarity
responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 laser module 80F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 operational reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
retaining nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 PCB barcode reader (option) . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Return nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 safety panels, lefthand side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
return nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 safety panels, righthand side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
returning a nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 save fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Save GF data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 286
revision index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Save GF data option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
revisions, index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 schedule the job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Revolver head functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 search area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
563
01/2001 US Edition
Search area option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 single conveyor, technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Search for words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 single cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Searching for a help topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Single functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 177, 519
SECS connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Single Functions buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
SECS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Single functions, Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
SECS-II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Single transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
securing the placement machine SIPLACE F4 with wafflepack changer . . . . . . . . 38
to prevent it slipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 SIPLACE line, switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
select gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 SIPLACE OIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Select language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 SIPLACE on the World Wide Web (WWW) . . . . 23
Select Package Form menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Selected track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Size measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Sending messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Size mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
sequence of measurements for optically Size of the spooling file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
centering bare dies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 slot for the parallel pin (7) for
sequences of measuring methods . . . . . . . . . 346 centering the magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
service engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27 software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Software options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
service socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 108, 109 Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Software upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
servo unit, test socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Set component type option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Software version description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
setting illumination values soldering process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353, 359 space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39
setting the contrast sensitivity special magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
to intensify the contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Specific. of the ISDN connection . . . . . . . . . . . 530
to intensify the contrast for low-contrast com- Specified component barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Specified segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
to suppress defective structures . . . . 318, 320 splicing the tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
using the transformation tables . . . . . . . . 318 Spool full action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
setting the control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
setting the distance between the dispensing needle Spooling file storage area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
and the PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Stand alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
setting the guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 standard guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Setting up connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Star in position 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
setting up the feeder modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Start and Stop buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
setting up the placement machine . . . . . . . . . . 46 Start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50, 99
setting up the placement machine, tasks . . . . . 48 Start SIPLACE OIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Setup data, current location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Start SITEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
set-up of the placement station . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Starting error diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Set-up position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 starting stations that remain switched
set-up, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 on after the line computer has been
shear, PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Shut down computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 starting the user interface of the SC . . . . . . . . 367
shut down computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Station computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
shutdown menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 station computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 52
shut-off valve lever in the CLOSED position . . 107 sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
564
01/2001 US Edition
station extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 syringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505, 508

station extensions / hardware and software . . . .26 syringe piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508, 520
station extensions, hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 system description
stationary component supply component vision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
location 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 PCB vision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
location 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
stationary component supply (location 1) . . . . . .33 T
stationary component supply (location 3) . . . . . .33
Table for the linear feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Status area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
tape container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378, 443
status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
tape cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Status of the host computer connection . . . . . .543
tape cutter, general information . . . . . . . . . . . 444
steps before you switch on the stations . . . . . .366
tape cutter, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50, 97, 99
tape foil removal container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Stop processing PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
tape removal mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Store image option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
tasks of the package form interpreter . . . . . . . 338
structure of the 12-segment Collect&Place head 57
TCP/IP port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540, 542
structure of the dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
teach fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 240
structure of the PCB conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
teach fiducial flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
structure of the Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . .59
teaching with standard values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
structure of the user manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
technical data
structure of the X axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
12-segment Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . 61
structure of the Y axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
24x24 component vision module . . . . . . . 229
sub-gantry camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
ceramic substrate centering . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Supplement. info on the current error . . . . . . . .397
compressed air specification . . . . . . . . . . . 43
supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
compressed air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
support for flatpack magazine (80F4) . . . . . . . .461
coplanarity laser module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
supporting rod for the dividing plates . . . . . . . .378
dual conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 478
supporting surfaces, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
electrical ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
surface of the fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
feeder modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
survey
fine pitch vision module . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 231
of the revisions in the 01/2001 US edition . .32
flip-chip vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
of the revisions in the 02/00 edition . . . . . . .31
flux dispenser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
line concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
nozzle changer for the 12-segment
Collect&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
PCB vision module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PCB vision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SW installation, general definitions . . . . . . . . . .551
Pick&Place head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Switch to operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
switching off the line computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
single conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
switching off the SIPLACE line . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
SIPLACE 80F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
switching off the stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
SIPLACE 80S-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
switching on the station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
X-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
synchronous transport type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Y-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
template window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
565
01/2001 US Edition
terminals 1, 3, 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Turn D-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

terminals 2, 4, 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 types of fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
terminals L1, L2, L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 U
test component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Ultrasonic sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
test component flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Unclamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Test Component menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
undocking the component table . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Test Component option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
undocking the mobile comp. table . . . . . . 382, 447
test package form
UNIX user manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
visual representation/ programming
unwanted reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
measurement types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Update inventroy levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
test socket
Upload placement program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
use as prescribed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
use existing structures as fiducials . . . . . . . . . 224
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
used tape channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
testing illumination settings . . . . . . . . . . . 352, 358
used tape cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
time, package form-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
used tape guide channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
tip of dispensing needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
user classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
user manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Toolbar in main view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
user manual, general information . . . . . . . . . . . 23
tools for the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
user manual, structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Topic area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Topic entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 V
total connected load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
total power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Vacuum on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Vacuum test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
touchscreen monito . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Vacuum values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Track empty error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 vacuum/offset test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Track errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Trackball and mouse buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Vibrate track with linear feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tracks for location 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 video images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 vision analysis unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 220
transfer Vision functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
of package form data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 vision processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Transform option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 vision system
transformation tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
transformation tables 1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 vision systems, overview of the modules . . . . . 61
transport configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 VME bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
transport dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 voltage in normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Transport error 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Transport errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Transport functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 W
Transport position, WPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
waffle tray holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
transport type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476, 485
wafflepack changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Transport, single functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
abbr. WPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Waiting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Travel functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
waiting time for the PCB conveyor . . . . . . . . . 516
566
01/2001 US Edition
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 inserting trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
warning and message boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 magazine storage unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
warning signs on the placement system . . . . . . .70 magazine trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
warning triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 overview (80F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
waste tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 refilling the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
waste tape container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 444 safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
weight fully equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 safety panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
weight of basic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
weight of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
What to do when ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 trays setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
width adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 WPC refilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
width adjustment on the dual conveyor . . . . . . .477
Window X
Scroll back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
X axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Scroll down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
X axis, structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Working area/display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
X axis, technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
working pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
X-ray radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
WPC
access area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Y
check notch of tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
clamping screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Y axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
display and operating elements . . . . . . . . .456 Y axis, structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
docking pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Y axis, technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
driver notch of tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
EMERGENCY STOP button . . . . . . . . . . .456 Z
Fitting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Zero pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
functional sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
horizontal axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
567
01/2001 US Edition
568
Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Subject to change without prior notice
Order No.: 00192546-01 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

To be ordered from
Siemens PLS AG
PL EA 1 V GC DOK
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Adjunting The Illumination - 00192546-01

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Adjunting The Illumination - 00192546-01

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Table of contents

What schould you do ...

Online help system

Station extensions / hardware

Station extensions / software

Order No.: 00192546-01 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

1.2 Structure of the user manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

1.3 User classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1.4 Revision index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1.5 Description of the machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.6 The line concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

1.7 Electrical and pneumatic connection points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

1.8 Technical data ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1.9 Dimensions and weight of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

1.10 Setting up the placement machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

1.11 Overview of the modules - controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

1.12 Overview of the modules - gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

1.13 Overview of the modules - placement heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

1.14 Overview of the modules - vision systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

1.15 Overview of the modules - PCB conveyor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

2.1 Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.1.5 Warning signs on the placement system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

2.2 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

2.6 Lock out and tag out procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

2.8 ESD guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

3 Introduction and basic concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

3.1 Machine displays and controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

3.2 Principles of the graphic user interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

3.3 User interface - views and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

4 Placement functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

4.1 Setup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

4.2 Error display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

4.3 Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

5 Single functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

5.1 General comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

5.2 Single functions, gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

5.3 Single functions, transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

6 Vision functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

6.1 The vision systems on the placement machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

6.2 PCB vision system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

6.3 Component vision systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

6.5 Teach Fiducial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

6.5.4.1 Standard Values Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

6.6 Test Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

6.7 Guidelines for Describing Package Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

6.8 Recommendation for visually centering components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

7 What should you do ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

7.1 Switching on the SIPLACE line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

7.2 Switching off the SIPLACE line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

7.3 Changing jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

7.4 When you change shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

7.5 When you, as an operator, carry out a walk-through inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

7.6 Preliminary set-up of the placement station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

7.7 Changing the set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

7.8 Component table, mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

7.9 How to avoid track errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

7.10 What to note when refilling components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

7.11 Tools for the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

7.12 Operator profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

7.13 Line engineer profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

8 Error information and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

8.2 Calling error information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394